JP7061024B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine.

Conventionally, a technique of a gaming machine provided with a decorative portion capable of performing a display visible to a player has been known (see Patent Document 1) .

The gaming machine described in the above publication has a configuration in which a lamp substrate on which a light source is mounted is housed in a lens cover mounted on a front frame in a decorative portion, and the light from the light source is irradiated to the outside through the lens cover. It is equipped with a lighting device .

JP-A-2002-143403

In such a gaming machine, it is desired to further improve the playability by providing a visual effect to the player by the decorative portion as described above .

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving playability .

The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine provided with a decorative portion capable of performing an effect that can be visually recognized by a player, and the decorative portion includes a light emitting means, a substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted, and the above. A light guide member that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means, a base member arranged on the back surface side of the substrate, and a position where the light emitted from the light emitting means via the light emitting means can enter. The light transmissive member comprises, and the light transmissive member is outside the at least one end of the substrate from a position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the substrate, and is in the substrate. The base member is extended to a position beyond the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means, and the base member is formed of a reflective member capable of reflecting light, and at least one end of the substrate and an end of the light guide member. Light emitted from the end portion of the light transmissive member and light emitted from the end portion of the light guide member at a position outside the surface of the substrate and beyond the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the substrate. The light guide member is provided at a reflective position, is outside the at least one end of the substrate from a position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the substrate, and is the light emitting means of the substrate. It is characterized by being extended so as to be inclined to a position beyond the back surface of the mounting surface .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the playability .

The perspective view which shows the appearance in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. Similarly, an exploded perspective view showing the appearance. Similarly, a front view showing the appearance of the game board. Similarly, a front view showing the LED unit including the first and second special symbol display units. Similarly, a block diagram showing the main control circuit. Similarly, (a) a table showing the specifications of the special symbol game. (B) A table showing the specifications of a normal symbol game. (C) A table showing the distribution of hits. (D) A table showing the types of hits. Similarly, a flowchart showing the flow of the game. The flowchart which shows the continuation of FIG. Similarly, a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing the system timer interrupt process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol memory check process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol fluctuation time management process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing the hit end interval processing executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the sub control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sub control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the sub control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a command analysis process executed by the sub control circuit. A flowchart showing the continuation of. The front view which shows the appearance of the game board in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. Similarly, a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main control circuit. Similarly, a flowchart showing a distribution device control process executed by the main control circuit. The front view which showed the center accessory and the start port unit. A front perspective view showing a center accessory and a starting port unit. The rear view which showed the center accessory and the start port unit. A rear perspective view showing a center accessory and a starting port unit. Upper perspective view showing the croon. A downward perspective view showing the crune. A plan view showing the crune. Side sectional view showing the crune. A front perspective view showing a game ball distribution device, a central gutter, and a starting port unit. An exploded perspective view showing a game ball distribution device. An exploded perspective view showing a game ball distribution device. Left side view showing the game ball distribution device. Left side view showing a state in which the communication hole is closed by the game ball distribution device. An exploded front perspective view showing a central gutter and a starting port unit. An exploded rear perspective view showing a central gutter and a starting port unit. Left side view showing a state in which the communication hole is opened by the game ball distribution device. Left side view showing a state in which the communication hole is closed by the game ball distribution device. A rear perspective view of a part of the game board showing the flow of the game ball. A plan view of Kroon showing the flow of a game ball. A plan view of Kroon showing the flow of a game ball. Front sectional view of Kroon showing the flow of a game ball. A plan view of Kroon showing the flow of a game ball in the prior art. A front perspective view of a part of the game board showing the flow of the game ball. An exploded front perspective view showing a central gutter and a starting port unit showing the flow of a game ball on a disadvantaged course. A forward exploded perspective view showing a central gutter and a starting port unit showing the flow of a game ball on an advantageous course. A rearward exploded perspective view showing a central gutter and a starting port unit showing the flow of a game ball on an advantageous course. It is an external perspective view of the first movable accessory unit. It is a front view of the first movable accessory unit. It is a front view which omitted a part of the first movable accessory unit. It is an enlarged front view which omitted a part of the first movable accessory unit. It is an external perspective view which omitted a part of the first movable accessory unit. It is an enlarged rear view which shows the 1st movable mechanism and omitted a part. It is an external perspective view which shows the 1st movable mechanism and omitted a part. It is a front view which shows the 1st movable mechanism in a descending state, and a part is omitted. It is an enlarged rear view which shows the 2nd movable mechanism and omitted a part. It is an enlarged rear view which shows the 2nd movable mechanism in the rocking state and omitted a part. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the middle finger part. It is a vertical sectional view which shows the middle finger part. It is an enlarged front view which shows the 2nd movable mechanism in the initial state, and a part is omitted. It is an enlarged front view which shows the 2nd movable mechanism in the rocking state and omitted a part. It is an enlarged front view which shows the 3rd movable mechanism in a rotating state, and a part is omitted. It is a front view which shows the gaming machine which was in the initial state of a production device. It is a front view which shows the gaming machine which made the 1st movable mechanism a descent state. It is a front view which shows the gaming machine which made the 2nd movable mechanism swing state. It is a front view which shows the gaming machine which made the 3rd movable mechanism a rotating state. It is external perspective view of the 2nd movable accessory unit. It is a front view of the second movable accessory unit. It is a rear view which omitted a part of the 2nd movable accessory unit. It is an enlarged rear view which omitted a part of the 2nd movable accessory unit. It is an external perspective view which omitted a part of the 2nd movable accessory unit. It is a front view which shows the movable light emitting body in the production state. It is a rear view which shows the movable light emitting body in the production state, and a part is omitted. It is an enlarged rear view which shows the movable light emitting body in the production state and omitted a part. It is a front view which shows a part of the constituent members of a movable light emitting body. It is an exploded perspective view which omitted a part of the 2nd movable accessory unit. It is a cross-sectional view which shows the blade part. It is a front view which shows the gaming machine which was in the initial state of a movable light emitter. It is a front view which shows the gaming machine which put the movable light emitting body in the production state. It is a schematic cross-sectional view which shows the blade part. It is a schematic cross-sectional view which shows the blade part in the 2nd movable accessory unit which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is an external perspective view which shows the movable light emitting body in the 2nd movable accessory unit which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the finger part in the 2nd movable accessory unit which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic cross-sectional view which shows the finger part in the 2nd movable accessory unit which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the spec of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern table selection table. (A) A flowchart showing an effect pattern determination process executed by a sub-control circuit. (B) Similarly, a flowchart showing a hit start effect determination process. (A) A flowchart showing a round-to-round effect determination process executed by the sub-control circuit. (B) Similarly, a flowchart showing a hit end effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the hit type in a JAC game. It is a figure which shows the screen which is displayed on the liquid crystal display device while the variable display is performed in a JAC game. It is a figure which shows the screen which is displayed on the liquid crystal display device while the jackpot game is being executed in a JAC game. (A) It is a figure which shows the production flow of the big hit game when the limit is not reached. (B) It is a figure which shows the production flow of the big hit game at the time of reaching the limit. (A) It is a figure which shows an example of the effect content displayed in the 1st ED effect. (B) It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 100 (a). (C) It is a figure which shows an example of the effect content displayed in the result display effect. (D) It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 100 (c). (A) It is a figure which shows an example of the effect content displayed in the EX game transition effect. (B) It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 101 (a). (C) It is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 101 (b). (A) It is a figure which shows the darkening start pattern determination table when the holding ball is first displayed in the 4th holding ball display area in the 1st effect of the 1st look-ahead effect. (B) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the darkening start pattern determination table when the holding ball is first displayed in the 3rd holding ball display area. (C) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the darkening start pattern determination table when the holding ball is first displayed in the 2nd holding ball display area. (A) It is a figure which shows the hold continuous non-notification character selection table of the 2nd effect of the 1st look-ahead effect. (B) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the hold continuous notification character selection table. A flowchart showing a production pattern determination process related to a character appearance availability determination table. (A) It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect content of the first look-ahead effect. (B) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 105 (a). (C) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 105 (b). (D) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 105 (c). (E) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 105 (d). (F) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 105 (e). (G) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 105 (f). (H) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 105 (g). (A) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 105 (h). (B) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 106 (a). (C) Similarly, it is a figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 106 (b). (D) Similarly, it is a figure which shows another example of the continuation of FIG. 106 (b). This is the production flow of the jackpot effect when the second look-ahead effect is not performed. This is the production flow of the jackpot effect when the second look-ahead effect is performed. A flowchart showing the second look-ahead effect execution decision process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect content displayed by the liquid crystal display device when two game balls win a prize in a big prize opening in a small hit game. It is a figure which shows an example of the production content of the hold continuous suggestion effect which is displayed of the liquid crystal display device when two game balls win a prize in a big prize opening in a small hit game. A flowchart showing a small hit game prize ball number display process. It is a flowchart which shows the game evaluation process in a JAC game. It is a figure which shows the rank point determination table of a game count. It is a figure which shows the rank point determination table of the number of JACs. It is a figure which shows the rank point determination table of the number of acquired balls. It is a figure which shows the comprehensive rank determination table. It is a figure which shows the game evaluation result display screen in a JAC game. It is a figure which shows another example of the game evaluation result display screen in a JAC game. It is a flowchart which shows the fraud detection process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main CPU start processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the payout / launch control circuit activation processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the sub CPU start processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the time series of processing after power-on. It is a flowchart which shows the main CPU start processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the payout / launch control circuit activation processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the sub CPU start processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device when the specific prize-winning effect is performed. A flowchart showing a specific winning effect determination process.

[Composition of gaming machines]
First, an overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5.
In the following description, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player's point of view, the front side is the front side and the back side is the rear side, and the front-rear direction is defined. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is the left side and the right-hand side is the right side, and the left-right direction is defined.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a plate unit 14, a launching device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, a game board 17, a payout unit 18, and a substrate. The unit 19 is provided.

The wooden frame 11 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back surface side, and also has the glass door 13, the dish unit 14, the launcher 15, the liquid crystal display device 16, and the game board 17 on the front surface side. To support.

The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22. A protective glass 23 having transparency is arranged in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protective glass 23 is arranged so as to face the game board 17 described later in the front-rear direction in a state where the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. Further, a speaker 24 and a lamp 25 are arranged on the upper part of the glass door 13. The speaker 24 is, for example, a voice notification, an effect, an error notification, and the like. The lamp 25 is used for, for example, announcing with light, directing, and the like.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The dish unit 14 is located in the lower front part of the base door 12 and below the glass door 13.

The upper plate 26 is for storing a game ball to be fired in the game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout port 61 and an effect button 62. The payout port 61 is for lending and paying out (prize balls) game balls. The payout outlet 61 discharges the game ball when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied. The effect button 62 is a so-called "CHANGE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 62 is operated by the player.

The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing the game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout port 63. The payout port 63 is for lending and paying out (prize balls) game balls, similarly to the payout port 63 of the upper plate 26. The payout port 63 discharges the game ball when the game ball overflows from the upper plate 26.

The launching device 15 is for launching the game ball stored in the upper plate 26 into the game area 20. The launcher 15 is located in the lower right front of the base door 12 and is located in the lower right of the dish unit 14. The launching device 15 includes a panel body 31, a driving device (not shown), and a launching handle 32.

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15. The firing handle 32 is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 31. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 31, and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid. In this way, when the launch handle 32 is operated by the player in the launch device 15, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device in response to the operation.

The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of the hit determination and various images related to the game. The various images include, for example, an identification symbol (decorative symbol) for effect, an effect image during a big hit, a demo effect image, a hold count of variable display of the identification symbol, and the like. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is arranged substantially in the center of the game board 17 (inner peripheral side of the center accessory 42 described later).

The game board 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. On the front side surface of the game board 17, a game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 17 includes a guide rail 41, a center accessory 42, a game ball distribution device 5400 (first starting port 5442), and a normal electric accessory unit 400 (second starting port 440 and ordinary electric). 460), passage gate 49, attacker unit 500 (large winning opening 540 and special electric accessory 600), general winning opening 53, 54, 450, out opening 55, LED unit 70, decorative member 56, movable accessory unit 57 is provided.

The guide rail 41 is composed of two rail-shaped members (hereinafter, referred to as "outer rail 41a" and "inner rail 41b"). The outer rail 41a mainly delimits (defines) the game area 20. The outer rail 41a is arranged so as to surround the game area 20. The inner rail 41b, together with the outer rail 41a, is for guiding the launched game ball to the upper part of the game area 20. The inner rail 41b is arranged inside the outer rail 41a on the left side of the game board 17.

The center accessory 42 is formed in a substantially annular shape when viewed from the front. A game board 17 is opened on the inside (inner peripheral side) of the center accessory 42, and a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is formed. The center accessory 42 is fixed to the game board 17 using screws or the like. The front side surface of the center accessory 42 is decorated with various decorations that can be visually recognized by the player. A frame-shaped member is provided on the outer peripheral portion of the center accessory 42 to prevent the game ball from entering the inside of the center accessory 42. Further, the upper portion of the center accessory 42 can divide the flow area of the game ball in the game area 20 into the left and right sides of the center accessory 42.

The game ball launched by the launching device 15 flows down toward the lower side of the game board 17 while changing the traveling direction due to a collision with the center accessory 42, the game nail 68 driven into the game board 17, and the like. .. The flow area of the launched game ball is distributed according to the amount of operation of the launch handle 32. Specifically, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 32 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side of the center accessory 42. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 32 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right side of the center accessory 42. The method of causing the game ball to flow down to the left side of the center accessory 42 is called "left-handed strike", and the method of causing the game ball to flow down to the right side of the center accessory 42 is called "right-handed strike".

The game ball distribution device 5400 is a device that appropriately distributes the game ball to the first start port 5442 or the out port 5443 / 5444. The game ball distribution device 5400 is arranged at a substantially central lower portion of the game area 20.

The first starting port 5442 gives an opportunity for a hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and the result of the hit determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol, which will be described later. It gives an opportunity to be displayed on the display unit 74. A first start port switch 5472 is arranged at the first start port 5442 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins in the first start port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472, a hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (board unit 19 shown in FIG. 2), and a preset number of game balls are discharged through the payout port 61. Alternatively, it is discharged (discharged) from the payout port 63 to the upper plate 26 or the lower plate 27. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is performed by left-handed strike.
A detailed description of the configuration of the game ball distribution device 5400 will be described later.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440 and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at a substantially lower right portion of the game area 20.

The second starting port 440 gives an opportunity for a hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and the result of the hit determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol, which will be described later. It gives an opportunity to be displayed on the display unit 74. A second start port switch 441 is arranged at the second start port 440 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441, a hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (board unit 19 shown in FIG. 2), and a preset number of game balls are discharged through the payout port 61. Alternatively, it is discharged (discharged) from the payout port 63 to the upper plate 26 or the lower plate 27. The difficulty of winning the second starting port 440 is determined by the ordinary electric accessory 460. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by right-handed hitting.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a blade member 461 that can rotate in the left-right direction, and a start port solenoid 462 (see FIG. 5) that drives the blade member 461. The ordinary electric accessory 460 is arranged above the second starting port 440. The ordinary electric accessory 460 can shift (drive) between an open state in which the game ball easily passes and a closed state in which the game ball does not easily pass by driving the blade member 461 by the start port solenoid 462. It is composed of. When the game ball passes through the blade member 461 in the ordinary electric accessory 460, the game ball is awarded to the second starting port 440. The opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 461) is performed only for a predetermined period and a predetermined number of times when the ordinary symbol has a specific stop display mode in the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

The passing gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on condition that the game ball wins (passes). The passage gate 49 is located on the central right side of the game board 17 and is arranged above the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. A passage gate switch 49a is arranged at the passage gate 49 (see FIG. 5). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a. When the game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (board unit 19 shown in FIG. 2). The passing of the game ball to the passing gate 49 is performed by right-handed striking.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which a large winning opening 540 and a special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is located at a substantially lower right portion of the game area 20 and below the ordinary electric accessory unit 400.

The large winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a hit game state (large hit game state or small hit game state), which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is arranged in the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a large winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 5) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special winning opening 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. In the open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610), the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74, and the hit game state (big hit game state or It is performed when the state is changed to the small hit game state).

The general winning openings 53 and 54 are arranged at the lower left of the game board 17 in a state of being separated from each other. Further, the general winning opening 450 is provided in the ordinary electric accessory unit 400. General winning opening switches 53a, 54a, and 451 are arranged at the general winning openings 53, 54, and 450 (see FIG. 5). When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 53, 54, 450, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 53a, 54a, 451. When a game ball is detected in the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, and 451 a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27) (discharge). Will be).

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls in the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 is 3, the number of prize balls in the general winning openings 53, 54, and 450 is 10, and the number of prize balls in the large winning opening 540. The number is set to 15 respectively. This value (number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The out port 55 is arranged at the lowermost center of the game board 17. The out port 55 is finally flowed in when the launched game ball does not win a prize in each winning (starting) opening such as the first starting opening 5442.

The LED unit 70 is located at the lower right of the game board 17 and is arranged outside the guide rail 41. The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 has, as the various display units, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special. It includes a design hold display unit 75 and a second special symbol hold display unit 76.

The ordinary symbol display unit 71 displays the result of determination (ordinary symbol determination) for the ordinary symbol game. Here, the ordinary symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the ordinary electric accessory 460 to the open state based on the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination). The ordinary symbol display unit 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variation display that alternately turns on and off. The combination (display pattern) of the display LEDs 71a and 71b by turning on and off is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) is a hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 71a and 71b (special symbol) is a specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is in the open state, the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the second start port is opened. The difficulty of winning a game ball to 440 is changed.

The hold display unit 72 for ordinary symbols displays the number of times of execution of the variable display of the reserved ordinary symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of hold of the variable display of the ordinary symbol"). The hold display unit 72 for ordinary symbols includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol displays the number of hold times of the variable display of the normal symbol by the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for two times, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned on. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 display the result of determination (hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of the determination (hit determination).

The first special symbol display unit 73 includes a display LED group 73a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a performs variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 (starting winning), and displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variation display in which the eight LEDs repeatedly turn on and off. In the display LED group 73a, the combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is a hit, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the game state in which the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is referred to as the first special symbol.

The second special symbol display unit 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a performs variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (starting winning), and displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts the variation display in which the eight LEDs repeatedly turn on and off. In the display LED group 74a, the combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is a hit, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the game state in which the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

As described above, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, it is normal. The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the hit gaming state, which is a state advantageous to the player, is determined. In the present embodiment, the hit determination includes a big hit determination and a small hit determination. That is, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state as a hit gaming state. Further, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the gaming state is shifted to the small hit gaming state as the hit gaming state. As described above, in the present embodiment, two types of hit game states are provided as the game states that shift from the normal game state.

The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 determine the number of times the reserved special symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of times the special symbol variation display is held"). It is to be displayed. The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol hold display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 display the number of hold times of the variable display of the special symbol by turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b. The display modes of turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b are the same as those of the display LEDs 72a / 72b of the normal symbol hold display unit 72.

The decorative member 56 is a member that decorates the game board 17. The decorative member 56 is the upper part of the game board 17 and is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the center accessory 42. The decorative member 56 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape with the longitudinal direction as the left-right direction. The surface side (player side) of the decorative member 56 is decorated to imitate a logo (character), a character, a symbol, or the like. The decorative member 56 is configured to be capable of emitting light by an LED (not shown) or the like.

The movable accessory unit 57 is a unit body that integrates a movable accessory, a drive source, and the like, which will be described later. The movable accessory unit 57 can perform a predetermined effect operation using the movable accessory to enhance the interest of the player. In the present embodiment, the movable accessory unit 57 includes a first movable accessory unit (effect device 2400), a second movable accessory unit 82, and a third movable accessory unit 83.

The first movable accessory unit (effect device 2400) is located in the upper right portion of the game board 17 and is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the center accessory 42.
A detailed description of the configuration of the first movable accessory unit (effect device 2400) will be described later.

The second movable accessory unit 82 is located at the upper part of the game board 17 and behind the decorative member 56.
A detailed description of the configuration of the second movable accessory unit 82 will be described later.

The third movable accessory unit 83 is a right portion and a left portion of the game board 17, and is arranged behind the center accessory 42, respectively. The third movable accessory unit 83 includes a hand accessory 86 (third movable accessory) that imitates a human hand. The hand accessory 86 is configured to be movable. Further, the hand accessory 86 is configured to be lit. In the standby state (state in which the effect operation is not performed) as shown in FIG. 3, most of the hand accessory 86 is concealed behind the game board 17 and the center accessory 42, making it difficult for the player to see. In addition, most of the hand accessory 86 is exposed in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the operating state (state in which the effect is being performed), so that the player can easily see the hand accessory 86.

Hereinafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the outline of the internal processing when the gaming ball wins the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 will be described.

When the game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started by the first special symbol display unit 73. If a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 5442 during the variable display of the first special symbol, the game to the first starting port 5442 is displayed until the first special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed. Execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning of the ball is suspended. After that, when the first special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed, the pending variable display of the first special symbol is started.

When the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, and the variation display of the second special symbol is started by the second special symbol display unit 74. In addition, when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 440 during the variation display of the second special symbol, the game to the second starting port 440 is displayed until the second special symbol in the variation display is stopped and displayed. The execution (start) of the variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the ball is suspended. After that, when the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the suspended display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started.

In the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the special symbols (first and second special symbols) do not change at the same time. That is, while the variable display of the special symbol is performed on one of the display units 73 of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed on the other display unit. .. In the present embodiment, when the execution of the variable display of the first and second special symbols is suspended, the start winning prize to the second starting port 440 is prioritized, and the variable display of the second special symbol is performed.

Further, an upper limit is set for the number of times of holding the variable display of the first and second special symbols. In the present embodiment, the number of times of holding the variable display of the first and second special symbols is set up to 4 times each. Therefore, the maximum number of holdings for the variable display of the special symbol is eight, which is the total number of holdings for the variable display of the special symbol due to the winning of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440.

Further, during the change of the first or second special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the identification symbol consisting of numbers changes in the liquid crystal display device 16 except in a specific case. Is displayed. In this embodiment, symbols from "1" to "8" are used as the numbers. Further, as for the identification symbol that is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the first or second special symbol that is being variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is stopped and displayed, and is stopped. Is displayed. The identification symbol is also used as identification information for directing.

Further, when the first or second special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is in a specific stop display mode, the player is notified that it is a hit. The effect image to be made is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of types of hits are provided. In addition, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the specific stop display mode is set according to the type of hit. In such a configuration, the combination of the identification symbols that are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a specific display that can be recognized by the player according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. It becomes an aspect. As a result, the player can recognize the type of the hit in addition to the hit. It should be noted that some of the types of hits have a specific display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. According to this, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that it is a hit and the type of the hit.

[Electrical configuration of gaming machines]
Hereinafter, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control circuit 100 that controls a game and a sub control circuit 200 that controls an effect according to the progress of the game.

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like.

A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. In the present embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information on the special symbol game is stored as start-up storage. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, the first special symbol start storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the fluctuating first special symbol is stored as the start storage, and the first for the upper limit of four times. The first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as the start storage, are provided. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, the second special symbol start storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored as the start storage, and the second special for the upper limit of four times. The second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as the start storage, are provided.

Further, the main control circuit 100 includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101, and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by promptly supplying power to the main RAM 103, for example, when the power is cut off.

Further, various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special symbol hold display unit 75. The second special symbol hold display unit 76, the start port solenoid 462 that drives the blade member 461 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, the large winning port solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting a signal. Further, the main control circuit 100 is used to transmit data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of hits, and the like, and a hall computer that manages a pachinko gaming machine for the entire hall. The external terminal board 320 is connected.

Further, the first start port switch 5472, the second start port switch 441, the pass gate switch 49a, the count switch 541, the general winning port switches 53a, 54a, 451 and the like are connected to the main control circuit 100. When a game ball is detected by these members, a predetermined detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 100 from the members. Further, a backup clear switch 330 or the like that clears the backup data at the time of power failure according to the operation of the manager of the game hall is connected to the main control circuit 100.

Further, a payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100. A payout device 340 for paying out a game ball, a launcher 350 for firing a game ball, a card unit 360, and the like are connected to the payout / launch control circuit 300. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation is supplied to the ball lending operation panel 370.

When the payout / launch control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, the payout / launch control circuit 300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340. The payout device 340 is controlled to pay out the game ball. Further, in the payout / launch control circuit 300, when the launch handle 32 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction, electric power is applied to the launch solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). It supplies and controls the launch of the game ball.

Further, a sub control circuit 200 is connected to the command output port 106. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control in the liquid crystal display device 16, control related to the sound generated from the speaker 24, control related to the light of the lamp 25, and the like in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

In the present embodiment, the command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200, while the signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that a signal can be transmitted from the control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100.

The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 204, a voice control circuit 205, a lamp control circuit 206, an accessory control circuit 207, and the like. The sub control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100. Further, the sub control circuit 200 is connected to an effect button switch 310 that is turned on / off by operating the effect button 62.

The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

The program ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the gaming effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are configured to be used as the storage means for storing the program, the table, or the like, but the storage medium is not limited to this and can be read by a computer equipped with the control means. If it is, another embodiment may be used. For example, as the storage means, a hard disk device or a storage medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge may be used. Further, the program, the table, or the like may not be recorded in advance, but may be downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Further, the programs, tables, and the like may be recorded on different storage media.

The work RAM 203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for buffering image data, and an image signal for image data. It is equipped with a D / A converter or the like that converts the data.

The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to the game, such as identification symbol image data indicating the identification symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this way, the display control circuit 204 can control the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 205 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 24. The voice control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 24. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the audio signal and generates audio from the speaker 24.

The lamp control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the lamp 25 including the decorative lamp and the like. The lamp control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decorative patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 207 is for controlling the movable accessory unit 57 (the first movable accessory unit (effect device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, and the third movable accessory unit 83). It is a circuit. The accessory control circuit 207 is a accessory that stores a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to the movable accessory unit 57, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern. It has a data ROM and the like.

Further, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of the movable accessory unit 57. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting operation of the movable accessory unit 57 is controlled by supplying the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

[basic specifications]
Hereinafter, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 6 is a table showing the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, FIG. 6A is a table showing the specifications of the special symbol game. Further, FIG. 6B is a table showing the specifications of the ordinary symbol game. Further, FIG. 6 (c) is a table showing the distribution of hits. Further, FIG. 6D is a table showing the types of hits. The data in the table shown in FIGS. 6 (a) to 6 (d) is stored as a table in the main ROM 102.

In the special symbol game, the jackpot determination is performed in a low probability state or a high probability state. In this way, in the special symbol game, the gaming state in which the jackpot determination is performed in the low probability state is simply referred to as the low probability state (or the normal state or the non-probability change state). Further, in the special symbol game, the gaming state in which the jackpot determination is performed in the high probability state is simply referred to as the high probability state (or the probability change state). In this way, when the gaming state becomes the probabilistic state, the player is given a state more advantageous than the normal state.

Further, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is performed in a high probability state. Further, when the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit, the normal electric accessory 460 is opened (normal hit game) for a relatively long time. As described above, in the normal symbol game, the gaming state in which the normal symbol determination is performed in a high probability state and the normal electric accessory 460 is released for a relatively long time is referred to as an electric support state. In the electric support state, the time per normal symbol determination is shorter than in the non-electric support state. Such a state in which the electric support state is performed and the time for each normal symbol determination is short is referred to as a time saving state. It should be noted that the high-probability state of the normal symbol determination is configured to be configurable when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot or the like. Further, the high-probability state of the normal symbol determination ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, for example, when the time saving state ends.

In the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is not performed in the game state other than the time saving state. Such a gaming state (a gaming state other than the time saving state) in which the normal symbol determination is not performed is referred to as a normal state (or a non-time saving state). In this way, when the gaming state becomes the time saving state, the player is given a state more advantageous than the non-time saving state. The time saving state is continued until, for example, the hit determination (big hit determination and small hit determination) in the special symbol game is performed a predetermined number of times after shifting from the normal state.

As described above, the normal state is a gaming state in which the big hit determination is performed in a low probability state in the special symbol game, and the normal symbol determination is not performed in the normal symbol game.

First, the specifications of the special symbol game will be described with reference to FIG. 6A.

As shown in FIG. 6A, in the special symbol game, the probability that the result of the jackpot determination in the low probability state (normal state) becomes a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as the jackpot probability) is the first starting port 5442 and the second. In any case of the starting prize of the starting port 440, it is commonly set to 1/200 (one coefficient for 200 random values). Further, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (probability change state) is 1/100 (for 200 random values) in common regardless of the starting prize of either the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440. 2 coefficients). In addition, the probability that the result of the small hit determination will be a hit due to the start winning of the second starting port 440 (hereinafter referred to as the small hit probability) is 1/4 (50 coefficients for 200 random values). Set. It should be noted that the small hit determination is not made by the starting prize of the first starting port 5442. In other words, the probability that the small hit game will be started based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 440 is that the small hit game is started based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 5442. It is set higher than the probability of

Further, the number of STs is commonly set to 100 regardless of which of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 is a big hit. The ST (special time) is a probable change state that ends according to the number of times (number-cutting type). In the following, unless otherwise specified, "times" means the number of hit determinations (big hit determination and small hit determination) after the transition to the probabilistic state.

The number of STs is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 when the ultra-probability change state described later is reached. Specifically, 0 is displayed as an initial value in the super-probability change state. Then, a state in which the numerical value is added by 1 is displayed each time the hit determination (the determination result is lost) is repeated once. Then, when the numerical value of the number of STs reaches 100, the super-probability change state ends. The initial value may be 100 instead of 0. In this way, when the initial value of the number of STs is 100, the numerical value is subtracted by 1 each time the hit determination is repeated once.

In addition, the number of prize balls for winning the first starting port 5442 is three, the number of prize balls for winning the second starting port 440 is one, and the number of prize balls for winning the general winning opening 53, 54, 450 is. The number of prize balls for winning 10 pieces and winning the large prize opening 540 is set to 15, respectively. Further, the maximum winning count number per opening of the big winning opening 540 in the big hit game is set to 10 counts. Further, the maximum winning count number per opening of the ordinary electric accessory 460 in the ordinary symbol game is set to 10 counts. Further, the number of jackpot symbols is commonly set to 100 regardless of which of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 is the starting prize. Further, the number of small hit symbols in the case of starting winning of the second starting port 440 is set to 100.

Next, the specifications of the ordinary symbol game will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (b).

As shown in FIG. 6B, in the normal symbol game, the normal symbol determination is not performed in the low probability state. Further, the probability that the result of the normal symbol determination in the high probability state will be a hit is set to 100/100. If the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit, the second starting port 440 (normal electric accessory 460) is opened three times for 1.5 seconds, which is a relatively long time.

Next, the distribution of big hits and small hits will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (c).

As shown in FIG. 6 (c), the big hits due to the start winning of the first starting port 5442 are divided into 6 types of big hit contents (big hit types). Specifically, the jackpot due to the start winning of the first starting port 5442 is divided into 15R probability variation, substantial 10R probability variation, substantial 5R probability variation, 15R normal, substantial 10R normal, and substantial 5R normal. These jackpot contents are set so as to correspond to the special figures (1) jackpots -1 to 6 as jackpots by the starting prize of the first starting port 5442, respectively.

Specifically, a 15R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot-1. In addition, a substantial 10R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot-2. In addition, a substantial 5R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot-3. Further, 15R normal is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot-4. Further, in response to the special figure (1) jackpot -5, a substantial 10R normal is set. In addition, a substantial 5R normal is set corresponding to the special figure (1) jackpot-6.

In addition, the big hit by the start winning of the second starting port 440 is divided into 6 kinds of big hit contents (big hit type). Specifically, the big hit due to the start winning of the second starting port 440 is divided into 15R probability variation, real ball ejection small probability variation, special probability variation, 15R normal, real ball ejection small normal, and special normal. These jackpot contents are set so as to correspond to the special figures (2) jackpots -1 to 6 as jackpots by the starting prize of the second starting port 440, respectively.

Specifically, a 15R probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot -1. In addition, in response to the special figure (2) jackpot-2, the actual ball ejection small probability change is set. In addition, a special probability variation is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot-3. Further, 15R normal is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot-4. In addition, in response to the special figure (2) jackpot -5, the actual number of balls is set to be small. In addition, a special normal is set corresponding to the special figure (2) jackpot-6.

In addition, small hits are divided into two types of small hit contents (small hit types). Specifically, small hits are divided into two-time opening (1) and two-time opening (2). These small hit contents are set so as to correspond to the special figures (2) small hits -1 and 2 as small hits, respectively. Specifically, the opening (1) is set twice corresponding to the special figure (2) small hit-1. Further, the opening (2) is set twice corresponding to the special figure (2) small hit-2.

Here, the column (notation) of "number" shown in the table of FIG. 6C shows the number of big hit symbols or the number of small hit symbols corresponding to each hit content. That is, since the number of jackpot symbols by the starting prize of the first starting port 5442 is 100 as described above, the special figure (1) jackpots -1 to 6 are the jackpots by the starting winning of the first starting port 5442. The probabilities (expected values) to be distributed are set to be 25%, 15%, 10%, 25%, 15%, and 10%. Similarly, in the case of the special figure (2) jackpot -1 to 6, when the jackpot is due to the start winning of the second starting port 440, the probabilities (expected values) to be distributed are 25%, 15%, 10%, respectively. It is set to 25%, 15%, and 10%. Similarly, in the special figure (2) small hits -1 and 2, the probability (expected value) of distribution is set to 98% and 2%, respectively, in the case of small hits.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6 (c), special figures (1) big hits -1 to 6, special figures (2) big hits -1 to 6, and special figures (2) small hits -1 and 2 are shown. The number of time reductions given after the end of each hit game (big hit game or small hit game) is set. The number of time reductions given after the end of the hit game is set to be different depending on the state of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game when the big hit determination or the small hit determination is performed.

Here, the notation of "HH" shown in the table of FIG. 6C indicates that the special symbol game is in the probabilistic state and the normal symbol game is in the time saving state. Further, the notation of "HL" indicates that the special symbol game is in the probable change state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state. Further, the notation of "LH" indicates that the special symbol game is in the non-probability changing state and the normal symbol game is in the time saving state. Further, the notation of "LL" indicates that the special symbol game is in the non-probability changing state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state. Further, the notation "during high probability" indicates that during the high probability state, that is, a maximum of 100 time reductions are given in the special symbol game.

In such a setting, for example, when the special symbol game is in the non-probability changing state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state (in the case of "LL"), the special symbol (1) jackpot -1 or 6 jackpot is obtained. , 50 times of time reduction is given. On the other hand, for example, in the case of "LL" as well, in the case of the special figure (1) big hit-2 to 5 big hits, the number of time reductions is not given. That is, in the case where the special symbol game is in the non-probability changing state and the normal symbol game is in the non-time saving state, if the jackpot is due to the starting prize of the first starting port 5442, 35% (special symbol (1) jackpot- With a probability of 25% in the case of 1 + 10% in the case of special figure (1) jackpot-6), 50 time reductions are given, and with the remaining 65% probability, the time reductions are not given.

Further, in the case of a small hit, after the small hit game is completed, in principle, the game state before the small hit is not changed and is maintained as it is. Specifically, when a small hit occurs during the ST, after the small hit game is completed, the ST is restarted so as to continuously count from the number of STs related to the hit determination of the small hit. For example, if a small hit is reached at the 60th time during ST, the ST is restarted so as to count from the 61st time after the small hit game is completed. In this case, the remaining number of STs after the end of the small hit game is 40 times. Similarly, when a small hit is made during the time saving state, the time saving state is restarted so as to continuously count from the number of times related to the hit determination which is the small hit after the small hit game is completed.

As an exception to the above principle, for example, if a small hit is made at the 100th time (the final round of ST) during ST, the ST is finished after the small hit game is completed (the state before the small hit). Is not maintained). Similarly, for example, if a small hit occurs at the 100th time during the 100 times time reduction state, the time reduction state ends after the small hit game ends (the state before the small hit is not maintained).

In the following, the hit contents (big hit contents and small hit contents) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 6 (d).

As described above, in the present embodiment, as the contents of the big hit (type of big hit), 15R probability variation, 15R normal, real 10R probability change, real 10R normal, real 5R probability change, real 5R normal, special probability change, special normal, real ball ejection A small probability change and a small number of actual balls are usually provided. Further, as the contents of the small hit (type of small hit), the opening twice (1) and (2) are provided.

15R probability variation and 15R normal are jackpots in which the number of open seconds of the jackpot 540 per round is set to 27.996 seconds in all rounds of all 15 rounds when the jackpot game is started. be. As described above, in the 15R probability variation and the 15R normal, when the big hit game is started, the upper limit number of game balls can be set to win the big winning opening 540 in all rounds.

In the real 10R probability variation and the real 10R normal, when the big hit game is started, the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is 27.996 seconds in the 1st to 10th rounds out of all 15 rounds. It is a big hit that is set and the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is set to 0.102 seconds in the 11th to 15th rounds. In this way, in the real 10R probability variation and the real 10R normal, when the big hit game is started, the game ball is set so as to be able to win the big winning opening 540 in the 1st to 10th rounds, and in the 11th to 15th rounds. The game ball is set so as to be difficult (almost impossible) to win in the large winning opening 540.

In the real 5R probability change and the real 5R normal, when the big hit game is started, the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is 27.996 seconds in the 1st to 5th rounds out of all 15 rounds. It is a big hit that is set and the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is set to 0.102 seconds in the 6th to 15th rounds. In this way, in the real 5R probability variation and the real 5R normal, when the big hit game is started, the game ball is set so as to be able to win the big winning opening 540 in the 1st to 5th rounds, and in the 6th to 15th rounds. The game ball is set so as to be difficult (almost impossible) to win in the large winning opening 540.

The special probability change and special normal are set so that when the big hit game is started, the big winning opening 540 is opened three times in the first round out of all 15 rounds, and the first round is concerned. The opening seconds of the large winning opening 540 are set to 0.896 seconds in the first and second opening of the above, and the opening seconds of the large winning opening 540 are set to 26.466 seconds in the remaining third opening. In the 15th round, the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is set to 27.966 seconds. In this way, in special probability variation and special normal, when the big hit game is started, it is difficult to win the game ball in the big winning opening 540 in the first and second opening in the first round (for example, 1 per opening). It is set so that the maximum number of game balls can be won in the large winning opening 540 in the remaining 3rd opening and the 2nd to 15th rounds. In the special probability variation and the special normal, the interval between the second opening and the third opening in the first round is set to 5.0 seconds.

When the big hit game is started, the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is 0 in the 1st and 2nd rounds out of all 15 rounds. It is a big hit set to .896 seconds and the number of open seconds of the big winning opening 540 per round is set to 0.102 seconds in the 3rd to 15th rounds. In this way, it is usually difficult to win a game ball in the big winning opening 540 in all rounds when the big hit game is started (more specifically, the first and second rounds). Is set so that, for example, one game ball is won for each opening, and the game ball cannot be won for the third and subsequent rounds). It should be noted that the interval between the second round and the third round is usually set to 5.0 seconds.

The double opening (1) and (2) are small hits in which the large winning opening 540 is opened twice for 0.896 seconds each when the small hit game is started. That is, the small hit game is to operate the large winning opening 540 in a predetermined opening / closing mode. Thus, in the two opening (1) and (2), even if the small hit game is started, the game is played. It is set so that it is difficult to win a ball in the large winning opening 540 (for example, one prize is won at each opening). In the second opening (1), the small hit end interval after the opening of the second large winning opening 540 is completed is set to 1.0 second. Further, in the second opening (2), the small hit end interval after the opening of the second large winning opening 540 is completed is set to 5.0 seconds.

In this way, when the type of big hit is special probability variation and special normal, the number of opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 in the first and second opening of the first round, and when it is a small hit (opening twice (1)). And (2)), the opening seconds of the large winning opening 540 in the first and second opening are set to 0.896 seconds, which are the same as each other. That is, the special probability variation and special normal and the small hit (opened twice (1) and (2)) have the same opening mode of the large winning opening 540 until the second opening of the large winning opening 540 is completed. Set. In this way, in the special probability variation and the special normal big hit game, in the first and second opening of the first round, the big winning opening 540 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing mode (pseudo small hit opening and closing mode) that pretends to be a small hit game. It is something that makes you.

In the small hits (twice open (1) and (2)), the hit end intervals after the second opening of the large winning opening 540 is completed are set so as to be different from each other. Specifically, in the second opening (1), the hit end interval after the opening of the second large winning opening 540 is completed is set to 1.0 second. Further, in the second opening (2), the hit end interval after the opening of the second large winning opening 540 is completed is set to 5.0 seconds.

In addition, the interval between the opening between the second opening and the third opening in the special probability change and the special normal, and the small hit end interval in the two opening (2) of the small hits are the same number of seconds. It is set to (5.0 seconds). That is, the special probability variation and special normal and the small hit twice opening (2) are set in the same opening mode of the large winning opening 540 until the third opening of the large winning opening 540 is started. In other words, the special probability variation and the special normal jackpot game are found to be jackpot games after the third opening of the first round is performed. In this way, the special probability variation and the special normal big hit game are operated in the pseudo small hit opening / closing mode, and then the big winning opening 540 is opened / closed in the specific opening / closing mode (opening / closing mode after the big hit is found) that is found to be the big hit game. It is something to make.

Similarly, the number of opening seconds of the big winning opening 540 in the opening of the first and second rounds when the type of the big hit is the real ball output small probability change and the real ball output small normal, and the case where the big hit is a small hit (opened twice). The number of opening seconds of the large winning opening 540 in the first and second opening of (1) and (2)) is set to 0.896 seconds, which is the same as each other. That is, the real ball ejection small probability change and the real ball ejection small normal, and the small hit (double opening (1) and (2)) are the large winning opening 540 until the second opening of the large winning opening 540 is completed. The opening mode of is set to be the same.

In addition, the interval between rounds between the opening of the second round and the opening of the third round in the actual ball ejection small probability change and the actual ball ejection small amount normal, and the small hit end interval in the small hit opening twice (2). And are set to the same number of seconds (5.0 seconds) as each other. That is, the real ball ejection small probability change and the real ball ejection small normal and the small hit twice opening (2) are the opening modes of the large winning opening 540 until the third opening of the large winning opening 540 is started. Set to the same. As described above, in the normal big hit game with a small probability change of the actual ball output and a small number of actual balls, the large winning opening 540 has a predetermined opening / closing mode (pseudo small hit opening / closing mode) that pretends to be a small hit game in the opening of the first and second rounds. Is to open and close.

[Flow of the game]
Hereinafter, the flow of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming progresses while repeating the transition to an appropriate gaming state at a predetermined timing. Here, the corresponding effect modes are set for each of the game states. Various effects are set in the effect mode. That is, when the game is started, the game shifts to an appropriate game state, and the effect mode corresponding to the shifted game state is produced. In the present embodiment, the effect modes 1 to 6 are mainly provided as the effect modes.

As shown in FIG. 7, at the start of the game, in many cases, the game state is the normal game state (non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state). Further, in the normal gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed as the effect mode (step S900). The transition from the normal gaming state to another gaming state is mainly triggered by the result of the winning determination by the starting prize of the first starting port 5442. Exceptionally, for example, when there is a hold of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol when the electric support state of 100 times is completed, the hit determination of the second special symbol is the maximum number of holds in the normal gaming state. It is performed up to 4 times, and if it becomes a big hit due to the judgment result, it will shift to the electric support state, but since it is a rare case, it is omitted from this drawing. In addition, since the above four times are in a state where it is possible to return to the electric support state if a big hit occurs at that time even though the electric support state has ended, it is a normal game state and the second special symbol While the hit determination is being performed, the player may have a sense of expectation as a special effect mode different from the effect mode 1.

In the normal game state, the jackpot determination is performed by the so-called left-handed start winning of the first starting port 5442. Further, when the result of the big hit determination by the start winning of the first starting port 5442 becomes a big hit and the game state shifts to the time saving (electric support) state, so-called right-handed hitting is performed. In this way, while the time saving (electric support) state continues, the big hit determination is made by the starting prize of the second starting port 440. In addition, although the result of the big hit determination by the start winning of the first starting port 5442 is a big hit, the game state does not shift to the time saving (electric support) state (the game state is the non-time saving (non-electric support) state). If it remains), left-handed strikes will continue.

When the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (1) jackpot. When it reaches -1, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the probable change state / time saving (electric support) state. Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 1 ends and the effect of the effect mode 2 starts (steps S901 and S902). In the gaming state in which the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the number of STs is set to 100 times, and the number of time reductions is set to 50 times.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is a probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot-. When any of 1 to 3, the gaming state shifts to the probable change state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S910 and S911). That is, the gaming state after the transition is the same as the gaming state before the transition. Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends and the effect of the effect mode 3 starts. In the gaming state in which the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the number of STs is set to 100 times, and the number of time reductions is set to continue during the probable change state (up to 100 times).

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is a probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot-. When any of 1 to 3, the gaming state shifts to the probable change state / time saving (electric support) state again (steps S912 and S911). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the number of STs and the number of time reductions counted up to the big hit are cleared. That is, the number of STs and the number of time reductions are counted from 0.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is a probable change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot-. When any of 4 to 6, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state described later (steps S913 and S921). With the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 3 ends and the effect of the effect mode 4 starts.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is a probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice (opened twice). In 1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (100 times), the ST (probability change state) and the time saving state are terminated, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. (Steps S914, S915; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / time reduction (electric support) state) is maintained, and the ST number and time reduction number are cleared. The count is restarted (steps S914, S915; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S911 is a probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 3 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) becomes a loss. , The gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number of times (100 times), the ST (probability change state) and the time saving state are terminated, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. (Steps S916, S915; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / time reduction (electric support) state) is maintained, and the ST number and time reduction number are cleared. The count is restarted (steps S916, S915; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 3 is continued.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is a probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot-. When any of 4 to 6, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S920 and S921). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends and the effect of the effect mode 4 starts. In the gaming state in which the effect of the effect mode 4 is performed, the number of time reductions is set to 100 times.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect mode 4 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) big hit-1. When any of 3 to 3, the gaming state shifts to the probable change state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S922 and S911). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 4 ends and the effect of the effect mode 3 starts. With the transition of this game state, the number of time reductions counted until the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect mode 4 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) big hit-4. When it becomes any of 6 to 6, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state again (steps S923, S921). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 4 is continued. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the number of time reductions counted until the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect mode 4 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is hit (opened twice (1). ) And (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number of times (100 times), the time saving state ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S924, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / time reduction (electric support) state) is maintained, and the time reduction number is not cleared. , Counting is resumed (steps S924, S925; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 is continued.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S921 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 4 is performed, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) are lost. Then, the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number of times (100 times), the time saving state ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S926, S925; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (100 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / time reduction (electric support) state) is maintained, and the time reduction number is not cleared. , Counting is resumed (steps S926, S925; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 4 is continued.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is a probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice (opened twice). In 1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number of times (50 times), the ST (probability change state) continues, while the time reduction state ends, so that the probability change state / non-time reduction (probability change state / non-time reduction) The gaming state shifts to the non-electric support) state (steps S930, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 5 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / time reduction (electric support) state) is maintained, and the ST number and time reduction number are cleared. The count is restarted (steps S930, S931; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 is continued.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S902 is a probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 2 is performed, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) becomes a loss. , The gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number of times (50 times), the ST (probability change state) continues, while the time reduction state ends, so that the probability change state / non-time reduction (probability change state / non-time reduction) The gaming state shifts to the non-electric support) state (steps S932, S931; Yes, S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 5 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (probability change state / time reduction (electric support)) is maintained, and the ST number and time reduction number are cleared. The count is restarted (steps S932, S931; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 2 is continued.

In this way, when the effect of the effect mode 2 ends and the effect of the effect mode 5 starts, the ST (probability change state) continues, while the time saving (electric support) state ends. That is, the player does not hit right but hits left. In the present embodiment, the effect of the effect mode 5 is set to the same content as the effect of the effect mode 1. In this way, when the effect of the effect mode 5 is started, the player is in a gaming state (latent probability change state) in which it is difficult to recognize that the ST (probability change state) is continuing. The effect of the effect mode 5 may be the same as the effect of the effect mode 1, and may be performed by notifying the player that the latent probability change state has been determined.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probabilistic change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (1). When either the jackpot -1 or 2 is reached, the gaming state shifts to the probable change state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S934 and S911). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends and the effect of the effect mode 3 starts. With this transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted up to the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probabilistic change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (1). When the jackpot is -3, the gaming state shifts to the probabilistic state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state again (steps S935 and S933). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 5 is continued. In addition, with the transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted until the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probabilistic change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (1). When either the jackpot -4 or 5 is reached, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state (that is, the normal gaming state) (steps S936 and S900). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. With this transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted up to the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probable change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is the special figure (1). When the jackpot reaches -6, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S937 and S951). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends and the effect of the effect mode 6 starts. With this transition of the gaming state, the number of STs counted up to the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S933 is a probabilistic change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 5 is performed, if the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is lost, the said. The game state is changed according to the number of hit judgments related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number, the ST (probability change state) ends, so that the game state shifts to the normal game state (steps S938, S939; Yes). , S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 5 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit judgments related to the loss is not the predetermined number, the current gaming state (probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state) is maintained, the ST number is not cleared, and the count is counted. It is restarted (steps S938, S939; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 5 is continued.

The predetermined number of times in step S939 is set according to what triggered the production of the production mode 5 currently being performed. Specifically, when the effect of the effect mode 5 currently being performed is started when the number of hit determinations reaches 50 times after the effect of the effect mode 2 is started (step S931; Yes). ), The predetermined number of times in step S939 is 50 times (from the start of the effect of the effect mode 5). On the other hand, the effect of the effect mode 5 currently being performed is the special figure (1) jackpot-2 or 3 shown in step S960, or the special figure (1) jackpot -3 shown in step S935. When started with the above as an opportunity, the predetermined number of times in step S939 is 100 times (from the start of the effect of the effect mode 5).

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1). ) When the jackpot reaches -6, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state. Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 1 ends and the effect of the effect mode 6 starts (steps S950 and S951). In the gaming state in which the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the number of time reductions is set to 50 times.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot. When any of -1 to 3, the gaming state shifts to the probable change state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S952 and S911). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends and the effect of the effect mode 3 starts. With the transition of this game state, the number of time reductions counted until the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the jackpot determination (hit determination) is the special figure (2) jackpot. When any of -4 to 6, the gaming state shifts to the non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state (steps S953, S921). Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends and the effect of the effect mode 4 starts. With the transition of this game state, the number of time reductions counted until the big hit is cleared.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the result of the small hit determination (hit determination) is a hit (opened twice). In (1) and (2)), the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the hit. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the hit is a predetermined number (50 times), the time saving state ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S954, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the hit is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / time reduction (electric support) state) is maintained, and the time reduction number is not cleared. , Counting is resumed (steps S954, S955; No). That is, the effect of the effect mode 6 is continued.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S951 is a non-probability change state / time saving (electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 6 is performed, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination (hit determination) are lost. Then, the gaming state is changed according to the number of hit determinations related to the loss. Specifically, when the number of hit determinations related to the loss is a predetermined number of times (50 times), the time saving state ends, so that the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state (steps S956, S955; Yes, S900). That is, the effect of the effect mode 6 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 1 starts. On the other hand, if the number of hit determinations related to the loss is not the predetermined number (50 times), the current gaming state (non-probability change state / time reduction (electric support)) is maintained, and the time reduction number is not cleared. Counting is resumed (steps S956, S955; No).

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1). ) When the jackpot is -2 or 3, the gaming state shifts to the probabilistic state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state (steps S960 and S933). That is, the effect of the effect mode 1 ends, and the effect of the effect mode 5 starts.

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is a special figure (1). ) When the jackpot is -4 or 5, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state again. Further, with the transition of the gaming state, the effect of the effect mode 1 is continued (steps S970 and S900).

Further, when the gaming state shown in step S900 is a non-probability change state / non-time saving (non-electric support) state and the effect of the effect mode 1 is performed, if the result of the big hit determination (hit determination) is lost. The normal gaming state is maintained. That is, the effect of the effect mode 1 is continued (steps S980 and S900).

In such a game flow, when the effect mode 2 is started (step S902), the number of STs is set to 100 by shifting the game state to the probabilistic change state / time saving (electric support) state. To. Similarly, when the effect mode 3 is started (step S911), the number of STs is set to 100 by shifting the game state to the probabilistic change state / time saving (electric support) state. In this way, after the effect mode 2 or 3 is started (that is, after ST is started), for example, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the current gaming state is maintained after the small hit game is completed (in principle). , ST count is not cleared and counting is restarted. In this way, the effect of the effect mode 2 or 3 is continued.

Here, as described above, when the small hit game is started, the large winning opening 540 is opened twice to the extent that one game ball is won for each opening. That is, when the effect mode 2 or 3 is started (when the ST is started), for example, until the number of hit determinations becomes a predetermined number and the effect mode ends (until the ST ends). During the period), the small hit game can be repeated. In this way, when the small hit game is repeatedly performed, the prize ball can be acquired by the small hit game, and the number of game balls in the player's hand can be increased.

In the following, an ST capable of acquiring a prize ball by a small hit game and increasing the number of game balls in the player's hand will be referred to as a super-probability change state. Further, a game in which a prize ball is acquired by a small hit game after the super-probability state is reached and the number of game balls in the player's hand is increased is referred to as a rush (RUSH). That is, the rush (per time) shall continue from the big hit that triggered the transition to the super-probability change state to the next big hit or the end of the time saving state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the game in which the time saving state ends (for example, 100 or 50 times of the hit determination described later) is a condition for ending the rush.

If the effect mode 3 is started by any of the jackpots -1 to 3 in the special figure (2) after the effect mode 2 is started, the game state before and after the jackpot is also in a super-probable change state. Therefore, it is assumed that the super-probability change state continues. In such a case, it is assumed that the rush has been performed continuously (the second rush has been performed).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the super-probability change state is reached, the ball ejection display regarding the acquired ball ejection is performed. A detailed description of the payout display will be described later.

[Operation explanation of main control circuit]
Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S10, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a backup return process, an initialization setting process, and the like. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11.

In step S11, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value random value counter, the effect condition selection random value counter, and the like. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S12.

In step S12, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates various timers such as a timer for synchronizing the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201, and an opening time timer of the large winning opening 540. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S13.

In step S13, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the hit determination result is a hit according to the detection signal from the first start port switch 5472 or the second start port switch 441, and stores the determination result in the main RAM 103. Perform processing, etc. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S14. The details of this process will be described later.

In step S14, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit according to the detection signal from the passing gate switch 49a, and performs a process of storing the determination result in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S15.

In step S15, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 101 has the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 according to the determination results of the hit determination and the normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 in the processes in steps S13 and S14. , And the process of storing the control signal for driving the normal symbol display unit 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. The main CPU 101 transmits the stored control signal to the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74, and the normal symbol display unit 71. In this way, the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 variablely displays and stops the special symbol based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display unit 71 variablely displays and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S16.

In step S16, the main CPU 101 performs game information output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs game information to an external device (for example, the calling device, the hall computer, or the like). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 101 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a control signal for driving the large winning opening 540 (shutter 610) and the second starting opening 440 (ordinary electric accessory 460). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S18.

In step S18, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S19.

In step S19, the main CPU 101 performs a payout process. In this process, the main CPU 101 wins a game ball in various winning openings (specifically, a large winning opening 540, a first starting opening 5442, a second starting opening 440, and a general winning opening 53, 54, 450). It is determined whether or not it has been done. When it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in various winning openings, the main CPU 101 transmits a payout request command corresponding to the winning to the payout / launch control circuit 300. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11 again, and repeats the process from step S11 to step S19.

[System timer interrupt processing]
Hereinafter, the system timer interrupt process performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described with reference to FIG.
The system timer interrupt process is performed by interrupting the main process at predetermined intervals even when the main process is being performed.

In step S20, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process. In this process, the main CPU 101 saves the running program stored in the register. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S21.

In step S21, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the jackpot determination random number value counter, the jackpot symbol determination random number value counter, and the like. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S22.

In step S22, the main CPU 101 performs a switch input process. In this process, the main CPU 101 uses various switches (specifically, a first start port switch 5472, a second start port switch 441, a passing gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, and a general winning port switch 53a, 54a, 451). Etc.) is determined whether or not a signal is input to (that is, whether or not a game ball is detected by various switches). When the main CPU 101 determines that the game ball has been detected in any of the various switches (when the game ball wins in any of the various winning openings), the main CPU 101 transmits a command to the sub control circuit 200. .. For example, when the count switch 541 counts (detects) a game ball, the main CPU 101 transmits a large winning opening winning command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S23. The details of this process will be described later.

In step S23, the main CPU 101 performs a register return process. In this process, the main CPU 101 returns the saved program to the register. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol control processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol control process) performed in step S13 of FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 11, the numerical values described on the sides of steps S101 to S108 indicate the control state flags corresponding to these steps. Here, the control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes in steps S101 to S108 to be executed. The numerical value is stored in the storage area of the main RAM 103, which functions as a control state flag.

In step S100, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S101.

In steps S101 to S108, which will be described later, the main CPU 101 executes a step corresponding to the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. More specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to perform processing in each step based on the value of the control state flag, and according to the determination result, each at a predetermined timing set for each step. Perform the processing in the step. As a result, the specific symbol game is advanced. The predetermined timing is determined according to a waiting time timer or the like. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine without performing the processing in each step, and performs another subroutine. In addition to this subroutine, the main CPU 101 also performs the system timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 at predetermined cycles.

In step S101, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage check process. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S102.

In step S102, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time management process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag as a value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, and when the fluctuation time elapses, sets the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management as the control state flag. Is set to, and the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 600 ms) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S103 after the waiting time has elapsed after the confirmation. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S103.

In step S103, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 101 has a control state flag having a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management, and when the waiting time has elapsed after the confirmation, the result of the hit determination is a hit (big hit or small hit). It is determined whether or not it is. When the result of the hit determination is a hit, the main CPU 101 sets a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S104 after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the result of the hit determination is a loss. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to execute the process of step S108. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S104.

In step S104, the main CPU 101 performs a hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sends a signal to the effect that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management and the large winning opening 540 is opened when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. , Supply to the big winning opening solenoid 620. As a result, the main CPU 101 controls the opening and closing of the large winning opening 540.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open in the control state flag, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 0.1 seconds or about 30 seconds) to the large winning opening opening time timer. Set to. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S105. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S105.

In step S105, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening reopening waiting time management process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the large winning opening reopening count counter when the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval has elapsed. The memory is updated so as to increase by "1". The main CPU 101 sets a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, about 0.1 second or about 30 seconds) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S106. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S106.

In step S106, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening opening process. In this process, the main CPU 101 has elapsed the opening upper limit time under the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more when the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open (04H). It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big winning opening 540. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or more than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 101 sets a value (06H) indicating the winning end interval in the control state flag when it is the final round, and sets a value (05H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management when it is not the final round. Set to the control status flag. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S107.

In step S107, the main CPU 101 performs a hit end interval process. In this process, the main CPU 101 controls a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. Set to the status flag. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S108. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S108.

In step S108, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, the main CPU 101 is set to perform the process of step S101. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the special symbol game is advanced by setting the control state flag by the main CPU 101. Specifically, when the main CPU 101 is not in the big hit or small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is a loss, the control state flags are set to "00H", "01H", "02H", "07H". By setting in order, the processes of step S101, step S102, step S103, and step S108 shown in FIG. 11 are performed at predetermined timings. Further, when the main CPU 101 is not in the big hit or small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is the big hit or the small hit, the control state flags are set to "00H", "01H", "02H", "03H". By setting in order, the processes of step S101, step S102, step S103, and step S104 shown in FIG. 11 are performed at predetermined timings to control the big hit or small hit gaming state. Further, when the main CPU 101 is controlled to the big hit or small hit gaming state, the control state flags are set in the order of "04H" and "05H", so that steps S105 and S106 shown in FIG. 11 are set. Is performed at a predetermined timing to perform a big hit or a small hit game. Further, when the end condition of the big hit or small hit game is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04H", "06H", and "07H", so that step S105 shown in FIG. 11 The processing of step S107 and step S108 is performed at a predetermined timing to end the big hit or small hit game.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol memory check process) performed in step S101 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S110, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S111. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S111, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the presence / absence of start storage. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) or the second special symbol start storage area. If the data (hit determination random value) is not stored in the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the area (0), the process is transferred to step S112. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a start memory (more specifically, a start memory corresponding to at least one of the first and second special symbols), the process is transferred to step S113.

In step S112, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a demo display permission value in the main RAM 103. When the state in which the start memory of the special symbol game becomes 0 is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the main CPU 101 sets a value permitting execution of the demo display as the demo display permission value. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the demo display is performed on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is 0. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the presence / absence of data in the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0), and the start storage corresponding to the second special symbol is 0. That is, when it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is transferred to step S115. On the other hand, in the main CPU 101, the start storage corresponding to the second special symbol is not 0, that is, data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). If it is determined, the process is transferred to step S114.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol is a fluctuation as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S116.

In step S115, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is a fluctuation as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S116.

In step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S117.

In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process. In this process, when the special symbol to be variablely displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 101 displays each of the data from the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). A process of shifting (storing) from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) is performed. Further, when the special symbol to be variablely displayed is the second special symbol, the main CPU 101 secondly displays the data of the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). A process of shifting (storing) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is performed. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S118.

In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the high probability flag, and selects one hit judgment table from a plurality of hit judgment tables having different numbers of judgment values (big hit judgment values) to be big hits based on the read high probability flag. do. That is, when the high probability flag is a predetermined value, the hit (big hit) judgment table for high probability with a large number of big hit judgment values is referred to, and when the high probability flag is not a predetermined value, the big hit judgment is made. A normal hit (big hit) determination table with a small value is referred to. As described above, when the high probability flag is a predetermined value, that is, when the gaming state is the high probability state (probability variation state), the probability of shifting to the big hit gaming state is higher than in the normal time.

Then, the main CPU 101 is extracted at the time of winning a start, and is a random value for hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). And the selected hit determination table. Then, when the hit determination random number value and the jackpot determination value match, the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot. On the other hand, when the hit determination random number value and the jackpot determination value do not match, the main CPU 101 determines that the hit determination is not a jackpot (missing). In this way, in the big hit determination process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to make the big hit gaming state advantageous to the player (big hit determination). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S119.

In step S119, the main CPU 101 performs a small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is performed when the big hit determination process in step S118 is not a big hit. In this process, the main CPU 101 presets the hit determination random value of the special symbol start storage area set earlier in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). It is determined whether or not the small hit determination value is the same as the determined value. Then, when the hit determination random number value and the small hit determination value match, the main CPU 101 determines that the hit is a small hit. On the other hand, when the hit determination random number value and the small hit determination value do not match, the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a small hit (it is a loss). In this way, the main CPU 101 determines (small hit determination) whether or not to enter the small hit gaming state in the small hit determination process.

In the present embodiment, two types of hit judgment tables, one for normal use and the other for high probability (probability variation), are prepared as the hit judgment random value stored in the first special symbol start storage area and the hit judgment table to be referred to. Two types of hit judgment tables, one for normal use and the other for high probability (probability variation), are prepared as the hit judgment random value stored in the second special symbol start storage area and the hit judgment table to be referred to, and a total of four types of hit judgment are prepared. A table is available. The two types of hit determination tables for normal use have the same jackpot probability, and the two types of hit determination tables for high probability have the same jackpot probability. On the other hand, the number of small hit judgment values in the normal hit judgment table and the high probability (probability variation) hit judgment table referred to as the hit judgment random value stored in the first special symbol start storage area. Is the same. Further, the number of small hit judgment values in the normal hit judgment table and the high probability (probability variation) hit judgment table referred to as the hit judgment random value stored in the second special symbol start storage area is the same. Is. As described above, the main CPU 101 is such that the player can acquire a larger amount of game balls than in the normal game state on condition that the game balls have passed through the start area (first start port 5442, second start port 440). A hit game state of 1, a second hit game state in which a smaller amount of game balls can be obtained compared to the first hit game state, and a third hit in which a game ball equivalent to the second hit game state can be obtained. This is an example of a hit determination means for determining whether or not to shift to the gaming state.

The probability of a small hit by winning a prize in the first starting port 5442 of a normal game may be larger or smaller than the probability of a small hit by winning a prize in the second starting port 440. The jackpot probability of winning a prize in the first starting port 5442 of a normal game may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning a prize in the second starting port 440.

In this way, by the processing of steps S118 and S119, one of a big hit, a small hit, and a loss is determined as a result of the hit determination for the special symbol game. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S120.

In step S120, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines a big hit symbol when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, determines a small hit symbol when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, and when it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, That is, in the case of loss, the loss pattern is determined. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S121.

In step S121, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern for determining the special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol determined in the process of step S120 and the result of the hit determination determined in the processes of steps S118 and S119. Select a table. Then, the main CPU 101 determines (selects) a variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number value extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table. The main CPU 101 stores the selected fluctuation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the data showing such a variation pattern.

The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. As a result, the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 with the determined variation pattern. Further, the data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in this way is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command. As a result, the effect display corresponding to the received special figure fluctuation pattern designation command is performed by the control of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S122.

In step S122, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol fluctuation time setting process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the variation time corresponding to the determined special symbol variation pattern in the waiting time timer. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S123.

In step S123, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 103. The special symbol effect start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. The sub control circuit 200 starts the effect based on the received special symbol effect start command. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S124.

In step S124, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current fluctuation display. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol determination process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol determination process) performed in step S120 of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S150, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S151. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit, the process shifts to step S156.

In step S151, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the fluctuation state number is (01H). When the main CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation state number is (01H), the process shifts to step S152. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the fluctuation state number is not (01H), the process shifts to step S154.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol based on the jackpot symbol determination random value and the hit determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S153.

In step S153, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the command of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 73. The first special symbol display unit 73 variablely displays the first special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies the command from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the jackpot stop display mode under the control of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol based on the jackpot symbol determination random value and the hit determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S155.

In step S155, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol and the command of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 74. The second special symbol display unit 74 variablely displays the second special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies the command from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the jackpot stop display mode under the control of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

In step S156, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S160. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is not a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S164.

In step S160, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the small hit symbol of the second special symbol based on the random number value extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S161.

In step S161, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the data of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol and the command of the small hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 74. The second special symbol display unit 74 variablely displays the second special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a command of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies the command from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. .. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the small hit stop display mode under the control of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the hit symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the hit symbol (big hit symbol, small hit symbol) in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103 in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting data related to the number of times the large winning opening is opened. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data related to the number of times the large winning opening is opened in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S164, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the lost symbol data and the lost symbol command. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and depending on whether the fluctuating special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first special symbol display unit. It is supplied to 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. The first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 variablely displays the special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the lost symbol of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103, and supplies the command of the lost symbol from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special symbol designation command. As a result, the identification symbol is derived and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the loss stop display mode under the control of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol fluctuation time management process) performed in step S102 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S200, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S201. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In step S201, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S202. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S202, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management as a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S203.

In step S203, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. The symbol stop command data is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S204.

In step S204, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer as a waiting time after confirmation. In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the waiting time after determination in the area functioning as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Special symbol display time management process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol display time management process) performed in step S103 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16.

In step S300, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process shifts to step S301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In step S301, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S302. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S304.

In step S302, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S303. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S303, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the game state flag of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S304, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S311. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit, the process shifts to step S305.

In step S305, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time reduction counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the time reduction counter is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S325. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the time reduction counter is not "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S306.

In step S306, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S307.

In step S307, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time reduction counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the time reduction counter is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S308. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the time reduction counter is not "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S325.

In step S308, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time reduction number flag of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S309.

In step S309, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a time saving end command in the main RAM 103. The time saving end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the time saving end. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S325.

In step S325, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ST count counter of the main RAM 103 is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the ST count counter is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S310. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the ST count counter is not "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S326.

In step S326, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the ST count counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S327.

In step S327, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ST count counter of the main RAM 103 is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the ST count counter is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S328. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the ST count counter is not "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S310.

In step S328, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the ST count flag of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S329.

In step S329, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the ST end command in the main RAM 103. The ST end command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the end of ST. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S310.

In step S310, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S311. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is not a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S315.

In step S311 the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S312.

In step S312, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer as a hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the hit start interval time in the area that functions as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S313. The hit start interval time is also determined for each hit type, but in this embodiment, at least special probability variation, special normal, real ball ejection small probability variation, real ball ejection small normal and special figure (2) small hit-2. The hit start interval time is set to the same time or a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 1 second).

In step S313, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the stop of the special symbol effect. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts to step S314 process.

In step S314, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start command or a small hit start command corresponding to the special symbol. The big hit start command or the small hit start command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the start of a big hit or a small hit. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S315, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating a special symbol game end process as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S316.

In step S316, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the stop of the special symbol effect. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Hit start interval management process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (hit start interval management process) performed in step S104 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S401, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the process shifts to step S402. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S402, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S403. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S403, the main CPU 101 sets the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 103.

In step S404, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large winning opening opening count counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S405.

In step S405, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting an opening / closing pattern for each round or a small hit according to the type of the big hit symbol. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S406.

In step S406, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a large winning opening opening display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this case, the display command for opening the large winning opening is the data indicating the first round. The large winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 as a large winning opening opening command. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S407.

In step S407, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a large winning opening reopening waiting time management process as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S408.

In step S408, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S409.

In step S409, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S410.

In step S410, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to open the big winning opening 540. The variable stored in this way drives the large winning opening solenoid 620 to open the large winning opening 540. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Large winning opening reopening waiting time management process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (large winning opening reopening waiting time management process) performed in step S105 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S500, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process. When the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process, the process is transferred to step S501. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (05H) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In step S501, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S502. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S502, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S503.

In step S503, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a large winning opening opening display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. In this case, the large winning opening opening display command is data indicating the second and subsequent rounds. The large winning opening opening display command data is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. The large winning opening opening display command includes an instruction to perform the round counter +1 to the sub CPU 201. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S504.

In step S504, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a large winning opening opening process as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S505.

In step S505, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the result of the jackpot determination in step S118 is a jackpot. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S506. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the big hit determination is not a big hit, the process shifts to step S507.

In step S506, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S507.

In step S507, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S508.

In step S508, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Large winning opening opening process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (large winning opening opening process) performed in step S106 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S600, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the large winning opening opening process. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the large winning opening opening process, the process is transferred to step S601. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is not a value (04H) indicating the large winning opening opening process, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In step S601, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the large winning opening winning counter is “10” or more. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the large winning opening winning counter is not "10" or more, the process shifts to step S602.

In step S602, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening opening / closing process according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round or small hit. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of opening and closing the large winning opening 540 according to the opening / closing pattern for each round or small hit set in step S405. Specifically, the process of opening and closing the large winning opening 540 multiple times during a predetermined round by repeating the process of closing and opening the large winning opening 540 after waiting for a time according to the opening / closing pattern of each round or small hit. I do. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S603.

Here, in the present embodiment, the special probability change, the interval time between the first opening and the second opening of the special normal first round, the first opening and the second opening of the special figure (2) small hit-2. The interval time between openings is set to the same time or a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 0.1 second). That is, in the process of step S602, the special probability variation, the special normal, and the special figure (2) small hit-2 are "0.896 seconds open time → 0.1 seconds open interval time → 0.896 seconds open. It will be executed in the order of "time". Further, although it is not processed in this step but is set in step S607, the actual ball ejection small probability change and the actual ball ejection small amount are the same or the interval time between the normal first and second rounds. By setting a time that is difficult for the player to distinguish (for example, 0.1 seconds), "Opening time of the first round of 0.896 seconds → Interval time between rounds of 0.1 seconds → 2 rounds of 0.896 seconds" It will be executed in the order of "opening time of eyes". As a result, it is difficult for the player to distinguish the winning type even based on the time when the big winning opening 540 is closed.

In step S603, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the waiting time timer as the large winning opening opening time timer is “0”. In this process, if the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S604. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S604, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the large winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the variables positioned in the main RAM 103 based on the data read from the main ROM 102 in order to close the big winning opening 540. The variable stored in this way causes the large winning opening solenoid 620 to be closed. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S605.

In step S605, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether the result of the small hit determination in step S119 is a small hit. In this process, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S610. When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the small hit determination is not a small hit, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S606.

In step S606, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the large winning opening opening count value is equal to or greater than the large winning opening opening number upper limit value. In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the large winning opening opening count value stored in the main RAM 103 with the large winning opening opening count upper limit value or more, and the large winning opening opening count value is the large winning opening opening count value. Determine if it is greater than or equal to the upper limit. When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of times the large winning opening is opened is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of opening of the winning opening, the process proceeds to step S610. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the large winning opening opening count value is not equal to or more than the winning opening opening number upper limit value, the process shifts to step S607.

In step S607, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the open time interval display time in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S608.

In step S608, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating a large winning opening reopening waiting time management process as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S609.

In step S609, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S610, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S611.

In step S611, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval process as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S612.

In step S612, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a special symbol per interval end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. Specifically, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the big hit end display command is set, and when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the small hit end display command is set. The big hit end display command and the small hit end display command are supplied from the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

[Hit end interval processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (hit end interval processing) executed in step S107 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S700, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval processing, the processing is shifted to step S701. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval processing, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S701, when the control state flag of the main RAM 103 has a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval process, the value of the waiting time timer (t) corresponding to the hit end interval is “0”. Judge whether or not. Further, when the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S702, and when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S702, the main CPU 101 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game of the main RAM 103 in the control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S703.

In step S703, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol and the control data according to the game state in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103. Specifically, as control data, a game state such as a normal game state and a probability change state is set. Further, the main CPU 101 hits the sub control circuit 200 and transmits an end command. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Special symbol game end processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (special symbol game end processing) executed in step S108 of FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG. 20.

First, in step S710, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 103 is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process. If it is determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the processing is transferred to step S711. If it is not determined that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, this subroutine is terminated.

In step S711, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check as a control state flag in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, this subroutine is terminated.

[Operation explanation of sub control circuit]
Hereinafter, the processing of the sub control circuit 200 will be described. The sub control circuit 200 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100, and the sub CPU 201 performs various processes such as display processing.

[Sub-control main processing]
First, the sub-control main process performed by the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S1101, the sub CPU 201 performs an initialization process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 initializes the work area of the work RAM 203 in response to the power being turned on. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1102.

In step S1102, the sub CPU 201 performs a random number value update process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the random number value stored in the work RAM 203 (for example, the random value for determining the effect, the random value for determining the jackpot effect, the random value for determining the stop symbol, and the like). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1103.

In step S1103, the sub CPU 201 performs a command analysis process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 analyzes the command stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 203. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1104.

In step S1104, the sub CPU 201 performs an effect control process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the effect using the effect button 62. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1105.

In step S1105, the sub CPU 201 performs a display control process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 transmits data for displaying in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to the display control circuit 204. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1106.

When data is received from the sub CPU 201 in the display control circuit 204, the VDP of the display control circuit 204 receives various types of identification symbol data, background image data, effect image data, and the like based on the received data. The image data of is read from the image data ROM. The VDP superimposes various image data read from the image data ROM and displays them in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

In step S1106, the sub CPU 201 performs sound / lamp control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the sound generated from the speaker 24 and controls the light emission of various lamps such as the lamp 25. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1107.

In step S1107, the sub CPU 201 performs the accessory control process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 controls the operation (mechanical operation and lighting operation) of the movable accessory unit 57 via the accessory control circuit 207. For the control of the operation of the movable accessory unit 57 performed by the sub CPU 201, the operation of the first movable accessory unit (effect device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, and the third movable accessory unit 83 is controlled. Is included. When this process is completed, the process is again transferred to the random number value update process in step S1102.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Even in the state where the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 21 is being performed, the sub-control main process may be interrupted and the timer interrupt process may be performed. Hereinafter, the timer interrupt processing performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 22.

In step S1201, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves the value used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1202.

In step S1202, the sub CPU 201 performs a timer update process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 updates the timer stored in the work RAM 203. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 updates a timer such as a round effect. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1203.

In step S1203, the sub CPU 201 performs the effect button switch input detection process. In this process, the sub CPU 201 detects whether or not the effect button switch 310 is input by operating the effect button 62. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1204.

In step S1204, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the value saved in step S201 to each register. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Command interrupt processing]
Even in the state where the sub-control main process shown in FIG. 21 is being executed, the sub-control main process may be interrupted and the command interrupt process may be performed. Hereinafter, the command interrupt processing performed by the sub CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIG. 23.

In step S1301, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 saves the value used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1302.

In step S1302, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing the received command in the buffer. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1303.

In step S1303, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 201 restores the value saved in step S1301 to each register. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

[Command analysis processing]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (command analysis process) performed in step S1103 of FIG. 21 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25.

In step S1401, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a receive command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1402. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no receive command, the sub-CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1402, the sub CPU 201 performs a read processing of the received command. In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads the command stored in the receive buffer. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1403.

In step S1403, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the receiving command is a large winning opening winning command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the receive command is a large winning opening winning command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1404. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is not a large winning opening winning command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1405.

In step S1404, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of updating the acquisition number counter and the total acquisition number counter during the big hit. In this way, the sub CPU 201 can acquire data regarding the number of prize balls (the number of acquired game balls) acquired by the player by winning the game ball in the large winning opening 540. In addition, the acquisition number counter and the total acquisition number counter during the big hit start counting (counting) with the start of the big hit game as a delimiter. In this way, data on the number of prize balls is acquired each time a big hit or a small hit is made. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1405, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the reception command is a special symbol designation command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the receive command is a special symbol designation command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1406. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a special symbol designation command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1407.

In step S1406, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a stop symbol based on the special symbol designation command. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1407, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the reception command is a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the receive command is a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1408. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is not the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S1409.

In step S1408, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the effect pattern based on the special figure variation pattern designation command, the stop symbol, and the extracted effect determination random number value. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1409, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command). In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command), the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1410. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a hit start command (big hit start command, small hit start command), the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1411.

In step S1410, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the jackpot start effect. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1411, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the reception command is the effect display command during the opening of the big winning opening. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the receive command is the effect display command during the opening of the big winning opening, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1412. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reception command is not the effect display command during the opening of the big winning opening, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1413.

In step S1412, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the effect during the opening of the big winning opening. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1413, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is an inter-round display command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the receive command is an inter-round display command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1414. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not an inter-round display command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1415.

In step S1414, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the effect between rounds. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1415, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the received command is a hit end display command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is a hit end display command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1416. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a hit end display command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1417.

In step S1416, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the effect at the end of the big hit. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1417, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the reception command is a time saving end command. In this process, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the receive command is a time-saving end command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1418. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the received command is not a time-saving end command, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1419.

In step S1418, the sub CPU 201 controls such as clearing the time saving flag and ending the time saving display. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

In step S1419, the sub CPU 201 performs processing corresponding to other received commands. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

The pachinko machine according to the second embodiment described later with respect to the effect pattern determination process of step S1408, the hit start effect determination process of step S1410, the inter-round effect determination process of step S1414, and the hit end effect determination process of step S1416. It is described in detail in the explanation of the game.

<Pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 91. The same or similar components as those according to the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

[Game board]
First, the game board 17 used in the second embodiment will be described.

The game board 17 used in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 26 is another example of the game board 17 shown in FIG. The major difference between the game board 17 shown in FIG. 26 and the game board 17 shown in FIG. 3 is that the center role 7000 is mainly used instead of the center accessory 42 and the game ball distribution device 5400 (first starting port 5442). And the point that the starting port unit 7070 (starting port 7071a and the base plate side advantageous outward path 7072b (first starting port)) is provided, and the movable accessory unit 57 (first movable accessory unit (directing device 2400)). , The first movable accessory unit 6000 and the second movable accessory unit 8000 are provided in place of the second movable accessory unit 82 and the third movable accessory unit 83). A detailed description of the configurations of the center accessory 7000, the starting port unit 7070, the first movable accessory unit 6000, and the second movable accessory unit 8000 will be described later.

[Operation explanation of main control circuit]
Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) in the second embodiment will be described.

In the processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the second embodiment, the major difference from the processing in the first embodiment is mainly the main processing.

[Main processing]
The main processing performed by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) will be described with reference to FIG. 27.

In step S10, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a backup return process, an initialization setting process, and the like. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11.

In step S11, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value random value counter, the effect condition selection random value counter, and the like. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S12.

In step S12, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process. In this process, the main CPU 101 updates various timers such as a timer for synchronizing the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201, an opening time timer of the large winning opening 540, and an opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 described later. conduct. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S7000.

In step S7000, the main CPU 101 performs a distribution device control process. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a control signal for energizing the solenoid 7250 based on the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031. The details of this process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S13.

In step S13, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the hit determination result is a hit according to the detection signal from the first start port switch 5472 or the second start port switch 441, and stores the determination result in the main RAM 103. Perform processing, etc. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S14. The details of this process will be described later.

In step S14, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit according to the detection signal from the passing gate switch 49a, and performs a process of storing the determination result in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S15.

In step S15, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 101 has the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 according to the determination results of the hit determination and the normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 in the processes in steps S13 and S14. , And the process of storing the control signal for driving the normal symbol display unit 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. The main CPU 101 transmits the stored control signal to the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74, and the normal symbol display unit 71. In this way, the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74 variablely displays and stops the special symbol based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display unit 71 variablely displays and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S16.

In step S16, the main CPU 101 performs game information output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs game information to an external device (for example, the calling device, the hall computer, or the like). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 101 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a control signal for driving the large winning opening 540 (shutter 610) and the second starting opening 440 (ordinary electric accessory 460). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S18.

In step S18, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S19.

In step S19, the main CPU 101 performs a payout process. In this process, the main CPU 101 wins a game ball in various winning openings (specifically, a large winning opening 540, a first starting opening 5442, a second starting opening 440, and a general winning opening 53, 54, 450). It is determined whether or not it has been done. When it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in various winning openings, the main CPU 101 transmits a payout request command corresponding to the winning to the payout / launch control circuit 300. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S7001.

In step S7001, the main CPU 101 performs fraud detection processing. A detailed description of the fraud detection process will be described later. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S11 again, and repeats the process from step S11 to step S19.

As described above, unlike the main process in the first embodiment, the main process in the second embodiment is shown in step S7000 between the timer update process shown in step S12 and the special symbol control process shown in step S13. The distribution device control process is performed.

[Distribution device control process]
Hereinafter, the subroutine (distribution device control process) performed in step S7000 of FIG. 27 will be described with reference to FIG. 28.

In step S7010, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the solenoid 7250 is in the energized state (excited state). When the main CPU 101 determines that the solenoid 7250 is in the energized state (“YES” in step S7010), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S7013. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the solenoid 7250 is not in the energized state (“NO” in step S7010), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S7011.

In step S7011, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is the opening timing. Here, the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is set so that the opening timing of 0.5 seconds and the closing timing of 1.5 seconds are always alternately repeated. When the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is the opening timing (“YES” in step S7011), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S7012. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is not the opening timing (that is, the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is the closing timing) (“NO” in step S7011), the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. do.

In step S7012, the main CPU 101 performs a solenoid excitation process. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a control signal for energizing the solenoid 7250. As a result, the solenoid 7250 is in an energized state (excitation state). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In step S7013, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is the closing timing. When the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is the closing timing (“YES” in step S7013), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S7014. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is not the closing timing (that is, the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is the opening timing) (“NO” in step S7013), the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. do.

In step S7014, the main CPU 101 performs a solenoid excitation stop process. In this process, the main CPU 101 stops the output of the control signal for energizing the solenoid 7250. As a result, the solenoid 7250 is in a non-energized state (non-excited state). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. In the present embodiment, the periodic excitation / non-excitation processing of the solenoid 7250 is performed by the main processing of FIG. 27, but it may be performed by the system timer interrupt processing of FIG. In that case, the count timer is updated for each timer interruption, and when the value of the count timer satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, exceeding a predetermined value), the distribution device control process of FIG. 28 is performed in the interrupt process. It may be executed and the count timer may be initialized after the processing is executed.

[Center accessory and starting port unit]
Hereinafter, the configurations of the center accessory 7000 and the starting port unit 7070 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 29 to 53.

First, the configuration of the center accessory 7000 will be described in detail.

As will be described later, the center accessory 7000 shown in FIGS. 29 to 32 can guide the game ball flowing down the game area 20 to the first start port of the start port unit 7070 via the warp passage 7020 or the like. can. Although the details will be described later, the first starting port of the starting port unit 7070 corresponds to the first starting port 5442 in the first embodiment, and there are two (specifically, two) in the second embodiment. , The base plate side advantageous outbound route 7072b and the starting port 7071a) are provided. The center accessory 7000 includes an entrance 7010, a warp passage 7020, a crune 7100, an upper passage 7030, a game ball distribution device 7200, a stage 7040, a back ball passage 7050, and a central gutter 7060.

First, the outline of the rolling path of the game ball guided to the starting port unit 7070 by the center accessory 7000 will be described.

In the present embodiment, two types of rolling paths (“advantageous course” and “disadvantageous course”) are provided in the rolling path of the game ball guided by the center accessory 7000. The advantageous course and the disadvantageous course are set so that the degree of advantage for the player is different from each other when the game ball passes. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the advantageous course, the degree of advantage for the player is set to be higher than when the game ball passes through the disadvantageous course. The advantage course and the disadvantage course through which the game ball passes are sorted by the game ball distribution device 7200.

When the launch handle 32 is operated to strike left, the launched game ball flows down the game area 20 on the left side of the center accessory 7000, and a part of the flowing game ball enters the entrance 7010. Ball. The game ball that has entered the entry port 7010 passes through the warp passage 7020, the crune 7100, and the upper passage 7030 in order.

Then, the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 is distributed to an advantageous course or a disadvantageous course by the game ball distribution device 7200 in the middle of the upper passage 7030. The game balls distributed to the disadvantageous course pass through the upper passage 7030 as they are, and then are guided from the stage 7040 toward the starting port unit 7070. On the other hand, in the middle of the upper passage 7030, the game balls distributed to the advantageous course by the game ball distribution device 7200 pass through the back ball passage 7050 and the central gutter 7060 in order, and then are guided toward the starting port unit 7070. To. A specific description of the rolling path of the game ball (flow of the ball game ball) will be described later.

Next, the details of the configurations of the entrance ball entrance 7010, the warp passage 7020, the croon 7100, the upper passage 7030, the game ball distribution device 7200, the stage 7040, the back ball passage 7050, and the central gutter 7060 provided in the center accessory 7000 are described in detail. To explain to.

The entry port 7010 shown in FIGS. 29 to 32 is a portion in which a game ball can enter. The ball entry port 7010 is provided in the vicinity of the left end portion in the upper and lower middle portions of the center accessory 7000. The ball entry port 7010 is provided in a game area 20 on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the game area 20 on the left side). In this way, the ball entry port 7010 is configured so that a part of the game ball flowing down the game area 20 on the left side enters the ball when the launch handle 32 is operated to hit the ball to the left.

The warp passage 7020 shown in FIGS. 29 to 32 is a passage for guiding the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 7010 in the lower right direction (the Kroon 7100 described later). One end (upper left end) of the warp passage 7020 communicates with the entry port 7010. The warp passage 7020 is formed so as to extend to the right from the entrance 7010 and then to extend substantially downward. The other end (lower end) of the warp passage 7020 is formed so as to open toward the rear. The warp passage 7020 is formed with an upstream passage 7021 and a downstream passage 7022.

The upstream passage 7021 shown in FIGS. 31 and 32 is a portion of the warp passage 7020 located on the upstream side (ball entry port 7010 side). The upstream passage 7021 is formed so as to extend in the left-right direction. The left end of the upstream passage 7021 communicates with the entry port 7010. The front side surface of the upstream passage 7021 is fitted into a notched portion of the game board 17, and is flush with the game area 20 and exposed forward. In this way, the front side surface of the upstream passage 7021 constitutes a part of the game area 20. Further, in the game area 20, the game ball can flow down not only on the left side of the entrance 7010 but also on the right side. Further, the portion other than the front side surface of the upstream side passage 7021 (the portion behind the front side surface) is formed so as to be located behind the front side surface of the game board 17, that is, behind the game area 20. Further, the upstream passage 7021 is formed of a member having no permeability. In this way, when the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 7010 passes through the upstream passage 7021 of the warp passage 7020, it becomes difficult for the player to see the game ball. Here, the difficulty in visibility means that the visibility is lower than in other states, and may or may not include something that is completely invisible.

The downstream passage 7022 shown in FIGS. 30 and 32 is a portion of the warp passage 7020 located on the downstream side (Clune 7100 side). The downstream passage 7022 is formed so as to extend in the vertical direction. The upper end of the downstream passage 7022 communicates with the lower end of the upstream passage 7021. The downstream passage 7022 is formed so as to extend forward from a portion communicating with the upstream passage 7021, extend downward, and then bend backward. In this way, the downstream passage 7022 is formed in a U shape with the rear open in the side view. The front surface of the downstream passage 7022 is formed so as to be located in front of the decoration applied to the front surface of the center accessory 7000. Further, the downstream passage 7022 is formed of a transparent member. When the game ball is guided from the upstream passage 7021 to the downstream passage 7022 in this way, the game ball passing through the downstream passage 7022 becomes visible to the player.

Due to such a configuration of the warp passage 7020, the game ball that has entered the ball entrance 7010 becomes difficult to see from the player once when passing through the upstream passage 7021, and then when passing through the downstream passage 7022. It becomes visible to the player. In this way, from the player's point of view, the game ball that disappeared in the entrance 7010 suddenly appears and is guided to the Kroon 7100, which gives the impression that the game ball that has entered the entrance 7010 has been warped. can.

The crune 7100 shown in FIGS. 29 to 36 is a passage for guiding the game ball flowing in from the warp passage 7020 to the right side (upper passage 7030 described later). The crune 7100 can have randomness in the passing (rolling) time of the game ball passing through the crune 7100. The crune 7100 is provided so as to be adjacent to the lower end of the warp passage 7020 rearward. As a result, the Kroon 7100 is configured to be able to receive the game ball that has passed through the warp passage 7020. The crune 7100 includes a guide portion 7110, a rolling portion 7120, and a step portion 7130.

The guide portion 7110 shown in FIGS. 33 to 36 is a portion that guides the game ball flowing in from the warp passage 7020 to the right (to the rolling portion 7120 described later). The guide portion 7110 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape with the longitudinal direction facing the left-right direction in a plan view, and is formed so that the corner portion on the left rear side has a rounded shape (see FIG. 35). The guide portion 7110 is provided so that its left end portion is located near the lower end portion of the warp passage 7020. The guide portion 7110 includes an inflow port 7111, a bottom surface portion 7112, and a side wall portion 7113.

The inflow port 7111 shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 is a hole (inlet) for guiding the game ball to the guiding portion 7110. The inflow port 7111 is provided at a position facing the opening at the lower end of the warp passage 7020 (the left end portion of the guiding portion 7110) so that the front side of the guiding portion 7110 opens. The inflow port 7111 communicates with the lower end of the downstream passage 7022 of the warp passage 7020. The inflow port 7111 is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through.

The bottom surface portion 7112 shown in FIGS. 33, 35 and 36 is a portion constituting the bottom portion of the guide portion 7110. The bottom surface portion 7112 is configured so that a game ball can pass through the upper side surface thereof. Further, the upper side surface of the bottom surface portion 7112 is formed so as to incline downward to the right. That is, the upper side surface of the bottom surface portion 7112 is formed in a shape that can guide the game ball to the right.

The side wall portion 7113 guides the game ball that has flowed in from the warp passage 7020. The side wall portion 7113 is formed so as to rise from the end portion of the bottom surface portion 7112. The side wall portion 7113 includes a front side wall portion 7113a and a rear side wall portion 7113b.

The front side wall portion 7113a shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 is formed so as to rise from the front end portion of the bottom surface portion 7112. The front side wall portion 7113a is formed so as to be adjacent to the right side of the inflow port 7111. In other words, the inflow port 7111 is formed so that the left end portion of the front side wall portion 7113a opens. The front side wall portion 7113a is formed so that the height from the bottom surface portion 7112 is constant.

The rear side wall portion 7113b shown in FIGS. 33, 35 and 36 is formed so as to rise from the rear end portion of the bottom surface portion 7112. More specifically, the rear side wall portion 7113b is formed so as to rise from an end extending from the left front end portion to the right rear end portion of the bottom surface portion 7112. The rear side wall portion 7113b is provided at the front end portion with the inflow port 7111 separated from the front side wall portion 7113a. The rear side wall portion 7113b is formed so that the height from the bottom surface portion 7112 is constant.

The rolling unit 7120 is a portion configured so that the game ball flowing in from the guiding unit 7110 can be rolled. The rolling portion 7120 is formed in a substantially circular shape in a plan view (see FIG. 35). The rolling portion 7120 is provided so as to be adjacent to the right side of the guiding portion 7110. The rolling portion 7120 includes a bottom surface portion 7121, a guide wall 7122, and a discharging portion 7123.

The bottom surface portion 7121 shown in FIGS. 33, 35 and 36 is a portion constituting the bottom portion of the rolling portion 7120. The bottom surface portion 7121 is configured such that a game ball can roll on the upper side surface thereof. Further, the upper side surface of the bottom surface portion 7121 is formed so as to incline downward toward the central portion thereof. That is, the upper side surface of the bottom surface portion 7121 is formed in a shape that can guide the game ball to the central portion. The bottom surface portion 7121 is formed so as to be at a position lower than the bottom surface portion 7112 of the guide portion 7110.

The guide wall 7122 guides the game ball so as to roll on the bottom surface portion 7121. The guide wall 7122 is formed so as to rise from the outer peripheral end portion of the bottom surface portion 7121. The guide wall 7122 is formed in a substantially annular shape (substantially partial annular shape) in a plan view. Specifically, the guide wall 7122 has a connection portion (front side wall portion) with the front side wall portion 7113a starting from the connection portion with the rear side wall portion 7113b of the guidance portion 7110 (the right end portion of the rear side wall portion 7113b) in a plan view. It is formed in an annular shape having an end point (the right end portion of 7113a). As a result, when the game ball that has flowed into the rolling portion 7120 rolls while in contact with the guide wall 7122, the game ball is guided by the guide wall 7122 so as to take a circular orbit in a plan view.

The guide wall 7122 is formed with a bulge portion 7122a for cushioning the collision between the game ball and the guide wall 7122 in the vicinity of the starting point (the connection portion with the rear side wall portion 7113b). As shown in FIGS. 33 and 35, the bulging portion 7122a is formed so as to bulge rearward from the rear side wall portion 7113b in a plan view. That is, the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122 is basically formed to have the same shape as the outer peripheral surface of the bottom surface portion 7121 in a plan view, whereas the bulging portion 7122a is larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bottom surface portion 7121 in a plan view. It is formed so as to be located on the outer side in the radial direction.

The discharge unit 7123 is a portion configured to be able to discharge the game ball rolling on the rolling unit 7120 to the outside. The discharge portion 7123 is formed in the central portion of the bottom surface portion 7121. The discharge portion 7123 is formed so as to project downward from the bottom surface portion 7121. The discharge portion 7123 is formed in an inverted conical shape whose diameter decreases toward the bottom (see FIGS. 34 and 36). A discharge hole 7123a is formed in the discharge portion 7123.

The discharge hole 7123a is formed in the central portion of the discharge portion 7123. The discharge hole 7123a is formed as an inverted conical hole whose diameter decreases toward the bottom (see FIGS. 34 and 36). The discharge hole 7123a is formed so as to have a size that allows the game ball to be discharged.

The stepped portion 7130 shown in FIGS. 33, 35 and 36 is a portion provided at the connection portion between the bottom surface portion 7112 of the guiding portion 7110 and the bottom surface portion 7121 of the rolling portion 7120, and is a portion provided at the bottom surface portion 7112 of the guiding portion 7110. It is a wall portion formed by lowering the bottom surface portion 7121 of the rolling portion 7120. The height of the step portion 7130 is formed so as to be equal to or less than the radius of the game ball (see FIG. 49). The step portion 7130 is formed from the end point of the guide wall 7122 (the connection portion with the front side wall portion 7113a) to the start point of the guide wall 7122 (the connection portion with the rear side wall portion 7113b). The step portion 7130 is formed in a partial annular shape having a concentric concentric diameter with the guide wall 7122 (a portion excluding the bulging portion 7122a) in a plan view. As a result, the game ball that rolls beyond the end point of the guide wall 7122 takes substantially the same trajectory as the circular orbit that has rolled up to that point.

The upper passage 7030 shown in FIGS. 29 to 32 and 41 is a passage for guiding the game ball discharged from the discharge hole 7123a of the cloaca 7100 to the right (back ball passage 7050). The upper passage 7030 is formed so as to extend substantially to the right from below the Kroon 7100. The left end of the upper passage 7030 communicates vertically with the discharge hole 7123a of the cloaca 7100. The upper passage 7030 is formed so as to incline downward to the right. A plurality of protrusions 7030a (in this embodiment, two or three) are formed on the side wall portions on the front side and the rear side of the upper passage 7030, respectively, so as to project toward the center side of the passage. The front and rear protrusions 7030a are formed at positions that are offset from each other in the front-rear direction (positions that do not face each other). In this way, the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 moves to the downstream side while colliding with the protrusions 7030a on the front side and the rear side. As described above, the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 collides with the protrusions 7030a on the front side and the rear side, so that the movement (rolling) speed becomes slow and the moving (rolling) time has randomness. It will be. Further, a communication hole 7031 is formed in the upper passage 7030.

The communication hole 7031 shown in FIGS. 32 and 41 is a portion serving as an entrance for guiding the game ball to the “advantageous course” described later. The communication hole 7031 is formed so as to penetrate the upper passage 7030 up and down. The communication hole 7031 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. The communication hole 7031 is formed to a size that allows the game ball to pass through. The communication hole 7031 is formed substantially in the center of the upper passage 7030. More specifically, the communication hole 7031 is formed on the downstream side of the front and rear protrusions 7030a.

Although details will be described later, the communication hole 7031 is opened and closed at a predetermined timing by the movable piece 7220 of the game ball distribution device 7200. When the communication hole 7031 is closed by the movable piece 7220, the upper side surface of the movable piece 7220 constitutes a part of the upper passage 7030. In this way, when the communication hole 7031 is closed by the movable piece 7220, the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 reaches the right end portion (downstream side end portion) from the left end portion via the movable piece 7220. On the other hand, when the communication hole 7031 is opened by the movable piece 7220, the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 will fall from the communication hole 7031 and will not reach the right end of the upper passage 7030.

In this way, the game balls that did not fall from the communication hole 7031 (that is, the game balls that reached the right end of the upper passage 7030) were distributed to the disadvantageous course. On the other hand, the game ball that has fallen from the communication hole 7031 (that is, the game ball that has not reached the right end of the upper passage 7030) is distributed to the advantageous course.

The game ball distribution device 7200 shown in FIGS. 31, 32 and 37 to 41 is for distributing the game balls flowing down the game area 20 to a plurality of passages. Specifically, the game ball distribution device 7200 sets the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 (out of the game balls flowing down the game area 20 from the entry port 7010) into an advantageous course or a disadvantageous course. Can be distributed to. As described above, the game balls distributed to the advantageous course pass through the advantageous course, and as a result, the first starting port of the starting port unit 7070 (more specifically, among the base plate side advantageous outward path 7072b and the starting port 7071a). , The base plate side advantageous outbound route 7072b) can be reliably won. On the other hand, the game ball distributed to the disadvantaged course starts by passing through the disadvantaged course from the first starting port of the starting port unit 7070 (more specifically, among the base plate side advantageous outbound path 7072b and the starting port 7071a). Mouth 7071a) may be able to win (ie, it is uncertain whether it will win). Further, in the present embodiment, the winner of the base plate side advantageous outbound route 7072b (when passing through the advantageous course) at the two first starting ports becomes the starting port 7071a (when passing through the disadvantageous course). It is set so that you can get more prize balls than if you win a prize. In this way, when the game ball is distributed to the advantageous course, the degree of advantage for the player is set to be higher than when the game ball is distributed to the disadvantageous course. The game ball distribution device 7200 is provided below the upper passage 7030. The game ball distribution device 7200 includes a base portion 7210, a movable piece 7220, a flapper 7230, a metal piece 7240, a solenoid 7250, and a cover portion 7260.

For convenience of explanation, the base portion 7210 and the cover portion 7260 are shown in FIG. 40, and the base portion 7210 is omitted in FIG. 41.

The base portion 7210 shown in FIGS. 37 to 39 is a portion constituting the left portion of the outer shell of the game ball distribution device 7200. The base portion 7210 is formed in a substantially box shape with the right side surface open. The base portion 7210 is fixed to the lower rear portion of the center accessory 7000.

The movable piece 7220 shown in FIGS. 37 to 41 opens and closes the communication hole 7031. Here, the state in which the communication hole 7031 is opened means that the game ball is opened to the extent that the game ball can pass through the communication hole 7031 (to the extent that the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 falls from the communication hole 7031). It refers to the state. Further, the state in which the communication hole 7031 is closed means that the game ball is closed to the extent that the game ball cannot pass through the communication hole 7031 (to the extent that the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 does not fall from the communication hole 7031). It is not limited to the fact that the communication hole 7031 is completely closed. When the movable piece 7220 opens the communication hole 7031, the game ball is guided to the "advantageous course". On the other hand, the movable piece 7220 closes the communication hole 7031, so that the game ball is guided to the "disadvantageous course". The details of the flow of the game ball passing through the "advantageous course" and the "disadvantageous course" will be described later.

The movable piece 7220 is provided on the right side of the base portion 7210. The movable piece 7220 includes a movable piece upper portion 7221 and a movable piece lower portion 7222. In the following, the shape will be described based on the state in which the movable piece 7220 closes the communication hole 7031.

The movable piece upper portion 7221 shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is a portion constituting the upper portion of the movable piece 7220, and is a portion for opening and closing the communication hole 7031. The movable piece upper portion 7221 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view, and is provided so that the longitudinal direction faces the front-rear direction. The movable piece upper portion 7221 is provided so as to be located immediately below the communication hole 7031 (so as to close the communication hole 7031).

The movable piece lower portion 7222 shown from FIGS. 38 to 41 is a portion constituting the lower portion of the movable piece 7220. The movable piece lower portion 7222 is integrally formed with the movable piece upper portion 7221. The movable piece lower portion 7222 is formed so as to extend substantially downward from the rear end portion of the movable piece upper portion 7221. The movable piece lower portion 7222 is formed so as to bend forward and downward (diagonally) in the middle portion thereof. A through hole is formed in the middle of the movable piece lower portion 7222 to penetrate the movable piece lower portion 7222 in the left-right direction, and the first pin 7211 fixed to the base portion 7210 is inserted into the through hole. As a result, the movable piece 7220 is supported by the base portion 7210 so as to be swingable around the axis of the first pin 7211. A long hole 7222a is formed in the lower portion 7222 of the movable piece.

The elongated hole 7222a is formed so as to penetrate the lower portion of the movable piece lower portion 7222 in the left-right direction. The elongated hole 7222a is formed so that the longitudinal direction faces the extending direction (diagonal direction from the front lower part to the rear upper part) of the movable piece lower portion 7222 in the side view.

The flapper 7230 shown in FIGS. 38 to 41 is a member for transmitting a driving force to the movable piece 7220. The flapper 7230 is formed in the shape of a plate having a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. The flapper 7230 is provided so that the longitudinal direction is substantially oriented in the front-rear direction. A through hole that penetrates the flapper 7230 in the left-right direction is formed at the rear end portion of the flapper 7230, and a second pin 7212 fixed to the base portion 7210 is inserted into the through hole. The second pin 7212 is provided so as to be located slightly below the rear of the first pin 7211 (rear of the solenoid 7250 described later). As a result, the flapper 7230 is supported by the base portion 7210 so as to be swingable around the axis of the second pin 7212. The flapper 7230 is housed inside the base portion 7210. A protrusion 7231 is formed on the flapper 7230.

The protrusion 7231 shown in FIG. 41 is formed in a columnar shape protruding to the right from the front end of the flapper 7230. The protrusion 7231 is inserted into the elongated hole 7222a of the movable piece 7220. The diameter of the protrusion 7231 is formed so as to be slightly smaller than the width of the elongated hole 7222a in the lateral direction.

The front portion of the flapper 7230 configured as described above tends to swing downward due to its own weight, but the swing width is limited by the protrusion 7231 abutting on the lower end portion of the elongated hole 7222a. At this time, the movable piece 7220 (movable piece upper portion 7221) closes the communication hole 7031.

The metal pieces 7240 shown in FIGS. 39 to 41 are members formed of metal. The metal piece 7240 is formed by bending a plate material into a substantially L shape. The metal piece 7240 includes a flat surface portion 7241 and a flange portion 7242.

The flat surface portion 7241 is a portion in which the plate surface is generally oriented in the vertical direction. The flat surface portion 7241 is provided on the upper portion of the flapper 7230 so that the upper surface of the flat surface portion 7241 is exposed. The flat surface portion 7241 is provided between the protrusion 7231 of the flapper 7230 and the second pin 7212 which is the swing center of the flapper 7230.

The flange portion 7242 is a portion formed so as to bend downward from the left end portion of the flat surface portion 7241. The flange portion 7242 is formed so that the plate surface faces in the left-right direction. A through hole is formed in the flange portion 7242, and a bolt inserted into the through hole is fastened to the flapper 7230 to fix the metal piece 7240 to the flapper 7230.

The solenoid 7250 is for operating the movable piece 7220 by driving the flapper 7230. The solenoid 7250 is housed inside the base portion 7210 so as to be located above the flat portion 7241 of the metal piece 7240. The solenoid 7250 is provided in a non-contact manner with respect to the metal piece 7240. When the solenoid 7250 is energized (excited state), the solenoid 7250 generates an adsorption force for adsorbing the metal piece 7240. The solenoid 7250 is provided so that the suction force faces upward. When the solenoid 7250 is in a non-energized state (non-excited state), the generation of the suction force is stopped.

The flapper type solenoid is configured by the flapper 7230, the metal piece 7240, and the solenoid 7250 configured in this way.

The cover portion 7260 shown in FIGS. 37 to 39 is a portion constituting the right portion of the outer shell of the game ball distribution device 7200. The cover portion 7260 is formed in a substantially box shape with the left side surface open. A movable piece 7220 is housed inside the cover portion 7260. The cover portion 7260, in combination with the base portion 7210, constitutes the outer shell of the game ball distribution device 7200 and forms a storage space for accommodating the movable piece 7220, the flapper 7230, the metal piece 7240, and the solenoid 7250.

A specific description of the operation of the game ball distribution device 7200 will be described later.

The stage 7040 shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 rolls a game ball that has passed through the upper passage 7030 without falling from the communication hole 7031 so as to repeatedly reciprocate in the left-right direction. Stage 7040 forms part of the "disadvantageous course". The stage 7040 is provided below the front of the upper passage 7030, and is formed so as to be able to guide the game ball flowing in from the upper passage 7030. The stage 7040 is provided so that the extension direction faces the left-right direction. The bottom surface (rolling surface) of the stage 7040 is formed in a substantially bowl shape so that the height gradually increases toward the left and right ends in front view. That is, the stage 7040 is formed so as to guide the game ball to the left and right central portions.

At substantially the center of the left and right sides of the stage 7040, flow outlets 7041, 7042, and 7043 for flowing down the game ball are provided so as to line up in the left-right direction. The middle flow port 7042 of the three flow ports 7041, 7042, and 7043 is formed directly above the start port 7071a of the start port unit 7070. In this way, the game ball that has flowed down from the flow-down port 7042 is formed so as to easily enter the start port 7071a of the start port unit 7070, which will be described later. On the other hand, the flow-out port 7041 on the right side and the flow-down port 7043 on the left side are formed so that the game balls flowing down from the flow-down ports 7041 and 7043 do not enter the start port 7071a but flow down as they are.

The back ball passage 7050 shown in FIGS. 31, 32 and 37 is a passage for guiding the game ball dropped from the communication hole 7031 to the right side (central gutter 7060). The back ball passage 7050 forms part of the advantageous course. The back ball passage 7050 is formed so as to extend from the lower side of the communication hole 7031 to the right side. The back ball passage 7050 is formed so as to incline downward to the right. The left end of the back ball passage 7050 is communicated vertically with the communication hole 7031 of the upper passage 7030 via the movable piece 7220. The back ball passage 7050 is arranged on the rear side of the lower part of the center accessory 7000. In this way, the game ball passing through the back ball passage 7050 is formed invisible to the player. A notch 7051 is formed in the back ball passage 7050.

The cutout portion 7051 shown in FIG. 37 is formed by cutting out the bottom surface of the back ball passage 7050. The notch 7051 is formed in the right front portion of the back ball passage 7050. The notch 7051 is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through.

The central gutter 7060 shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, 37, 42 and 43 is for guiding the game ball dropped from the notch 7051 of the back ball passage 7050 to the starting port unit 7070 and then collecting it. .. Further, the central gutter 7060 collects the game balls that have entered the starting port unit 7070 from the starting port 7071a described later. In this way, the central gutter 7060 is a gaming ball guided to the starting port unit 7070 via different routes (advantageous course or disadvantageous course) (more specifically, the first starting port, that is, the base plate side advantageous outward path 7072b). Alternatively, the gaming ball that has won a prize in the starting port 7071a) can be collected in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The central gutter 7060 is located at the bottom of the center accessory 7000 and behind the game area 20. In this way, the game ball circulating in the central gutter 7060 is formed invisible to the player. The central gutter 7060 comprises a central gutter base 7061, a central gutter decoration 7064 and a central gutter cover 7065.

The central gutter base 7061 shown in FIGS. 37, 42 and 43 constitutes the main structure of the central gutter 7060. The central gutter base 7061 is formed with an inflow port 7061a, an introduction path 7061b, an discharge port 7061c, a gutter base side disadvantageous passage 7061d, a gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e, a disadvantageous course discharge port 7061f, and an advantageous course discharge port 7061g.

The inflow port 7061a is a hole (entrance) for allowing a game ball to enter. The inflow port 7061a is formed at the upper right end of the central gutter base 7061. The inflow port 7061a is formed in a substantially square shape in a plan view with the opening side facing upward. The inflow port 7061a is formed so as to have a size that allows a game ball to enter. The inflow port 7061a is provided so as to be located below the notch 7051. As a result, the inflow port 7061a is configured so that the game ball flowing down from the notch 7051 can enter from above.

The introduction path 7061b is a passage for guiding the game ball that has entered the inflow port 7061a in the lower left direction. The introduction path 7061b forms part of an "advantageous course". The introduction path 7061b is formed so as to extend in the lower left direction from the inflow port 7061a.

The discharge port 7061c shown in FIG. 42 is a hole (exit) for discharging the game ball that has passed through the introduction path 7061b to the outside. The discharge port 7061c is formed at the lower left end portion of the introduction path 7061b so that the opening side faces forward.

The gutter base side disadvantaged passage 7061d shown in FIG. 42 forms a part of the “disadvantageous course”. The gutter base side disadvantageous passage 7061d is formed on the left side of the discharge port 7061c so as to guide the game ball substantially downward.

The gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e shown in FIG. 42 forms a part of the “advantageous course”. The gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e is formed on the right side of the discharge port 7061c so as to guide the game ball substantially downward.

The disadvantageous course discharge port 7061f shown in FIG. 42 is a hole (exit) for discharging a game ball that has passed through the “disadvantageous course” to the outside. The disadvantaged course discharge port 7061f is formed so as to open downward at the lower end of the disadvantaged passage 7061d on the gutter base side.

The advantageous course discharge port 7061 g shown in FIG. 42 is a hole (exit) for discharging a game ball that has passed through the “advantageous course” to the outside. The advantageous course discharge port 7061 g is formed so as to open downward at the lower end of the gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e.

The central gutter decoration 7064 shown in FIGS. 37, 42 and 43 is formed so as to cover the introduction path 7061b from the front side.

The central gutter cover 7065 shown in FIGS. 37, 42 and 43 covers the central gutter base 7061 from the front side. The central gutter cover 7065 is formed with an advantageous outbound route 7065a on the gutter cover side and an advantageous return route 7065b on the gutter cover side.

The gutter cover side advantageous outbound route 7065a shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is a passage for guiding the game ball discharged from the discharge port 7061c through the introduction path 7061b of the central gutter base 7061 in the forward direction. The gutter cover side advantageous outbound route 7065a forms a part of the "advantageous course". The gutter cover side advantageous outbound route 7065a is formed so as to penetrate the central gutter cover 7065 in the front-rear direction. The gutter cover side advantageous outbound route 7065a is formed so that the upper side is open. The rear end portion of the gutter cover side advantageous outbound route 7065a is formed so as to communicate with the discharge port 7061c of the central gutter base 7061.

The gutter cover side advantageous return route 7065b shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is a passage for guiding the game ball returning after passing through the gutter cover side advantageous outward route 7065a or the like in the backward direction. The gutter cover side advantageous return route 7065b forms a part of the "advantageous course". The gutter cover side advantageous return path 7065b is formed so as to penetrate the central gutter cover 7065 in the front-rear direction. The gutter cover side advantageous return route 7065b is provided below the gutter cover side advantageous outward route 7065a. The gutter cover side advantageous return path 7065b is formed so that the game ball can be guided to the gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e of the central gutter base 7061.

Next, the configuration of the starting port unit 7070 will be described in detail.

The starting port unit 7070 shown in FIGS. 29, 30, 37, 42 and 43 is a unit body in which two first starting ports (base plate side advantageous outward path 7072b and starting port 7071a) are integrated. Even inside the start port unit 7070, the passages of the game balls that have passed through the two first start ports are formed so as to be different from each other. That is, an advantageous course and a disadvantageous course are also formed inside the starting port unit 7070 so that the game balls entering from the two first starting ports do not mix with each other (until they are discharged from the starting port unit 7070). Will be done. The starting port unit 7070 includes a starting port decoration 7071, a starting port base plate 7072, a first proximity switch 7073, and a second proximity switch 7074.

The starting port decoration 7071 shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is a portion constituting the front side of the starting port unit 7070. The starting opening decoration 7071 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open rear side surface. The starting port decoration 7071 includes a starting port 7071a and a decorative side advantageous passage 7071b.

The starting port 7071a is a portion configured so that a game ball flowing down from the flow-down port 7042 of the stage 7040 can enter (see FIGS. 29 and 30). The starting port 7071a corresponds to the first starting port 5442 in the first embodiment. The starting port 7071a is provided on the upper part of the starting port decoration 7071 so as to be located directly below the flow port 7042. The starting port 7071a is formed so as to be open in the upward direction and the rearward direction.

The decorative side advantageous passage 7071b shown in FIG. 43 is a passage that guides the game ball discharged from the discharge port 7061c of the central gutter base 7061 and sent to the start port unit 7070 in the rear direction. The decorative side advantageous passage 7071b is provided at the lower part of the starting opening decoration 7071. The decorative side advantageous passage 7071b is formed so as to be open in the upward direction and the rearward direction.

The starting port base plate 7072 shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is a portion constituting the rear side of the starting port unit 7070. The starting port base plate 7072 is formed in the shape of a plate having a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. The starting port base plate 7072 includes a base plate side disadvantageous passage 7072a, a base plate side advantageous outward path 7072b, and a base plate side advantageous return path 7072c.

The disadvantageous passage 7072a on the base plate side is a passage that guides the game ball that has entered the starting port 7071a in the rear direction. The base plate side disadvantageous passage 7072a is formed on the upper portion of the starting port base plate 7072 so that the upper side, the front side, and the rear side are opened. The front end portion of the disadvantageous passage 7072a on the base plate side is provided so as to communicate with the rear end portion of the starting port 7071a.

The base plate side advantageous outbound route 7072b is a passage (opening) that guides the game ball that has passed through the gutter cover side advantageous outbound route 7065a in the forward direction, and eventually to the starting port unit 7070 (decorative side advantageous passage 7071b). .. The base plate side advantageous outbound route 7072b is formed so as to penetrate the starting port base plate 7072 in the front-rear direction. The base plate side advantageous outbound route 7072b is provided below the base plate side disadvantageous passage 7072a (at the substantially central portion of the starting port base plate 7072). The base plate side advantageous outbound route 7072b corresponds to the first starting port 5442 in the first embodiment.

The base plate side advantageous return path 7072c is a passage that guides the game ball that has passed through the decorative side advantageous return passage 7071b in the rear direction, and eventually guides the game ball to the central gutter 7060 (gutter cover side advantageous return path 7065b). The base plate side advantageous return path 7072c is formed so as to penetrate the starting port base plate 7072 in the front-rear direction. The base plate side advantageous return path 7072c is provided below the base plate side advantageous outbound route 7072b (at the lower part of the starting port base plate 7072).

In this way, the inflow port 7061a, the introduction path 7061b, the discharge port 7061c, the gutter cover side advantageous outbound route 7065a, the base plate side advantageous outbound route 7072b, the decorative side advantageous passage 7071b, the base plate side advantageous return path 7072c, and the gutter cover side advantageous inbound route 7065b. , The gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e, the advantageous course discharge port 7061 g, and the like constitute an "advantageous course". On the other hand, the "disadvantageous course" is composed of the stage 7040, the starting port 7071a, the disadvantageous passage 7072a on the base plate side, the disadvantaged passage 7061d on the gutter base side, the disadvantaged course discharge port 7061f, and the like.

The first proximity switch 7073 shown in FIG. 42 is a sensor for detecting that a game ball has entered the starting port 7071a (first starting port). The first proximity switch 7073 is located on the disadvantaged course. That is, the first proximity switch 7073 can detect that the game ball has passed the "unfavorable course". The first proximity switch 7073 is arranged inside the central gutter 7060. The first proximity switch 7073 is formed in a flat plate shape with its plate surface facing up and down. The first proximity switch 7073 is provided in the middle of the gutter base side disadvantageous passage 7061d. The first proximity switch 7073 includes a through hole 7073a.

The through hole 7073a is a hole having a substantially circular shape in the front view that penetrates the first proximity switch 7073 in the vertical direction. The through hole 7073a has an inner diameter that allows a game ball to pass through.

The first proximity switch 7073 configured in this way is configured to be capable of forming a magnetic field in the through hole 7073a and detecting an eddy current generated when the game ball passes through the magnetic field (through hole 7073a), for example. To. Based on the detection result of the eddy current, the first proximity switch 7073 indicates that the game ball has entered the starting port 7071a (first starting port) (passes the "disadvantageous course"). ) Is detected. The first proximity switch 7073 corresponds to the first start port switch 5472 in the first embodiment.

The second proximity switch 7074 shown in FIG. 42 is a sensor for detecting that a game ball has entered the base plate side advantageous outward path 7072b (first starting port). The second proximity switch 7074 is located on the advantageous course. That is, the second proximity switch 7074 can detect that the game ball has passed the "advantageous course". The second proximity switch 7074 is formed in a flat plate shape with its plate surface facing up and down. The second proximity switch 7074 is provided in the middle of the gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e. The second proximity switch 7074 includes a through hole 7074a.

The through hole 7074a is a hole having a substantially circular shape in the front view that penetrates the second proximity switch 7074 in the vertical direction. The through hole 7074a has an inner diameter that allows a game ball to pass through.

The second proximity switch 7074 configured in this way is configured to be capable of forming a magnetic field in the through hole 7074a and detecting an eddy current generated when the game ball passes through the magnetic field (through hole 7074a), for example. To. Based on the detection result of the eddy current, the second proximity switch 7074 indicates that the game ball has entered the base plate side advantageous outbound route 7072b (first starting port) (“advantageous course”). Passed) is detected. The second proximity switch 7074 corresponds to the first start port switch 5472 in the first embodiment.

As described above, in the starting port unit 7070, the starting port and the switch corresponding to the first starting port 5442 in the first embodiment are paired (specifically, the starting port 7071a and the first proximity switch 7073). The base plate side advantageous outbound route 7072b and the second proximity switch 7074) are provided. In this way, the starting port 7071a and the base plate side advantageous outbound route 7072b each give an opportunity for a hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and the result of the hit determination is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 and the first special symbol display unit. It gives an opportunity to display on 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74.

Next, the operation of the game ball distribution device 7200 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 40, 41, 44 and 45.

When the solenoid 7250 is in the non-energized state (non-excited state), the movable piece 7220 is located immediately below the communication hole 7031 as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41. As a result, the communication hole 7031 is closed by the movable piece 7220.

The solenoid 7250 generates an upward suction force when it is in an energized state (excited state). Then, as shown in FIG. 44, the solenoid 7250 sucks the metal piece 7240 upward by the suction force. Then, the flapper 7230 swings clockwise around the axis of the second pin 7212 in the left side view. That is, the front portion of the flapper 7230 swings upward.

Then, the protrusion 7231 of the flapper 7230 presses the lower portion (front portion) of the movable piece 7220 upward and forward while sliding the elongated hole 7222a of the movable piece 7220 from the other side (lower side) to one side (upper side). do. As a result, the movable piece 7220 swings clockwise around the axis of the first pin 7211 in the left side view. Then, the movable piece upper portion 7221 of the movable piece 7220 swings (moves) backward and downward, and separates from the communication hole 7031 of the upper passage 7030. As a result, the movable piece upper portion 7221 of the movable piece 7220 opens the communication hole 7031.

On the other hand, the solenoid 7250 does not generate an upward suction force when it is in a non-energized state (non-excited state). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the flapper 7230 swings counterclockwise around the axis of the second pin 7212 in the left side view due to its own weight. That is, the front portion of the flapper 7230 swings downward.

Then, the protrusion 7231 of the flapper 7230 slides the elongated hole 7222a of the movable piece 7220 from one side (upper rear side) to the other side (lower front side), and moves the lower part (front part) of the movable piece 7220 downward. Press. As a result, the movable piece 7220 swings counterclockwise around the axis of the first pin 7211 in the left side view. Then, the movable piece upper portion 7221 of the movable piece 7220 swings (moves) forward and upward, and approaches the communication hole 7031 of the upper passage 7030. As a result, the movable piece upper portion 7221 of the movable piece 7220 closes the communication hole 7031. At this time, the upper passage 7030 and the game ball distribution device 7200 (movable piece upper portion 7221) are arranged so as to maintain a non-contact state with each other. Therefore, even if the gaming ball distribution device 7200 is closed, the passage and the movable piece do not rub against each other, and dust generated by the rubbing does not occur. Therefore, even if the gaming machine is used for a long period of time, the gaming ball is oscillated. The branching device 7200 does not malfunction.

By swinging the movable piece 7220 downward (backward and downward) in this way, the communication hole 7031 can be opened apart from the communication hole 7031. Further, by swinging the movable piece 7220 upward (forward and upward), the communication hole 7031 can be closed in the vicinity of the communication hole 7031. As described above, the communication hole 7031 is closed and opened by the movable piece 7220 without the movable piece 7220 and the communication hole 7031 sliding with each other. The operation of the movable piece 7220 can be performed by switching between the energized state and the non-energized state of the solenoid 7250. That is, by switching between the energized state and the non-energized state of the solenoid 7250, it is possible to switch between closing and opening the communication hole 7031.

In this way, in the game ball distribution device 7200, the communication hole 7031 can be closed and opened by swinging the movable piece 7220, and the game ball passing through the upper passage 7030 can be distributed to the advantageous course or the disadvantageous course.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as described above, when the game balls are distributed to the advantageous course, the degree of advantage for the player is higher than when the game balls are distributed to the disadvantageous course. Is set to. Further, in the game ball distribution device 7200, the swing of the movable piece 7220 is performed by time management using an open time timer (see the distribution device control process shown in FIG. 28) as described above, so that the movable piece 7220 is performed. (By extension, closing and opening of the communication hole 7031) is always repeated at a constant timing. Therefore, for example, if the player can aim and intentionally reach the communication hole 7031 at a specific timing, the game ball distribution device 7200 will not perform appropriate distribution, and the game ball will move to an advantageous course. You will be guided.

As described above, if proper distribution by the game ball distribution device 7200 is not performed, the degree of advantage for the player may be intentionally increased, which is not desirable. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the time when the launched game ball reaches the communication hole 7031 can be given randomness so that the game ball cannot intentionally reach the communication hole 7031 at a specific timing. It has a structure that can be used (Clune 7100, etc.).

Next, the flow of the game ball A entered into the ball entry port 7010 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 54.

As shown in FIG. 46, the game ball A that has entered the ball entry port 7010 flows down the warp passage 7020 and is guided to the crune 7100. In the present embodiment, by lengthening the rolling time of the game ball in the crune 7100 as much as possible, it is difficult to make the timing of discharging the game ball from the crune 7100 constant.

As shown in FIG. 47, the game ball A guided to the Kroon 7100 flows into the guide portion 7110 via the inflow port 7111. Here, the bottom surface portion 7112 is inclined downward to the right (see FIG. 36). Therefore, the game ball A guided to the guide portion 7110 moves to the right on the bottom surface portion 7112. At this time, since the game ball sent from the warp passage 7020 is given momentum to the rear, in many cases, the game ball moves to the right on the bottom surface portion 7112 while abutting on the rear side wall portion 7113b.

The game ball A moves to the right while abutting on the rear side wall portion 7113b, and is guided to the rolling portion 7120. Specifically, the game ball A is guided to a starting point portion (connecting portion with the rear side wall portion 7113b) of the guide wall 7122.

The game ball A guided to the starting point portion of the guide wall 7122 rolls the bottom surface portion 7121 clockwise in a plan view while abutting on the guide wall 7122. Then, the game ball A reaches the end point portion (connection portion with the front side wall portion 7113a) of the guide wall 7122.

As shown in FIG. 48, the game ball A that has reached the end point portion of the guide wall 7122 rolls clockwise in a plan view while abutting on the corner portion of the step portion 7130. At this time, as shown in FIG. 49, the game ball A rolls while abutting on the corner portion of the step portion 7130 with a part protruding toward the guide portion 7110 side.

Here, as shown in FIG. 50, if the guide wall 7122 is not provided with the bulging portion 7122a, the game ball A has a protruding portion B (see FIG. 49) in the vicinity of the starting point of the stepped portion 7130. , It collides with the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122 at an angle close to vertical. Then, the game ball A is repelled by the guide wall 7122 and is discharged to the outside from the discharge hole 7123a without rolling the bottom surface portion 7121. Therefore, the rolling time of the game ball A becomes short, and the croon 7100 cannot play the role of giving randomness to the rolling time of the game ball A.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the bulging portion 7122a is provided at the starting point portion of the guide wall 7122, the game ball A is prevented from colliding with the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122 at an angle close to vertical. Can be done. That is, the game ball A smoothly abuts on the guide wall 7122 at an angle close to parallel to the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122. Therefore, the collision of the game ball A with the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122 can be buffered. Therefore, the game ball A is not repelled by the guide wall 7122, and it is possible to prevent the game ball A from being immediately discharged to the outside from the discharge hole 7123a.

The bottom surface portion 7121 is inclined downward toward the center (see FIG. 36). Therefore, the game ball A that rolls on the bottom surface portion 7121 moves toward the center while rotating clockwise in a plan view, and is guided to the discharge portion 7123.

The game ball A guided to the discharge portion 7123 is guided downward while abutting on the inner wall of the discharge hole 7123a and rotating clockwise in a plan view. Here, since the discharge hole 7123a is formed in an inverted conical shape, the rotation speed does not easily decrease. Therefore, the maximum time until the game ball A is discharged from the discharge hole 7123a can be lengthened. In this way, by lengthening the rolling time of the game ball in the crune 7100 as long as possible, it becomes difficult for the timing of discharging the game ball from the crune 7100 to be constant. That is, since the passage (rolling) time of the game ball passing through the Kroon 7100 can be given randomness, even when the player aims, the game ball is intentionally communicated with the hole 7031 at a specific timing. Cannot be reached.

As shown in FIG. 46, the game ball discharged from the discharge hole 7123a is received by the upper passage 7030. Since the upper passage 7030 is inclined downward to the right, the game ball is guided to the right by the upper passage 7030. The game ball moving in the upper passage 7030 reaches the portion where the communication hole 7031 is provided.

Here, when the communication hole 7031 is closed by the movable piece 7220 of the game ball distribution device 7200, the game ball moves to the right in the upper passage 7030 as it is without falling from the communication hole 7031. You will be guided to a "disadvantageous course". On the other hand, when the communication hole 7031 is closed by the movable piece 7220, the game ball falls from the communication hole 7031 and is guided to the "advantageous course".

In the following, the flow of the game ball passing through the "disadvantageous course" will be described.

As shown in FIG. 51, the game ball that has moved to the right in the upper passage 7030 without falling from the communication hole 7031 is guided to the right end portion of the stage 7040. Since the right end of the stage 7040 is inclined downward to the left, the game ball that has flowed into the stage 7040 is guided to the left. The game ball flows down from any of the outflow ports 7041, 7042, and 7043 depending on conditions such as the speed at which the stage 7040 moves.

Here, when the game ball flows down from the right side flow port 7041 and the left side flow port 7043, the game ball flows downward as it is without entering the start port 7071a of the start port unit 7070. In this case, the player cannot get the prize ball.

On the other hand, when the game ball flows down from the middle flow port 7042, the game ball enters the start port 7071a of the start port unit 7070.

As shown in FIG. 52, the game ball that has entered the starting port 7071a is guided backward by the disadvantageous passage 7072a on the base plate side and sent to the central gutter 7060. Then, the game ball is guided to the left and downward by the gutter base side disadvantageous passage 7061d, and passes through the through hole 7073a of the first proximity switch 7073. As a result, the main CPU 101 can confirm that the game ball has passed the "disadvantageous course". When the main CPU 101 confirms that the game ball has passed the "disadvantageous course", it plays a predetermined number of prize balls. The game ball that has passed through the first proximity switch 7073 is guided downward as it is, and is discharged to the outside from the disadvantageous course discharge port 7061f.

Next, the flow in which the game ball passes through the "advantageous course" will be described.

As shown in FIG. 53, the game ball flowing down from the communication hole 7031 enters the inflow port 7061a of the central gutter base 7061. Then, the game ball passes through the introduction path 7061b and is discharged from the discharge port 7061c.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the game ball discharged from the discharge port 7061c is guided forward by the gutter cover side advantageous outbound route 7065a and sent to the start port unit 7070. The game ball sent to the start opening unit 7070 passes through the base plate side advantageous outbound route 7072b and is sent to the start opening decoration 7071. The game ball sent to the start opening decoration 7071 is guided backward by the decoration side advantageous passage 7071b (see FIG. 54).

Then, the game ball passes through the base plate side advantageous return path 7072c and is sent to the central gutter 7060. Then, the game ball passes through the gutter cover side advantageous return path 7065b and is sent to the central gutter base 7061. The game ball sent to the central gutter base 7061 is guided to the right and downward by the gutter base side advantageous passage 7061e, and passes through the through hole 7074a of the second proximity switch 7074 (see FIG. 53). As a result, the main CPU 101 can confirm that the game ball has passed the "advantageous course". When the main CPU 101 confirms that the game ball has passed the "advantageous course", the main CPU 101 performs a larger number of prize balls than the "disadvantageous course". The game ball that has passed through the second proximity switch 7074 is guided downward as it is, and is discharged to the outside from the advantageous course discharge port 7061 g.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the gaming balls can be distributed into the "advantageous course" or the "disadvantageous course" by operating the movable piece 7220 of the gaming ball distribution device 7200. As a drive source for the movable piece 7220, a flapper type solenoid in which the power generation unit (solenoid 7250) and the drive unit (flapper 7230 and metal piece 7240) are in non-contact is used, so that the contact surface between the solenoid body and the plunger is scraped. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as rattling and dust generated by scraping of the member, which causes the plunger to not expand and contract properly.

Further, the flapper 7230 shifts to a position where the movable piece 7220 closes the communication hole 7031 when the solenoid 7250 is not energized, but shifts to that position by its own weight without using an urging means such as a spring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the spring deteriorates and cannot return to the retracted position properly.

Further, in the present embodiment, the solenoid 7250 is constantly driven (the opening timing of 0.5 seconds and the closing timing of 1.5 seconds are set to be always alternately repeated). It can be said that such a setting is likely to cause a malfunction in the operation of the movable piece 7220. However, since the game ball distribution device 7200 is configured as described above, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunction in the operation of the movable piece 7220.

[First movable accessory unit]
Hereinafter, the first movable accessory unit 6000 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 73.

The first movable accessory unit 6000 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by operating at an appropriate timing. The first movable accessory unit 6000 is installed on the game board 17. The first movable accessory unit 6000 gives a visual impression to the player by controlling the movement of the movable body at a position visible to the player on the game board 17. The first movable accessory unit 6000 includes a first movable mechanism 6100, a first movement control means 6120, a second movable mechanism 6200, a second movement control means 6260, a third movable mechanism 6300, and a third movement control means 6340. are doing.

The movable body is a portion of the first movable accessory unit 6000 that imitates an arm having a hand or wrist and is driven (for example, a wrist portion 6220, a back portion 6230, an index finger portion 6310, and a ring finger, which will be described later). Part 6320, little finger part 6330, etc.). The first movable mechanism 6100, the second movable mechanism 6200, and the third movable mechanism 6300 have the movable body and drive the movable body.

The first movable mechanism 6100, the second movable mechanism 6200, and the third movable mechanism 6300 are moved and controlled by the first movement control means 6120, the second movement control means 6260, and the third movement control means 6340, which will be described later. A detailed description of the first movable mechanism 6100, the first movement control means 6120, the second movable mechanism 6200, the second movement control means 6260, the third movable mechanism 6300, and the third movement control means 6340 will be described later.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 70 from 55 to 61, the initial state is the state in which the movement of the first movable accessory unit 6000 is not controlled. Further, as shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, 68 and 69, and 71 to 73, the state in which the movement of the first movable accessory unit 6000 is controlled is set as the effect state. In addition, in the drawings of FIGS. 57 to 64 and 67 to 69, the elevating cover member 6124, the wrist portion 6220, and the back portion 6230, which will be described later, are omitted.

The first movement control means 6120 shown in FIGS. 57 to 62 controls the movement of the first movable mechanism 6100 on the game board 17 so as to move up and down along the vertical direction. The first movement control means 6120 mainly includes an elevating base member 6121, an elevating cover member 6124, an elevating motor 6130, an elevating mechanism 6140, an elevating assisting member 6150, and a lock member 6160. In the following, the configuration of the first movement control means 6120 will be described with reference to the initial state.

From FIG. 57 to FIG. 59, the elevating base member 6121 shown in FIG. 62 is provided with an elevating motor 6130 and an elevating mechanism 6140, which will be described later. The elevating base member 6121 is fixed to the game board 17. The elevating base member 6121 has a substantially inverted L-shape (shape like an inverted L-shape) when viewed from the front (see FIG. 62). The elevating base member 6121 mainly includes a main body portion 6122 and a holding portion 6123.

The main body 6122 is equipped with an elevating motor 6130 and an elevating mechanism 6140, which will be described later. The main body 6122 is formed in a long shape along the vertical direction. The main body 6122 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction.

The holding unit 6123 holds the first movable mechanism 6100 in the initial state. The holding portion 6123 projects to the right from the right end portion of the main body portion 6122. The holding portion 6123 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction.

The elevating cover member 6124 shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 covers the main body 6122 and the elevating mechanism 6140 described later. The elevating cover member 6124 is fixed to the main body 6122. Further, the elevating cover member 6124 and the main body 6122 form a housing for accommodating the elevating mechanism 6140 described later.

The elevating motor 6130 is a drive source for moving the first movable mechanism 6100. The elevating motor 6130 is fixed to the upper end of the main body 6122 of the elevating base member 6121. As shown in FIG. 61, the elevating motor 6130 is provided so that the output shaft 6131 penetrates the main body 6122 in the front-rear direction and projects rearward.

The elevating mechanism 6140 shown in FIGS. 57 to 62 transmits the driving force generated by the elevating motor 6130 to the first movable mechanism 6100. The elevating mechanism 6140 mainly includes an output gear 6141, a first transmission gear 6142, a second transmission gear 6143, a pulley 6144, a belt 6145, and an elevating guide 6146. In FIGS. 60 and 61, the elevating base member 6121 is omitted.

The output gear 6141 shown in FIG. 60 takes out the driving force of the elevating motor 6130. The output gear 6141 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft 6131 of the elevating motor 6130.

The first transmission gear 6142 is arranged substantially below the output gear 6141 and meshes with the output gear 6141. In the present embodiment, the first transmission gear 6142 has a small diameter portion (not shown) having a smaller diameter than the portion shown in FIG. 60 formed on the front side, and the small diameter portion is meshed with the output gear 6141. Tooth. The first transmission gear 6142 rotates around the axis of the first transmission gear 6142. In the present embodiment, the first transmission gear 6142 is rotatably pivotally supported on a surface of the main body 6122 facing the front side.

The second transmission gear 6143 is arranged substantially below the first transmission gear 6142 and meshes with the first transmission gear 6142. The second transmission gear 6143 rotates about the axis of the second transmission gear 6143. In the present embodiment, the second transmission gear 6143 is rotatably pivotally supported on a surface of the main body 6122 facing the front side. The second transmission gear 6143 mainly includes a pulley portion 6143a.

The pulley portion 6143a shown in FIG. 61 transmits the driving force of the elevating motor 6130 to the belt 6145, which will be described later. The belt 6145 is wound around the pulley portion 6143a. The pulley portion 6143a is formed at the front end portion of the second transmission gear 6143. The pulley portion 6143a is formed in a front view circular shape centered on the axis of the second transmission gear 6143.

The pulley 6144 shown in FIG. 62 is for winding a belt 6145, which will be described later. The pulley 6144 is arranged on the lower side of the pulley portion 6143a of the second transmission gear 6143. In the present embodiment, the pulley 6144 is rotatably supported by the lower end portion of the elevating base member 6121 on the front-facing surface of the main body portion 6122.

The belt 6145 is formed in an endless shape and is wound around the pulley portion 6143a and the pulley 6144. The belt 6145 rotates with the rotation of the pulley portion 6143a. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, the belt 6145 has a pulley portion 6143a and a rack-shaped tooth portion 6145a formed on a part of the inner peripheral surface facing the pulley 6144. The tooth portion 6145a engages with the engaging tooth portion 6112a provided in the first movable mechanism 6100 described later.

The elevating guide 6146 shown in FIGS. 59 to 62 guides the show guide portion 6113 provided in the first movable mechanism 6100. The elevating guide 6146 guides the first movable mechanism 6100 along the vertical direction. The elevating guide 6146 has a long rod shape in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the pair of elevating guides 6146 are arranged on the main body 6122 of the elevating base member 6121 with a space left and right.

The ascending assisting member 6150 shown in FIGS. 57 to 62 urges the first movable mechanism 6100 upward. The ascending assisting member 6150 mainly includes a case 6151 and a constant load spring 6152.

The case 6151 shown in FIGS. 58 and 60 rotatably holds a constant load spring 6152, which will be described later, around an axis along the left-right direction. The case 6151 is fixed to the upper end portion on the left side of the holding portion 6123 of the elevating base member 6121.

The constant load spring 6152 is formed by winding a strip-shaped spring around a drum whose axial direction is along the left-right direction. The constant load spring 6152 is formed so that the force (torque) at which one end of the constant load spring 6152 drawn from the drum returns is constant. One end of the constant load spring 6152 is connected to the arm 6114 of the first base member 6110 of the first movable mechanism 6100.

The lock member 6160 shown in FIGS. 60 to 62 holds the first movable mechanism 6100 in the initial state. The lock member 6160 is provided with a lock portion 6161 that projects forward in a protruding state so as to be immersive. The lock member 6160 is provided so that the lock portion 6161 penetrates the holding portion 6123 of the elevating base member 6121 in the front-rear direction. Further, the lock member 6160 is provided at substantially the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the holding portion 6123 of the elevating base member 6121 (see FIG. 62).

The lock member 6160 has an electric wire wound in a coil shape, and has a solenoid (not shown) which is not shown and generates a magnetic field by receiving electric power. The solenoid has a plunger (not shown) urged to project forward by a spring member (not shown), and the plunger is connected to the lock portion 6161. The lock portion 6161 is immersed by the solenoid pulling the plunger backward with the generation of the magnetic field due to the energization. Further, the lock portion 6161 protrudes forward due to the urging force of the spring member as the energization is released.

The first movable mechanism 6100 shown in FIGS. 55 to 62 is moved and controlled by the first movement control means 6120 so as to move up and down on the game board 17 in the vertical direction. The first movable mechanism 6100 mainly includes a first base member 6110.

The first base member 6110 holds the second movable mechanism 6200 and the second movement control means 6260 described later, and is connected to the first movement control means 6120. The first base member 6110 mainly includes a main body portion 6111, an arm 6114, and a base cover 6117.

The main body portion 6111 shown in FIG. 60 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The main body portion 6111 mainly includes a groove portion 6112 and a show guide portion 6113.

The groove portion 6112 shown in FIG. 60 is connected to the belt 6145 of the elevating mechanism 6140. The groove portion 6112 is formed so as to be recessed forward on the surface facing the rear of the main body portion 6111. The groove portion 6112 is formed with an engaging tooth portion 6112a that engages with the tooth portion 6145a of the belt 6145. In the present embodiment, the engaging tooth portions 6112a are formed at the upper and lower ends of the groove portions 6112, respectively. By engaging the engaging tooth portion 6112a with the tooth portion 6145a of the belt 6145, the first base member 6110 is connected to the belt 6145.

The guide portion 6113 shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 engages with the elevating guide 6146 and is guided in the vertical direction. The show guide portion 6113 is formed on a surface facing the rear of the main body portion 6111. By sliding the guide portion 6113 with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the elevating guide 6146, the movement of the first movable mechanism 6100 in the vertical direction is guided. In the present embodiment, the show guide portions 6113 are provided at positions corresponding to the pair of elevating guides 6146 of the main body portion 6111.

The arm 6114 supports the second movable mechanism 6200. The arm 6114 is provided at the upper end portion of the main body portion 6111 so as to extend toward the right from the right end portion of the main body portion 6111. Further, the tip of the arm 6114 in the extending direction extends diagonally to the upper right side. The arm 6114 mainly includes a bearing portion 6115 and a lock receiving portion 6116.

The bearing portion 6115 is provided at the tip end portion of the arm 6114 in the extending direction. The bearing portion 6115 has a substantially circular hole shape that opens in the front-rear direction. The lock receiving portion 6116 receives the lock portion 6161 of the lock member 6160. The lock receiving portion 6116 projects to the right from the upper end portion of the bearing portion 6115. As shown in FIG. 60, the lock receiving portion 6116 has a lower surface of the lock receiving portion 6116 facing the upper surface of the locked portion 6161 in a protruding state. In a state where the lower surface of the lock receiving portion 6116 faces the upper surface of the lock portion 6161, the drop of the first movable mechanism 6100 is restricted.

The base cover 6117 shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, 63 and 64 holds the rotation mechanism 6270 described later together with the main body 6111. The base cover 6117 is arranged on the front side of the main body 6111. The base cover 6117 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction.

The second movement control means 6260 shown in FIGS. 58, 63 and 64 controls the movement of the second movable mechanism 6200 so as to rotate (swing) around the rotation shaft 6211 described later on the game board 17. It is something to do. The second movement control means 6260 mainly includes a rotation motor 6261 and a rotation mechanism 6270. Further, in the following, when explaining the positional relationship of the members constituting the second movement control means 6260, as shown in FIG. 62, the first movable mechanism 6100 is in a lowered state, and the second movable mechanism 6200 Will be described with reference to the state before the rotation (descent state described later).

The rotation motor 6261 is a drive source for moving the second movable mechanism 6200. As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the rotary motor 6261 is fixed to a portion below the arm 6114 on the front-facing surface of the base cover 6117. The rotation motor 6261 is provided so that the output shaft 6262 penetrates the base cover 6117 in the front-rear direction and projects rearward.

The rotation mechanism 6270 shown in FIGS. 63 and 64 transmits the driving force generated by the rotation motor 6261 to the second movable mechanism 6200. The rotation mechanism 6270 mainly includes an output gear 6721, a first transmission gear 6272, and a rotation arm 6273.

The output gear 6271 takes out the driving force of the rotary motor 6261. The output gear 6271 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft 6262 of the rotary motor 6261.

The first transmission gear 6272 is arranged substantially above the output gear 6721 and meshes with the output gear 6721. The first transmission gear 6272 rotates about the axis of the first transmission gear 6272. In the present embodiment, the first transmission gear 6272 is rotatably pivotally supported on a surface facing the rear side of the base cover 6117. The first transmission gear 6272 mainly includes an eccentric shaft portion 6272a.

The eccentric shaft portion 6272a is a substantially columnar member. The eccentric shaft portion 6272a is arranged so that the axial direction is directed in the front-rear direction. The front end of the eccentric shaft portion 6272a is connected to a surface facing the rear of the first transmission gear 6272. The eccentric shaft portion 6272a is arranged at a position (eccentric position) separated from the center of the first transmission gear 6272 by a predetermined distance in the rear view. The eccentric shaft portion 6272a is inserted into the first elongated hole 6275a described later. In the present embodiment, the eccentric shaft portion 6272a has a substantially cylindrical bush having a flange portion having a flange portion having an outer diameter larger than the groove width of the first elongated hole 6275a so as to prevent the first elongated hole 6275a from coming off. It is fixed to the rear end.

The rotating arm 6273 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The rotation arm 6273 connects the eccentric shaft portion 6272a of the first transmission gear 6272 and the rotation pin 6212 described later of the second movable mechanism 6200. The rotating arm 6273 has a substantially inverted L-shape when viewed from the rear. The rotating arm 6273 mainly includes a rotating shaft 6274, a short side portion 6275, and a long side portion 6276.

The rotation shaft 6274 is a shaft that serves as a rotation fulcrum of the rotation arm 6273. The rotation shaft 6274 is arranged so that the axial direction is directed to the front-rear direction. The rotation shaft 6274 is a substantially columnar member. In the present embodiment, the rotating shaft 6274 is rotatably supported on a surface facing the rear side of the base cover 6117.

The short side portion 6275 is a side portion extending toward the first transmission gear 6272 side with the rotation shaft 6274 side as the base end portion. A first elongated hole 6275a is formed on the distal end side of the short side portion 6275 in the extending direction (longitudinal direction) so as to penetrate the short side portion 6275 in the front-rear direction. The eccentric shaft portion 6272a of the first transmission gear 6272 is inserted through the first elongated hole 6275a. The first elongated hole 6275a is formed so as to extend linearly by a predetermined distance along the longitudinal direction of the short side portion 6275.

The long side portion 6276 is a side portion extending toward the second movable mechanism 6200 side with the rotation shaft 6274 side as the base end portion. The long side portion 6276 is longer than the short side portion 6275. A second elongated hole 6276a is formed on the distal end side of the long side portion 6276 in the extending direction (longitudinal direction) so as to penetrate the long side portion 6276 in the front-rear direction. The second elongated hole 6276a is inserted with a rotation pin 6212, which will be described later, provided in the second movable mechanism 6200. The second elongated hole 6276a is formed so as to extend linearly by a predetermined distance along the longitudinal direction of the long side portion 6276. Further, the second elongated hole 6276a has a bent portion 6276b bent substantially upward on the distal end side in the longitudinal direction.

The second movable mechanism 6200 is moved and controlled by the second movement control means 6260 so as to rotate (swing) on the game board 17 around the rotation shaft 6211 described later. The second movable mechanism 6200 mainly includes a second base member 6210, a base cover 6213, and a fixed finger portion 6214.

The second base member 6210 shown in FIGS. 63, 64 and 67 holds the third movable mechanism 6300 and the third movement control means 6340 described later, and is connected to the second movement control means 6260. The second base member 6210 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The second base member 6210 mainly includes a rotation shaft 6211 and a rotation pin 6212.

The rotation shaft 6211 is a shaft serving as a rotation fulcrum of the second movable mechanism 6200. The rotation shaft 6211 is arranged so that the axial direction is directed in the front-rear direction. The rotation shaft 6211 has a substantially columnar shape. The rotation shaft 6211 is provided so as to project rearward from the rearward facing surface of the second base member 6210. The rotating shaft 6211 is inserted into a bearing portion 6115 provided on the arm 6114 of the first base member 6110. In the present embodiment, the rotating shaft 6211 is inserted into the bearing portion 6115 via a substantially cylindrical bush.

The rotating pin 6212 is a shaft inserted into the second elongated hole 6276a of the rotating arm 6273. The rotating pin 6212 is arranged so that the axial direction is directed to the front-rear direction. The rotating pin 6212 has a substantially columnar shape. The rotating pin 6212 has a front end connected to a surface facing the rear of the second base member 6210. In the present embodiment, the rotating pin 6212 has a disk-shaped washer having an outer diameter larger than the groove width of the second elongated hole 6276a fixed to the rear end portion so as to prevent the second elongated hole 6276a from coming off. Has been done.

The base cover 6213 shown in FIGS. 65 and 67 holds the opening / closing mechanism 6350 described later together with the second base member 6210. The base cover 6213 is arranged on the front side of the second base member 6210. The base cover 6213 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the base cover 6213 constitutes a reflective member 6231 of the back of the hand 6230 and a reflective member 6241 of the middle finger 6240, which will be described later. A detailed description of the base cover 6213 as the reflective member 6231 and the reflective member 6241 will be described later.

The fixed finger portion 6214 shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 is a portion constituting a portion imitating a finger in the second movable mechanism 6200. The fixing finger portion 6214 is fixed to the second base member 6210 so as to cover the front surface side of the second base member 6210. The fixed finger portion 6214 includes a wrist portion 6220, a hand back portion 6230, a middle finger portion 6240, and a thumb portion 6250.

The wrist portion 6220 shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 covers the left portion of the second base member 6210. The back of the hand 6230 covers the right portion of the second base member 6210. In the present embodiment, the wrist portion 6220 and the back portion 6230 are integrally formed. Further, in the present embodiment, the vertical center of the wrist portion 6220 and the back of the hand portion 6230 is a translucent portion 6221 and a translucent portion 6234 formed by a transmissive member. The translucent portion 6221 and the translucent portion 6234 are made of the same material as the lens member 6244 described later.

The middle finger portion 6240 shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, 65 and 66 protrudes to the right from the right end portion of the back of the hand 6230. The middle finger portion 6240 includes a reflective member 6241, a substrate 6242, a light guide member 6243, a lens member 6244, and a cover member 6245.

The reflective member 6241 shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 is fixed to the second base member 6210. The reflective member 6241 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The reflective member 6241 is formed of a member capable of reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting means 6242a described later. In the present embodiment, the reflective member 6241 has a substantially plate shape that is long in the left-right direction. Further, in the present embodiment, the reflective member 6241 constitutes a right side portion of the base cover 6213.

The reflective member 6241 is provided so as to be located on the outer side (right side) of the right end portion of the substrate 6242 described later. Further, the reflecting member 6241 is on the rear side of the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 6242a on the substrate 6242 (position beyond the back surface of the mounting surface), and can reflect the light emitted from the end portion of the lens member 6244, which will be described later. It is installed in a suitable position. In the present embodiment, the reflective member 6241 has an inclined portion in which the right side portion is inclined to the rear side toward the right so that the right side end portion is located on the rear side of the back surface of the substrate 6242 described later. It is said to be 6241a.

The board 6242 is for mounting electronic components (functional components). The substrate 6242 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The front surface of the substrate 6242 is a mounting surface on which the light emitting means 6242a is mounted. The substrate 6242 is arranged on the front surface side of the reflective member 6241.

In the present embodiment, the substrate 6242 has a substantially plate shape that is long in the left-right direction. In the present embodiment, the substrate 6242 has substantially the same shape as the reflective member 6241 in front view except for the inclined portion 6241a, and is formed so as to have a smaller area than the reflective member 6241.

The light guide member 6243 guides the light emitted from the light emitting means 6242a. The light guide member 6243 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 6243 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The light guide member 6243 is arranged so as to cover the front surface side of the substrate 6242, guides the light introduced from the light emitting means 6242a toward the plate surface inside the light guide member 6243, and guides the light to the outside of the light guide member 6243. do. In the present embodiment, the light guide member 6243 has a substantially plate shape that is long in the left-right direction.

The light guide member 6243 is provided so as to be located on the outer side (right side) of the right end portion of the substrate 6242 from the position of covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 6242a on the substrate 6242. Further, the light guide member 6243 is provided on the rear side (position beyond the back surface of the mounting surface) of the light emitting means 6242a of the substrate 6242 with respect to the back surface of the mounting surface. In the present embodiment, the light guide member 6243 has an inclined portion 6243a in which the right side portion is inclined to the rear side toward the right so that the right side end portion is located on the rear side of the back surface of the substrate 6242. It is said that. Further, the inclination angle of the inclined portion 6243a is substantially the same as the inclination angle of the inclined portion 6241a of the reflective member 6241. In the present embodiment, the light guide member 6243 has a shape substantially corresponding to the front view and the reflective member 6231.

The lens member 6244 is arranged so as to cover the front surface side of the light guide member 6243. The lens member 6244 is formed of a transmissive member. The lens member 6244 diffuses the light derived from the light guide member 6243. The lens member 6244 is arranged so as to cover the upper side, the front side, the lower side, and the right side of the reflective member 6241, the substrate 6242, and the light guide member 6243, respectively.

The lens member 6244 is provided so as to be located on the outer side (right side) of the right end portion of the substrate 6242 from the position of covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 6242a on the substrate 6242. Further, the light guide member 6243 extends to the rear side (position beyond the back surface of the mounting surface) from the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 6242a on the substrate 6242. In the present embodiment, in the lens member 6244, the right side portion (the portion surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 66) is on the right side so that the right side end portion is located on the rear side of the back surface of the substrate 6242. It is said that the inclined portion 6244a is inclined to the rear side toward the rear side.

The inclined portion 6244a of the lens member 6244 is extended so as to be inclined in a manner different from the inclined portion 6241a of the reflective member 6241 and the inclined portion 6243a of the light guide member 6243. In the present embodiment, when viewed in the vertical direction, the inclination angle of the inclined portion 6244a of the lens member 6244 with respect to the horizontal plane is made larger than the inclination angle of the inclined portion 6241a of the reflecting member 6241 and the inclined portion 6243a of the light guide member 6243 with respect to the horizontal plane. ing. As a result, the inclined portion 6241a of the reflective member 6241 and the inclined portion 6243a of the light guide member 6243 are arranged so that the distal end side in the extending direction is close to the distal end side in the extending direction of the lens member 6244.

The cover member 6245 is arranged together with the lens member 6244 so as to cover the light guide member 6243. The cover member 6245 is formed of an impermeable member. In the present embodiment, the cover member 6245 is arranged so as to cover the upper side, the front side, and the lower side in the left side portion of the reflective member 6241, the substrate 6242, and the light guide member 6243, respectively.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, the back of the hand 6230 is also provided with the same reflective member 6231, substrate 6232, and light guide member 6233 as the middle finger portion 6240 described above. In the present embodiment, the reflective member 6231 of the back of the hand 6230 and the reflective member 6241 of the middle finger 6240 are integrally formed so as to form the base cover 6213. The reflective member 6231 of the back of the hand 6230 constitutes the left side portion of the base cover 6213. Further, in the present embodiment, the substrate 6232 and the light guide member 6233 of the back of the hand 6230 are also integrally formed with the substrate 6242 and the light guide member 6243 of the middle finger portion 6240, respectively.

The thumb portion 6250 projects diagonally to the lower right from the right upper end of the back of the hand 6230. The thumb portion 6250 includes a reflection member, a substrate, a light guide member, a lens member, and a cover member. The structure of the reflective member, the substrate, the light guide member, the lens member, and the cover member of the thumb portion 6250 includes the reflective member 6241, the substrate 6242, the light guide member 6243, the lens member 6244, and the cover member 6245 in the middle finger portion 6240 described above. Since it is substantially the same except for the specific shape, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The third movement control means 6340 shown in FIGS. 58 and 67 to 69 controls the movement of the third movable mechanism 6300 so as to rotate (open / close) on the game board 17. The third movement control means 6340 mainly includes an opening / closing motor 6341 and an opening / closing mechanism 6350. In the following, when explaining the positional relationship of the members constituting the third movement control means 6340, the initial state (state shown in FIG. 67) will be used as a reference. Further, in FIG. 67, the base cover 6213 is shown by a two-dot chain line.

The opening / closing motor 6341 is a drive source for moving the third movable mechanism 6300. The opening / closing motor 6341 is fixed to the lower end portion on the left side on the surface facing the rear side of the base cover 6213. The opening / closing motor 6341 is provided so that the output shaft 6342 projects toward the right side. The output shaft 6342 rotates about an axis along the left-right direction.

The opening / closing mechanism 6350 transmits the driving force generated by the opening / closing motor 6341 to the third movable mechanism 6300. The opening / closing mechanism 6350 mainly includes an output gear 6351, a first transmission gear 6352, a second transmission gear 6353, an upper first arm 6354, an upper second arm 6355, a lower first arm 6356, and a lower second arm 6357. do.

The output gear 6351 takes out the driving force of the open / close motor 6341. The output gear 6351 is fixed to the right end of the output shaft 6342 of the rotary motor 6261.

The first transmission gear 6352 is arranged substantially above the output gear 6351 and meshes with the output gear 6351. The first transmission gear 6352 is arranged so as to rotate around an axial center along the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the first transmission gear 6352 is rotatably pivotally supported on a surface facing the rear side of the base cover 6213. The first transmission gear 6352 transmits the rotation of the output shaft 6342 about the axis along the left-right direction as the rotation around the axis along the front-rear direction. Further, in the present embodiment, the first transmission gear 6352 has a small diameter portion having a smaller diameter than the portion meshing with the output gear 6351 formed on the front side, and the small diameter portion is the second transmission gear 6353 described later. Toothed.

The second transmission gear 6353 is arranged substantially above the first transmission gear 6352 and meshes with the first transmission gear 6352. The second transmission gear 6353 is arranged so as to rotate about an axial center along the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the second transmission gear 6353 is rotatably pivotally supported on a surface facing the rear side of the base cover 6213. In the present embodiment, the second transmission gear 6353 is formed in a substantially semicircular shape in front view.

The upper first arm 6354 is arranged substantially to the right of the second transmission gear 6353. The upper first arm 6354 is arranged so as to rotate around an axial center along the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the upper first arm 6354 is rotatably pivotally supported on a surface facing the rear side of the base cover 6213. The upper first arm 6354 mainly includes a gear portion 6354a, an arm portion 6354b, and a shaft portion 6354c.

The gear portion 6354a is meshed with the second transmission gear 6353. The gear portion 6354a is formed in a substantially fan shape with a predetermined central angle centered on the axis of the upper first arm 6354 in front view. The arm portion 6354b extends diagonally upward to the right from the axis of the upper first arm 6354. The shaft portion 6354c is arranged so that the axial direction is directed to the front-rear direction. The shaft portion 6354c is formed so as to project toward the front side at the tip of the arm portion 6354b in the extending direction.

The upper second arm 6355 is arranged substantially to the right of the upper first arm 6354. The upper second arm 6355 mainly includes an arm portion 6355a and an index finger side extending portion 6355d.

The arm portion 6355a is connected to the upper first arm 6354. The arm portion 6355a extends diagonally downward to the right from the upper first arm 6354 side. The arm portion 6355a mainly includes a long hole 6355b and a rotation shaft 6355c.

The elongated hole 6355b is formed so as to penetrate the left end portion of the arm portion 6355a in the front-rear direction. The elongated hole 6355b is formed so as to extend linearly by a predetermined distance along the extending direction (longitudinal direction) of the arm portion 6355a. The shaft portion 6354c of the upper first arm 6354 is inserted through the elongated hole 6355b, and the upper first arm 6354 and the upper second arm 6355 are connected to each other.

The rotation shaft 6355c is formed at the right end of the arm portion 6355a. The rotation shaft 6355c is arranged so that the axial direction is directed to the front-rear direction. The rotation shaft 6355c serves as a rotation fulcrum of the upper second arm 6355. The rotation shaft 6355c is rotatably supported in the vertical direction substantially center on the right side on the surface facing the rear side of the base cover 6213.

The index finger side extension portion 6355d is fixed to the index finger portion 6310, which will be described later. The index finger side extending portion 6355d extends diagonally upward to the right from a portion in the middle of the arm portion 6355a in the longitudinal direction.

The lower first arm 6356 is arranged substantially below the upper first arm 6354. The lower first arm 6356 is arranged so as to rotate around an axial center along the front-rear direction. The lower first arm 6356 is rotatably pivotally supported on a surface facing the rear side of the base cover 6213. The lower first arm 6356 mainly includes a gear portion 6356a, an arm portion 6356b, and a shaft portion 6356c.

The gear portion 6356a is meshed with the gear portion 6354a of the upper first arm 6354. The gear portion 6354a constitutes an arc having a predetermined central angle with the axis of the lower first arm 6356 as the center of the circle when viewed from the front. The arm portion 6356b extends diagonally downward to the right from the axis of the lower first arm 6356. The shaft portion 6356c is arranged so that the axial direction is directed to the front-rear direction. The shaft portion 6356c is formed so as to project toward the front side at the tip of the arm portion 6356b in the extending direction.

The lower second arm 6357 is arranged substantially to the right of the lower first arm 6356. The lower second arm 6357 mainly includes an arm portion 6357a and a ring finger / little finger side extension portion 6357d.

The arm portion 6357a is connected to the lower first arm 6356. The arm portion 6357a extends diagonally upward to the right from the lower first arm 6356 side. The arm portion 6357a mainly includes a long hole 6357b and a rotation shaft 6357c.

The elongated hole 6357b is formed so as to penetrate the left end portion of the arm portion 6357a in the front-rear direction. The elongated hole 6357b is formed so as to extend linearly by a predetermined distance along the extending direction (longitudinal direction) of the arm portion 6357a. The shaft portion 6356c of the lower first arm 6356 is inserted through the elongated hole 6357b, and the lower first arm 6356 and the lower second arm 6357 are connected to each other.

The rotation shaft 6357c is formed at the right end of the arm portion 6357a. The rotation shaft 6357c is arranged so that the axial direction is directed to the front-rear direction. The rotation shaft 6357c serves as a rotation fulcrum of the lower second arm 6357. The rotation shaft 6357c is rotatably supported in the vertical direction substantially center on the right side on the surface facing the rear side of the base cover 6213. In the present embodiment, the rotation shaft 6357c of the lower second arm 6357 and the rotation shaft 6355c of the upper second arm 6355 are coaxially connected to each other.

The ring finger / little finger side extension portion 6357d is for fixing the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330, which will be described later. The ring finger / little finger side extension portion 6357d extends diagonally to the lower right from a portion in the longitudinal direction of the arm portion 6357a.

The third movable mechanism 6300 is moved and controlled by the third movement control means 6340 so as to open and close in the vertical direction on the game board 17. The third movable mechanism 6300 mainly includes an index finger portion 6310, a ring finger portion 6320, and a little finger portion 6330.

The index finger portion 6310 protrudes to the right from the right end portion of the back of the hand portion 6230. The index finger portion 6310 is fixed to the index finger side extension portion 6355d of the opening / closing mechanism 6350. The index finger portion 6310 includes a reflection member, a substrate, a light guide member, a lens member, and a cover member. The structure of the reflective member, the substrate, the light guide member, the lens member, and the cover member of the index finger portion 6310 includes the reflective member 6241, the substrate 6242, the light guide member 6243, the lens member 6244, and the cover member 6245 in the middle finger portion 6240 described above. Since it is substantially the same except for the specific shape, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The ring finger 6320 protrudes to the right from the right end of the back of the hand 6230. The ring finger portion 6320 is fixed to the ring finger / little finger side extension portion 6357d of the opening / closing mechanism 6350. The ring finger portion 6320 includes a reflection member, a substrate, a light guide member, a lens member, and a cover member. The structure of the reflective member, the substrate, the light guide member, the lens member, and the cover member of the ring finger portion 6320 includes the reflective member 6241, the substrate 6242, the light guide member 6243, the lens member 6244, and the cover member 6245 in the middle finger portion 6240 described above. Since it is substantially the same except for the specific shape, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The little finger portion 6330 projects to the right from the right end portion of the back of the hand 6230. The little finger portion 6330 is fixed to the ring finger / little finger side extension portion 6357d of the opening / closing mechanism 6350. The little finger portion 6330 includes a reflection member, a substrate, a light guide member, a lens member, and a cover member. The composition of the reflective member, the substrate, the light guide member, the lens member, and the cover member of the little finger portion 6330 includes the reflective member 6241, the substrate 6242, the light guide member 6243, the lens member 6244, and the cover member 6245 in the middle finger portion 6240 described above. Since it is substantially the same except for the specific shape, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Hereinafter, the movement control of the first movable accessory unit 6000 configured as described above will be described. In the following, the movement control in which the first movable accessory unit 6000 in the initial state is set to the effect state will be described.

In the initial state shown in FIG. 70, the first movable mechanism 6100 is located above the liquid crystal display device 16 in front view. In the present embodiment, the first movable mechanism 6100 is arranged behind the upper part of the center accessory 7000. Further, in the present embodiment, the first movable mechanism 6100 is hidden behind the decorative member 56 arranged at the upper part of the game board 17, and is difficult for the player to see.

First, the first movement control by the first movement control means 6120 will be described. As shown in FIG. 60, when the elevating motor 6130 is driven, the second transmission gear 6143 rotates about the axis and clockwise in the rear view via the output gear 6141 and the first transmission gear 6142 that mesh with each other. ..

The rotation of the second transmission gear 6143 is transmitted to the pulley portion 6143a of the second transmission gear 6143 and the belt 6145 wound around the pulley 6144, and the belt 6145 rotates clockwise in the rear view. As a result, the first movable mechanism 6100 connected to the belt 6145 moves downward (linear motion).

In the present embodiment, upon the first movement control, the restriction on the downward movement of the first movable mechanism 6100 by the lock member 6160 is released. The lock member 6160 is controlled so as to immerse the lock portion 6161 during the first movement control. As a result, the restriction on the lock portion 6161 with respect to the lock receiving portion 6116 provided on the first movable mechanism 6100 is released, and the first movable mechanism 6100 can move downward. Further, in the present embodiment, in the first movement control, the first movable mechanism 6100 moves downward against the upward urging force of the ascending assisting member 6150 by the constant load spring 6152. That is, it moves (falls) from top to bottom via the area on the left side (first movement path) of the game board 17. That is, the first movement path is the path of the first movable mechanism 6100 that moves as described above.

By controlling the movement as described above, as shown in FIGS. 62 and 71, the first movable mechanism 6100 is in a descending state, which is one aspect of the effect state. In the descending state, as shown in FIG. 71, the first movable mechanism 6100 is located on the lower side in the center accessory 7000. Further, in the descending state, the first movable mechanism 6100 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the center accessory 7000. Further, in the descent state, the region through which the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed (the region on the upper side of the first movable mechanism 6100 in the descent state) is vacant in the first movement path.

Next, the second movement control by the second movement control means 6260 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, when the rotation motor 6261 is driven, the first transmission gear 6272 rotates about the axis center via the output gears 6271 meshing with each other. As the first transmission gear 6272 rotates, the eccentric shaft portion 6272a of the first transmission gear 6272 turns around the axis of the first transmission gear 6272.

The eccentric shaft portion 6272a moves in the first elongated hole 6275a of the rotating arm 6273 through which the eccentric shaft portion 6272a is inserted. Along with this, the rotating arm 6273 rotates around the rotating shaft 6274 and counterclockwise when viewed from the rear. As the rotation arm 6273 rotates, the rotation pin 6212 of the second movable mechanism 6200 moves in the second elongated hole 6276a, and the second movable mechanism 6200 moves around the rotation shaft 6211 in the rear view. It swings (rotates) clockwise. As a result, as shown in FIG. 64, the second movable mechanism 6200 swings so that the tip side (hand side) moves upward. That is, it rotates and moves in a circle from the bottom to the top in the region (second movement path) from the lower center to the upper center of the game board 17, which is the movement path of the second movable mechanism 6200. That is, the second movement path is the path of the second movable mechanism 6200 that moves as described above.

Further, as described above, in the state where the second movable mechanism 6200 is swung, as shown in FIG. 64, the rotating pin 6212 of the second movable mechanism 6200 is engaged with the bent portion 6276b of the second elongated hole 6276a. It fits. As a result, the posture of the second movable mechanism 6200 with the second movement control is maintained.

By controlling the movement as described above, after the first movement control is executed, as shown in FIG. 72, in the first movement path, the first movable mechanism 6100 returns to the region where the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed. The second movable mechanism 6200 can be moved via the movement path of 2. That is, the second movable mechanism 6200 moves so as to return while rotating in the region where the first movable mechanism 6100 has fallen (descended). In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the second movable mechanism 6200 is moved so that the hand side faces upward. As a result, the space in the center accessory 7000 can be effectively used.

Further, by controlling the movement as described above, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 72, the second movable mechanism 6200 is in a swinging state, which is one aspect of the effect state. In the rocking state, as shown in FIG. 72, the hand side of the second movable mechanism 6200 is positioned so as to face diagonally upward to the right, so that the region of the second moving path through which the second movable mechanism 6200 has passed ( The area on the lower side of the second movable mechanism 6200 in the rocking state) is vacant. Further, in this state, as shown in FIG. 72, except for the region where the second movable mechanism 6200 is located, the region through which the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed in the first movement path (the second in the swinging state). The area above the movable mechanism 6200) is also vacant. In the illustrated example, in the center accessory 7000, there is a region through which the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed on the diagonally upper left side of the second movable mechanism 6200 in the rocking state, and the second movable mechanism is on the diagonally lower right side. An example is shown in which there is a region through which the mechanism 6200 has passed.

Next, the third movement control by the third movement control means 6340 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, when the opening / closing motor 6341 is driven, the upper first arm 6354 is fronted via the output gear 6351, the first transmission gear 6352, and the second transmission gear 6353 that mesh with each other. Rotate clockwise. With the rotation of the upper first arm 6354, the shaft portion 6354c of the upper first arm 6354 moves in the elongated hole 6355b of the upper second arm 6355, and the upper second arm 6355 rotates around the rotation shaft 6355c. In addition, it rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. As a result, the index finger portion 6310 fixed to the index finger side extension portion 6355d of the upper second arm 6355 rotates so that the tip end side (fingertip side) of the index finger portion 6310 moves upward. That is, the area above the center of the game board 17 (third movement path) is moved diagonally upward from diagonally below. That is, the third movement path is the path of the index finger portion 6310 (third movable mechanism 6300) that moves as described above.

By controlling the movement as described above, after the first movement control is executed, as shown in FIG. 73, the index finger portion 6310 is placed in the region where the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed in the first movement path. Can be moved. In the above-mentioned movement control, the index finger portion 6310 is moved to a region other than the second movement path on the first movement path. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the index finger portion 6310 is moved so that the fingertip side faces upward. Further, by controlling the movement as described above, both the second movement control and the third movement control are on the region (first movement path) used for the first movable mechanism 6100 to fall (descent). Will move. As a result, the space in the center accessory 7000 can be effectively used.

Further, with the rotation of the upper first arm 6354 described above, the lower first arm 6356 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front via the gear portion 6356a meshing with the gear portion 6354a of the upper first arm 6354. Rotate. As the lower first arm 6356 rotates, the shaft portion 6356c of the lower first arm 6356 moves in the elongated hole 6357b of the lower second arm 6357, and the lower second arm 6357 rotates. It rotates clockwise around the moving shaft 6357c. As a result, the ring finger 6320 and the little finger 6330 fixed to the ring finger / little finger side extension of the lower second arm 6357 move downward with the tip side (fingertip side) of the ring finger 6320 and the little finger 6330. Rotate to do. That is, the central region (third movement path) of the game board 17 is moved from diagonally above to diagonally below. That is, the third movement path is also the path of the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 (third movable mechanism 6300).

By controlling the movement as described above, after the second movement control is executed, as shown in FIG. 73, the ring finger portion 6320 and the ring finger portion 6320 and the region through which the second movable mechanism 6200 has passed in the second movement path. The little finger portion 6330 can be moved. In the illustrated example, an example is shown in which the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 are moved so that the fingertip side faces downward. As a result, the space in the center accessory 7000 can be effectively used.

Further, in the present embodiment, the index finger portion 6310, the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 are moved and controlled by a single drive source (open / close motor 6341). Therefore, the index finger portion 6310, the ring finger portion 6320, and the little finger portion 6330 swing in conjunction with each other. Thereby, in the third movement control, the second movable mechanism 6200 is moved so that the index finger portion 6310, the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 are simultaneously opened.

By controlling the movement as described above, as shown in FIGS. 69 and 73, the third movable mechanism 6300 is in a rotating state, which is one aspect of the effect state. In the rotated state, the index finger portion 6310 is located in the space on the diagonally upper left side of the index finger portion 6310 in the rocking state. Further, in the rotated state, the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 are located diagonally to the lower right side of the ring finger portion 6320 and the little finger portion 6330 in the rocking state. As a result, as shown in FIG. 73, the movable body (first movable mechanism 6100, second movable mechanism 6200, and third movable mechanism 6300) can be moved with a large motion by effectively utilizing the space in the center accessory 7000. It can be controlled (opened and closed) and gives a visual impression (impact) to the player.

Further, when the first movable accessory unit 6000 in the effect state is set to the initial state, the movement control opposite to the above-mentioned movement control is executed.

If the opening / closing motor 6341 of the third movement control means 6340 is rotated in the direction opposite to the movement control described above, the opening / closing mechanism 6350 transmits the drive of the opening / closing motor 6341, so that the fingertip side of the index finger portion 6310 is lowered. Swing so as to move to the side (diagonally lower right side). Further, the fingertip side of the ring finger part 6320 and the little finger part 6330 swings so as to move upward (diagonally upper left side). As a result, the index finger portion 6310, the ring finger portion 6320, and the little finger portion 6330 rotate with each other so as to close.

Further, if the rotation motor 6261 of the second movement control means 6260 is rotated in the direction opposite to the movement control described above, the rotation mechanism 6270 transmits the drive of the rotation motor 6261 to the second movement control means. The movable mechanism 6200 swings so that the hand side moves downward (diagonally to the lower right).

Further, if the elevating motor 6130 of the first movement control means 6120 is rotated in the direction opposite to the above-mentioned movement control, the elevating mechanism 6140 transmits the drive of the elevating motor 6130, so that the first movable mechanism 6100 Moves (rises) upward (first movement control). In the present embodiment, the first movable mechanism 6100 is urged upward by the constant load spring 6152 of the ascending assisting member 6150, and therefore moves upward when ascending by the first movement control means 6120. Is assisted. Further, in the present embodiment, when the first movable accessory unit 6000 is set to the initial state, the lock portion 6161 of the lock member 6160 is controlled to protrude. As a result, the upper surface of the lock portion 6161 faces the lower surface of the lock receiving portion 6116 of the first movable mechanism 6100, and the drop of the first movable mechanism 6100 is restricted.

As described above, according to the first movement control (linear motion), the second movement control (swing), and the third movement control (rotation), which have different movement modes, the first movable mechanism 6100 , The movement of the second movable mechanism 6200 and the third movable mechanism 6300 can be made rich in variety, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

Further, light emission control may be executed to make the wrist portion 6220, the back of the hand portion 6230, the middle finger portion 6240, the thumb portion 6250, the index finger portion 6310, the ring finger portion 6320, and the little finger portion 6330 emit light. Hereinafter, the mode of light emission will be described by taking the middle finger portion 6240 shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 as an example.

As shown in FIG. 66, when the light emission control is executed, the light emitting means 6242a mounted on the substrate 6242 emits light. The light emitted from the light emitting means 6242a enters the light guide member 6243 arranged on the front surface side of the substrate 6242. In the figure, the light emitted by the light emitting means 6242a is shown by a two-dot chain line.

Part of the light that enters (incidents) into the light guide member 6243 and enters the light guide member 6243 is the light that passes through the light guide member 6243 and the surface of the light guide member 6243 (lens member 6244 side). It is divided into the light reflected on the surface). Further, the other part of the light entering the light guide member 6243 is totally reflected inside the light guide member 6243.

Specifically, among the light entering the light guide member 6243, the angle formed by the incident angle of the light guide member 6243 with respect to the surface (in the cross-sectional view, the incident light and the line orthogonal to the surface). ) Is smaller than a predetermined angle, the light that passes through the light guide member 6243 and emits light to the antireflection member 6241 side and the light that reflects off the surface of the light guide member 6243 and emits light to the reflection member 6241. It is divided into light and light. Further, among the light entering the light guide member 6243, the light having an incident angle larger than a predetermined angle is guided toward the surface of the light guide member 6243 while repeating total reflection inside the light guide member 6243.

Part of the light that enters (incidents) into the lens member 6244 via the light guide member 6243 and enters the lens member 6244 is the light that passes through the lens member 6244 and the surface (reverse conduction) of the lens member 6244. It is divided into light reflected on the surface on the optical member 6243 side). Further, the other part of the light entering the lens member 6244 is totally reflected inside the lens member 6244.

Specifically, among the light entering the lens member 6244, the angle of incidence of the lens member 6244 on the surface (the angle formed by the incident light and the line orthogonal to the surface in cross-sectional view) is. Lights smaller than a predetermined angle are light that passes through the lens member 6244 and emits light to the anti-light guide member 6243 side, and reflects light on the surface of the lens member 6244 to the light guide member 6243 side (reflection member 6241). It is divided into the light emitted on the side). Further, among the light entering the lens member 6244, the light having an incident angle larger than a predetermined angle is guided toward the surface of the lens member 6244 while repeating total reflection inside the lens member 6244.

Further, as described above, the light reflected by the lens member 6244 and the light guide member 6243 and emitted to the reflection member 6241 side is reflected by the reflection member 6241 and enters the lens member 6244 (light guide member 6243) again. It glows.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the light reflected by the reflecting member 6241 also enters the lens member 6244 located on the back surface side of the mounting surface of the substrate 6242, which is difficult for the light from the light emitting means 6242a to reach. It is possible to prevent uneven irradiation through the lens member 6244.

Further, in the present embodiment, when viewed in the vertical direction, the inclination angle of the inclined portion 6244a of the lens member 6244 with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle of the inclined portion 6241a of the reflective member 6241 and the inclined portion 6243a of the light guide member 6243 with respect to the horizontal plane. It's getting bigger. As a result, the inclined portion 6241a of the reflective member 6241 and the inclined portion 6243a of the light guide member 6243 have the distal end side in the extending direction close to the distal end side in the extending direction of the inclined portion 6244a of the lens member 6244. As a result, the light passing through the light guide member 6243 and the reflecting member 6241 is introduced from a position close to the tip portion of the lens member 6244 in the extending direction, which is difficult for light to reach, thereby passing through the lens member 6244. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of unevenness in the irradiation.

[Second movable accessory unit]
Hereinafter, the second movable accessory unit 8000 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 87.

The second movable accessory unit 8000 gives a visual impression (impact) to the player by emitting light at an appropriate timing. The second movable accessory unit 8000 is installed on the game board 17. The second movable accessory unit 8000 gives a visual impression to the player by controlling the emission of the accessory (movable light emitting body 8200 described later) at a position visible to the player on the game board 17. .. Further, in the present embodiment, the movable light emitting body whose light emission is controlled is moved to give a visual impression to the player by moving the accessory at an appropriate timing. Movement control of the movable light emitter 8200 is executed at a position on the game board 17 that can be visually recognized by the player. The second movable accessory unit 8000 mainly includes an elevating control means 8100 and a movable light emitting body 8200.

The movable illuminant 8200 is movement-controlled by the elevating control means 8100 described later. The movable illuminant 8200 is an accessory that imitates a sword. A detailed description of the movable illuminant 8200 will be described later.

In the present embodiment, from FIG. 74 to FIG. 78, as shown in FIG. 85, the initial state is the state in which the movement of the movable light emitter 8200 is not controlled. Further, from FIG. 79 to FIG. 81, as shown in FIG. 86, the state in which the movable light emitter 8200 is movement-controlled is set as the effect state. Note that, in FIGS. 76 to 78, 80, and 81, the cover member 8120, which will be described later, is omitted.

The elevating control means 8100 shown in FIGS. 74 to 82 controls the movement of the movable light emitting body 8200 so as to move up and down along the vertical direction on the game board 17. The elevating control means 8100 mainly includes an elevating base member 8110, a cover member 8120, a rotation guide portion 8121, an elevating motor 8130, and an elevating mechanism 8140. In the following, the configuration of the elevating control means 8100 will be described with reference to the initial state.

The elevating base member 8110 shown in FIG. 82 holds the elevating motor 8130 and the elevating mechanism 8140, which will be described later. The movable illuminant 8200 is moved and controlled up and down along the elevating base member 8110. The elevating base member 8110 is fixed to the game board 17. The elevating base member 8110 is formed in a long shape along the vertical direction. The elevating base member 8110 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. An elevating mechanism 8140, which will be described later, is arranged on the rear side of the elevating base member 8110. Further, the elevating base member 8110 mainly includes a first guide groove 8111, a second guide groove 8112, and a third guide groove 8113.

The first guide groove 8111 shown in FIG. 82 guides the movable light emitting body 8200 in the vertical direction. The first guide groove 8111 is formed so as to pass through the elevating base member 8110 in the front-rear direction. The first guide groove 8111 is formed on the upper side of the elevating base member 8110. Further, the first guide groove 8111 has a long hole shape that is long in the vertical direction.

The second guide groove 8112 guides the movable light emitter 8200 in the vertical direction. The second guide groove 8112 is formed so as to pass through the elevating base member 8110 in the front-rear direction. The second guide groove 8112 is formed on the lower side of the elevating base member 8110. Further, the second guide groove 8112 has a long hole shape that is long in the vertical direction. Further, in the present embodiment, the second guide grooves 8112 are formed in pairs with a space between the left and right sides.

The third guide groove 8113 guides the movable light emitting body 8200 in the vertical direction. The third guide groove 8113 is formed so as to penetrate the elevating base member 8110 back and forth. The third guide groove 8113 is formed in the elevating base member 8110 on the lower side of the second guide groove 8112. Further, the third guide groove 8113 has a long hole shape that is long in the vertical direction.

The cover member 8120 shown in FIG. 74 holds the elevating mechanism 8140, which will be described later, together with the elevating base member 8110. The cover member 8120 is arranged on the rear side of the elevating base member 8110. The cover member 8120 has a substantially box shape that opens forward. The cover member 8120 and the elevating base member 8110 constitute a housing for accommodating the elevating mechanism 8140.

The rotation guide portion 8121 shown in FIGS. 76 to 78 guides the rotation guide pin 8273a provided on the lever portion 8270, which will be described later. The rotation guide portion 8121 is provided on a surface facing the rear side of the cover member 8120 (not shown). As shown in FIG. 78, the rotation guide portion 8121 has a substantially box shape that opens forward and to the left. Further, the rotation guide portion 8121 mainly includes a rotation guide groove 8121a.

The rotation guide groove 8121a shown in FIGS. 77 and 78 is inserted with a rotation guide pin 8273a, which will be described later. The rotation guide groove 8121a is formed so as to penetrate the rotation guide portion 8121 back and forth. The rotation guide groove 8121a has an elongated hole shape in the vertical direction. Further, the rotation guide groove 8121a is a bent portion 8121b in which the lower end side portion is bent so as to extend diagonally to the lower right side.

The elevating motor 8130 shown in FIGS. 74 and 75 is a drive source for moving the movable light emitting body 8200. The elevating motor 8130 is fixed to a front-facing surface at the upper end of the elevating base member 8110. The output shaft 8131 of the elevating motor 8130 is provided so as to penetrate the elevating base member 8110 in the front-rear direction and project rearward (see FIG. 77).

The elevating mechanism 8140 shown in FIGS. 76 to 78 transmits the driving force generated by the elevating motor 8130 to the movable light emitting body 8200. The elevating mechanism 8140 mainly includes an output gear 8141, a first transmission gear 8142, an intermediate transmission gear 8143, a second transmission gear 8144, an urging spring 8150, and a lock member 8160.

The output gear 8141 shown in FIG. 77 takes out the driving force of the elevating motor 8130. The output gear 8141 is fixed to the rear end of the output shaft 8131 of the elevating motor 8130.

The first transmission gear 8142 is meshed with the output gear 8141. The first transmission gear 8142 is arranged substantially to the right of the output gear 8141. The first transmission gear 8142 rotates around the axis of the first transmission gear 8142. In the present embodiment, the first transmission gear 8142 is rotatably pivotally supported on a surface of the cover member 8120 facing the front side (not shown).

The intermediate transmission gear 8143 is arranged between the first transmission gear 8142 and the second transmission gear 8144, which will be described later. The intermediate transmission gear 8143 transmits the drive of the first transmission gear 8142 to the second transmission gear 8144, which will be described later. The intermediate transmission gear 8143 rotates around the axis of the intermediate transmission gear 8143. In the present embodiment, the intermediate transmission gear 8143 is rotatably pivotally supported on a surface of the cover member 8120 facing the front side (not shown). Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of intermediate transmission gears 8143 (six in the figure) are arranged. In FIG. 77, a part of the plurality of intermediate transmission gears 8143 is shown by a two-dot chain line.

The second transmission gear 8144 is meshed with the intermediate transmission gear 8143. The second transmission gear 8144 is arranged substantially to the lower right of the first transmission gear 8142. The second transmission gear 8144 meshes with the rack portion 8222 provided on the movable light emitting body 8200, which will be described later. The second transmission gear 8144 rotates around the axis of the second transmission gear 8144. In the present embodiment, the second transmission gear 8144 is rotatably pivotally supported on a surface of the cover member 8120 facing the front side (not shown).

The urging spring 8150 shown in FIG. 76 urges the movable light emitting body 8200 upward. In the present embodiment, the urging spring 8150 is a coiled tension spring. One end of the urging spring 8150 is connected to the upper side of the third guide groove 8113 in the elevating base member 8110. The other end of the urging spring 8150 is connected to a third guide pin 8242, which will be described later, provided on the movable light emitting body 8200.

The lock member 8160 shown in FIGS. 77 and 78 holds the movable light emitter 8200 in the initial state. The lock member 8160 is provided with a lock portion 8161 that protrudes to the right in the protruding state so as to be immersive. The lock member 8160 is provided on a surface facing the rear side of the elevating base member 8110. Further, the lock member 8160 is arranged at the upper left end portion of the elevating base member 8110 so that the lock portion 8161 faces to the right.

The lock member 8160 has an electric wire wound in a coil shape, and has a solenoid (not shown) which is not shown and generates a magnetic field by receiving electric power. The solenoid has a plunger (not shown) urged to project to the right by a spring member (not shown), and the plunger is connected to the lock portion 8161. The lock portion 8161 is immersive when the solenoid pulls the plunger to the left as a magnetic field is generated by energization. Further, the lock portion 8161 protrudes to the right due to the urging force of the spring member as the energization is released.

The movable light emitting body 8200 shown in FIGS. 74 to 81 is moved and controlled by the elevating control means 8100 so as to move up and down on the game board 17 in the vertical direction. The movable light emitting body 8200 mainly includes a base member 8210, a handle portion 8250, a flange portion 8260, a lever portion 8270, and a blade portion 8280.

The base member 8210 shown in FIG. 82 is provided with a handle portion 8250, a flange portion 8260, a lever portion 8270, and a blade portion 8280, which will be described later. The base member 8210 is movably connected to the elevating base member 8110 in the vertical direction. As shown in FIG. 78, the base member 8210 is arranged on the front side of the elevating base member 8110. The base member 8210 is formed in a long shape along the vertical direction. The base member 8210 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The base member 8210 mainly includes a handle portion side base portion 8220, a flange portion side base portion 8230, and a blade portion side base portion 8240.

The handle portion side base portion 8220 constitutes an upper portion of the base member 8210. A handle portion 8250, which will be described later, is installed in the handle portion side base portion 8220. The handle portion side base portion 8220 has a shape corresponding to the handle portion 8250 described later. In the present embodiment, the handle portion side base portion 8220 has a vertically long shape. The handle side base portion 8220 mainly includes a first guide pin 8221 and a rack portion 8222.

The first guide pin 8221 shown in FIG. 82 is guided along the first guide groove 8111 of the elevating base member 8110. The first guide pin 8221 is inserted into the first guide groove 8111 (not shown). The first guide pin 8221 has a substantially columnar shape. The first guide pin 8221 is arranged so that the axial direction is directed to the front-rear direction. The front end of the first guide pin 8221 is connected to a surface facing the rear of the handle side base portion 8220. Further, in the present embodiment, a pair of first guide pins 8221 are provided on the upper and lower sides.

The rack portion 8222 shown in FIGS. 77, 78 and 81 meshes with the second transmission gear 8144 on the rear side of the elevating base member 8110. The rack portion 8222 has a substantially rectangular block shape when viewed from the front. The rack portion 8222 is connected to the rear end portion of the first guide pin 8221. That is, the rack portion 8222 is connected to the handle portion side base portion 8220 via the first guide pin 8221. In the present embodiment, a pair of first guide pins 8221 are connected to the rack portion 8222 at the top and bottom. Further, the rack portion 8222 mainly includes a tooth portion 8222a and a lock receiving portion 8222b.

The tooth portion 8222a is a portion that meshes with the second transmission gear 8144. The tooth portion 8222a is arranged on the right side of the second transmission gear 8144. The tooth portions 8222a are formed above and below the rack portion 8222.

The lock receiving portion 8222b shown in FIGS. 77 and 78 receives the lock portion 8161 of the lock member 8160. The lock receiving portion 8222b is formed on the left side of the rack portion 8222 at a position facing the lock portion 8161. The lock receiving portion 8222b is formed in a concave shape that opens in the front-rear direction and to the left. As shown in FIG. 77, in a state where the lock receiving portion 8222b receives the lock portion 8161, the fall of the movable light emitting body 8200 is restricted.

The flange side base portion 8230 shown in FIG. 82 constitutes a vertical intermediate portion of the base member 8210. A collar portion 8260, which will be described later, is installed in the collar portion side base portion 8230. The flange side base portion 8230 has a shape corresponding to the flange portion 8260 described later. In the present embodiment, the flange side base portion 8230 has a shape wider in the left-right direction than the handle portion side base portion 8220. The collar side base portion 8230 mainly includes a shaft hole 8231 and a boss portion 8232.

The shaft hole 8231 is inserted with the rotating shaft 8272 of the lever portion 8270, which will be described later. The shaft hole 8231 is formed so as to penetrate the left side portion of the flange portion side base portion 8230 in the front-rear direction.

The boss portion 8232 shown in FIG. 78 is formed so as to protrude from the surface of the flange portion side base portion 8230 facing the rear side of the left side portion. The boss portion 8232 has a cylindrical tubular shape. In the present embodiment, the shaft hole 8231 is formed so as to penetrate the boss portion 8232 back and forth.

The blade portion side base portion 8240 constitutes a lower portion of the base member 8210. A blade portion 8280, which will be described later, is installed in the blade portion side base portion 8240. The blade portion side base portion 8240 has a shape corresponding to the blade portion 8280 described later. In the present embodiment, the blade side base portion 8240 is wider in the left-right direction than the flange side base portion 8230, and has a vertically long shape.

In the present embodiment, the blade portion side base portion 8240 constitutes a reflective member that reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means 8281a described later. A detailed description of the blade portion side base portion 8240 as a reflective member will be described later. The blade portion side base portion 8240 mainly includes a second guide pin 8241 and a third guide pin 8242.

The second guide pin 8241 shown in FIGS. 76, 78 and 82 is inserted into the second guide groove 8112 of the elevating base member 8110 and guided along the second guide groove 8112. The second guide pin 8241 has a substantially columnar shape. The second guide pin 8241 is arranged so that the axial direction is directed to the front-rear direction. The front end of the second guide pin 8241 is connected to a surface facing the rear of the blade side base portion 8240. Further, in the present embodiment, the second guide pins 8241 are formed in pairs with a space left and right so as to correspond to the pair of second guide grooves 8112. In the present embodiment, the second guide pin 8241 has a substantially cylindrical bush having a flange portion having a flange portion having an outer diameter larger than the groove width of the second guide groove 8112 so as to prevent the second guide pin 8121 from coming off. , Fixed to the rear end (see FIG. 78).

The third guide pin 8242 shown in FIGS. 76 and 82 is inserted into the third guide groove 8113 of the elevating base member 8110 and guided along the third guide groove 8113. The third guide pin 8242 has a substantially columnar shape. The third guide pin 8242 is arranged so that the axial direction is directed to the front-rear direction. The front end of the third guide pin 8242 is connected to a surface facing the rear of the blade side base portion 8240. Further, in the present embodiment, the third guide pin 8242 is connected to the other end side of the urging spring 8150 (see FIG. 76).

The handle portion 8250 shown in FIGS. 74 and 75 is fixed so as to cover the handle portion side base portion 8220. The handle 8250 is shaped to imitate the handle of a sword.

The collar portion 8260 is fixed so as to cover the collar portion side base portion 8230. The brim 8260 has a shape that imitates the brim of a sword.

The lever portion 8270 shown in FIGS. 74 to 81 is connected to the flange side base portion 8230 and rotates with respect to the flange side base portion 8230. The lever portion 8270 mainly includes a lever body 8721, a rotation shaft 8272, and an arm 8273.

The lever body 8271 is a member that extends diagonally to the upper left from the flange side base portion 8230 side. The lever main body 8271 is arranged on the surface side facing the front of the flange side base portion 8230. The lever portion 8270 has a shape that imitates a lever installed on a handlebar, such as a clutch lever or a brake lever of a motorcycle.

The rotation shaft 8272 shown in FIGS. 77 and 78 is a shaft connected to the lever body 8721. The front end of the rotating shaft 8272 is connected to the base end side (flange side base portion 8230 side) of the lever body 8721. The rotation shaft 8272 has a substantially columnar shape. The rotation shaft 8272 is arranged so that the axial direction is directed in the front-rear direction. The rotating shaft 8272 is inserted into a shaft hole 8231 (see FIG. 82) formed in the boss portion 8232 of the flange portion side base portion 8230. By inserting the rotating shaft 8272 into the shaft hole 8231, the lever portion 8270 is pivotally supported with respect to the flange portion side base portion 8230.

The arm 8273 shown in FIG. 77 is a member extending diagonally to the upper right from the flange side base portion 8230 side. Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the arm 8273 has a base end side (flange side base portion 8230 side) connected to the rear end portion of the rotation shaft 8272. In the present embodiment, the arm 8273 is arranged on the tip side of the boss portion 8232 of the flange portion side base portion 8230 in the protruding direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the arm 8273 is arranged so that the tip portion in the extending direction is received in the rotation guide portion 8121 through the opening facing the left side of the rotation guide portion 8121. Further, the arm 8273 mainly includes a rotation guide pin 8273a.

The rotation guide pin 8273a is inserted into the rotation guide groove 8121a side of the elevating base member 8110. The rotation guide pin 8273a has a substantially columnar shape. The rotation guide pin 8273a is arranged so that the axial direction is directed to the front-rear direction. The front end of the rotation guide pin 8273a is connected to the extension direction tip of the arm 8273. In the present embodiment, the rotation guide pin 8273a has a substantially cylindrical bush having a flange portion having a flange portion having an outer diameter larger than the groove width of the rotation guide groove 8121a so as to prevent the rotation guide groove 8121a from coming off. , Fixed to the rear end (see FIG. 78).

The blade portion 8280 shown in FIGS. 74, 75, 83, 84 and 87 is fixed so as to cover the blade portion side base portion 8240. The blade portion 8280 is equipped with a light emitting means 8281a described later, and functions as a light emitting unit that emits light when light emission control is executed. The blade portion 8280 is shaped to imitate the blade of a sword. The blade portion 8280 mainly includes a substrate 8281, a light guide member 8282, a lens member 8283, and a cover member 8284. Note that FIG. 87 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 84, schematically showing the blade portion 8280.

The substrate 8281 shown in FIGS. 82 to 84 is for mounting electronic components (functional components). The substrate 8281 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The front surface of the substrate 8281 is a mounting surface on which the light emitting means 8281a described later is mounted. The substrate 8281 is mounted on the front-facing surface side of the blade-side base portion 8240.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the substrate 8281 has substantially the same shape as the blade side base portion 8240 in front view, and has a smaller area than the blade side base portion 8240. Is formed in.

The light emitting means 8281a shown in FIG. 87 irradiates light as a light source. The light emitting means 8281a is mounted on a mounting surface which is a surface facing the front of the substrate 8281. A plurality of light emitting means 8281a are arranged at intervals on the mounting surface of the substrate 8281. Various configurations can be adopted for the light emitting means 8281a. For example, the light emitting means 8281a may be an LED.

The light guide member 8282 guides the light emitted from the light emitting means 8281a. The light guide member 8282 is formed of a transmissive member. The light guide member 8282 is formed in a substantially plate shape with the plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The light guide member 8822 is arranged so as to cover the mounting surface side of the substrate 8281, and guides the light introduced from the light emitting means 8281a toward the plate surface inside the light guide member 8582 to the outside of the light guide member 8582. Derived.

As shown in FIG. 82, in the present embodiment, the light guide member 8282 has a shape substantially corresponding to the front view and the substrate 8281. Further, as shown in FIG. 84, in the present embodiment, the left end portion of the light guide member 8282 has an inclined surface shape facing diagonally forward to the left. Further, the left end portion of the light guide member 8282 has an inclined surface shape along the back surface of the lens member 8283, which will be described later.

The lens member 8283 covers a part of the blade portion side base portion 8240, the substrate 8281, and the light guide member 8382. The lens member 8283 is formed of a transmissive member. The lens member 8283 diffuses the light derived from the light guide member 8282. In the present embodiment, the lens member 8283 is arranged so as to cover the left end portion of the blade portion side base portion 8240, the substrate 8281, and the light guide member 8182.

As shown in FIG. 84, the lens member 8283 is located on the outer side (left side) of the outer end portion (left end portion) of the substrate 8281 from the position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a on the substrate 8281. It has been extended. The lens member 8283 extends to the rear side (position beyond the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a on the substrate 8281) from the surface facing the rear of the substrate 8281. In the present embodiment, the lens member 8283 is formed in a substantially plate shape in which the surface (the surface on the anti-light guide member 8182 side) is arranged so as to face diagonally forward to the left. In the present embodiment, the lens member 8283 is arranged so that the left end portion of the lens member 8283 is located outside the left end portion of the substrate 8281.

Further, in the present embodiment, the blade portion side base portion 8240 (base member 8210) is formed of a reflective member capable of reflecting light. The blade portion side base portion 8240 reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means 8281a, the light guide member 8182, and the lens member 8283.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the present embodiment, the blade portion side base portion 8240 is extended so as to be located on the outer side (left side) of the outer end portion (left end portion) of the substrate 8281. Further, the blade portion side base portion 8240 is on the rear side (position beyond the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a on the substrate 8281) with respect to the surface facing the rear side of the substrate 8281, and reflects the light emitted from the lens member 8283. It is installed in a possible position. In the present embodiment, the surface facing the front side of the left side portion of the blade portion side base portion 8240 is the left side of the lens member 8283 so that the light emitted from the end portion (left end portion) of the lens member 8283 can be reflected. It is provided at a position facing the surface facing the rear side of the side portion. Further, in the present embodiment, the left end portion of the blade portion side base portion 8240 is an inclined surface facing diagonally forward to the left. Further, the left end portion of the blade portion side base portion 8240 has an inclined surface shape along the back surface of the lens member 8283.

The cover member 8284 shown in FIGS. 74, 75, 76 and 77 covers a part of the blade side base portion 8240, the substrate 8281 and the light guide member 828 together with the lens member 8283. In the present embodiment, the cover member 8284 is arranged so as to cover the blade portion side base portion 8240, the substrate 8281, and the light guide member 8282, except for the portion where the lens member 8283 is arranged. The cover member 8284 is formed of an impermeable member. Further, in the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the cover member 8284 is shaped like a flame. Further, the cover member 8284 mainly includes a translucent portion 8284a.

The translucent portion 8284a is formed of a transmissive member. The translucent portion 8284a is arranged at the center of the cover member 8284 in the left-right direction. The translucent portion 8284a may be made of the same material as the lens member 8283.

Further, not only the blade portion 8280 described above, but also the handle portion 8250 and the collar portion 8260 may function as light emitting portions. In this case, the handle portion 8250 and the flange portion 8260 may be provided with a substrate, a light emitting means, a light guide member, a lens member, and a cover member, similarly to the blade portion side base portion 8240.

Hereinafter, the movement control of the second movable accessory unit 8000 configured as described above will be described. In the following, the movement control in which the movable light emitting body 8200 in the initial state is set to the effect state will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 85 and 86, the second movable accessory unit 8000 is located on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 in front view. In the initial state shown in FIG. 75, the movable light emitter 8200 is located above the elevating base member 8110. Further, as shown in FIG. 85, in the initial state, in the movable illuminant 8200, the upper portion of the handle portion 8250 and the lever portion 8270 is hidden behind the upper portion (decorative member 56) of the center accessory 7000, and the player It is said that it is difficult to see from.

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 81, when the elevating motor 8130 of the elevating control means 8100 is driven, the second transmission gear is interposed via the output gear 8141, the first transmission gear 8142, and the intermediate transmission gear 8143 that mesh with each other. The 8144 rotates about the axis and counterclockwise when viewed from the rear.

The rotation of the second transmission gear 8144 is transmitted to the rack portion 8222 that meshes with the second transmission gear 8144. The rack portion 8222 is fed downward as the second transmission gear 8144 rotates. The movable illuminant 8200 to which the rack portion 8222 is connected moves (descends) downward while being guided along the first guide groove 8111, the second guide groove 8112, and the third guide groove 8113 of the elevating base member 8110. ..

In the present embodiment, the restriction on the downward movement of the movable illuminant 8200 by the lock member 8160 is released during the movement control. The lock member 8160 is controlled so as to immerse the lock portion 8161 during the movement control. As a result, the restriction on the lock portion 8161 with respect to the lock receiving portion 8222b provided on the movable light emitting body 8200 is released, and the movable light emitting body 8200 can be moved downward. Further, in the present embodiment, during the movement control, the movable light emitting body 8200 moves downward against the upward urging force of the urging spring 8150.

Further, as the movable light emitting body 8200 moves downward with respect to the elevating base member 8110, the rotation guide pin 8273a provided on the lever portion 8270 moves downward along the rotation guide groove 8121a of the elevating base member 8110. Move to the side. As the movable illuminant 8200 moves downward, the rotation guide pin 8273a is guided to the bent portion 8121b of the rotation guide groove 8121a. As a result, the lever portion 8270 rotates around the rotation shaft 8272 and counterclockwise when viewed from the rear. As a result, the lever body 8721 of the lever portion 8270 moves so that the tip end side is close to the handle portion 8250 side.

By controlling the movement as described above, the movable illuminant 8200 is in the effect state. As shown in FIG. 79, in the effect state, the movable light emitting body 8200 is located on the lower side with respect to the elevating base member 8110. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, in the effect state, the entire lever portion 8270 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 16.

Further, when the movable illuminant 8200 in the effect state is set to the initial state, the movement control opposite to the above-mentioned movement control is executed. When the elevating motor 8130 is rotated in the direction opposite to the above-mentioned movement control, the elevating mechanism 8140 transmits the drive of the elevating motor 8130, so that the movable illuminant 8200 moves (ascends) upward. In the present embodiment, since the movable light emitting body 8200 is urged upward by the urging spring 8150, the movable illuminant 8200 is assisted in moving upward when ascending. Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable light emitting body 8200 is set to the initial state, the lock portion 8161 of the lock member 8160 is controlled to protrude. As a result, the lock receiving portion 8222b of the movable illuminant 8200 receives the lock portion 8161 to prevent the movable illuminant 8200 from falling.

As described above, the movable illuminant 8200 can be visually recognized by the player to improve the playability.

Further, in the following, the light emission control of the second movable accessory unit 8000 configured as described above will be described.

As shown in FIG. 87, when the light emission control is executed, the light emitting means 8281a mounted on the substrate 8281 emits light. The light emitted from the light emitting means 8281a enters the light guide member 8828 arranged on the front surface side of the substrate 8281. In the illustrated example, the light emitted by the light emitting means 8281a is shown by a two-dot chain line.

Part of the light that enters (incidents) into the light guide member 8822 and enters the light guide member 8582 is the light that passes through the light guide member 828 and the surface of the light guide member 8582 (lens member 8283 side). It is divided into the light reflected on the surface). Further, the other part of the light entering the light guide member 8482 is totally reflected inside the light guide member 8582.

Specifically, among the light entering the light guide member 8482, the angle formed by the incident angle of the light guide member 8828 with respect to the surface (in the cross-sectional view, the incident light and the line orthogonal to the surface). ) Is smaller than a predetermined angle, the light transmitted through the light guide member 8282 and emitted to the base portion 8240 on the anti-sword portion side and reflected on the surface of the light guide member 8482 to be reflected on the blade portion side. It is divided into the light emitted to the base portion 8240 side and the light emitted. Further, among the light entering the light guide member 8482, the light whose incident angle is larger than a predetermined angle is guided toward the surface direction of the light guide member 8582 while repeating total reflection inside the light guide member 8282.

Part of the light that enters (incidents) into the lens member 8283 via the light guide member 8828 and enters the lens member 8283 is the light that passes through the lens member 8283 and the surface (reverse conduction) of the lens member 8283. It is divided into light reflected on the surface on the side of the optical member 8282). Further, the other part of the light entering the lens member 8283 is totally reflected inside the lens member 8283.

Specifically, among the light entering the lens member 8283, the angle of incidence of the lens member 8283 on the surface (the angle formed by the incident light and the line orthogonal to the surface in cross-sectional view) is. Light smaller than a predetermined angle is the light that passes through the lens member 8283 and emits light to the anti-light guide member 8382 side and is reflected off the surface of the lens member 8283 to the light guide member 8282 side (sword blade side). It is divided into the light emitted from the base portion 8240 side) and the light emitted. Further, among the light entering the lens member 8283, the light having an incident angle larger than a predetermined angle is guided toward the surface of the lens member 8283 while repeating total reflection inside the lens member 8283.

Further, as described above, the light reflected by the lens member 8283 and the light guide member 8828 and emitted to the blade portion side base portion 8240 (reflection member) side is reflected by the blade portion side base portion 8240 and is again lensed. Light enters the member 8283 (light guide member 8282).

With the above configuration, the blade side base portion 8240 formed of the reflective member capable of reflecting light is provided at a position where the light emitted from the end portion of the lens member 8283 can be reflected. The light reflected by the blade side base portion 8240 can also enter the lens member 8283 located on the back surface side of the mounting surface of the substrate 8281, which is difficult for the light from the light emitting means 8281a to reach, and the lens member 8283 can receive the light. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of unevenness in the irradiation through the lens.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lens member 8283 is arranged so that the surface faces diagonally forward. As a result, the light from the lens member 8283 can be emitted to the front side facing the player.

As the light emission control described above, various light emission modes can be adopted. For example, the light emitting means 8281a may be appropriately turned on or blinked to emit light in a predetermined pattern.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, as in the second embodiment shown in FIG. 88, the outer end portion (left end portion) of the blade portion side base portion 8240 (base member 8210) is set closer to the outer end portion (left end portion) of the lens member 8283. It may be formed so as to be located on the outside (left side). Further, the surface of the left end portion of the lens member 8283 facing the rear side faces the surface facing the front side of the blade portion side base portion 8240 with a gap.

Also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the light emitted by the light emitting means 8281a enters the lens member 8283 via the anti-light guide member 8282. In the illustrated example, the light emitted by the light emitting means 8281a is shown by a two-dot chain line. A part of the light entering the lens member 8283 is divided into light that passes through the lens member 8283 and is reflected on the surface of the lens member 8283 (the surface on the anti-light guide member 8482 side). Further, the other part of the light entering the lens member 8283 is totally reflected inside the lens member 8283.

In the present embodiment, the light guided toward the surface of the lens member 8283 while repeating total internal reflection inside the lens member 8283 is from the front end surface (the surface facing the rear side at the left end portion) of the lens member 8283. , It emits light toward the rear.

The light emitted rearward from the tip surface of the lens member 8283 is reflected by the surface facing the front side at the left end portion of the blade portion side base portion 8240 to the lens member 8283 side and enters the lens member 8283 again. ..

Even in the gaming machine configured as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of unevenness in the irradiation via the lens member 8283. Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitted from the tip surface of the lens member 8283 toward the rear can be reflected by the surface facing the front side at the left end portion of the blade portion side base portion 8240. As a result, the light emitted from the front end surface of the lens member 8283 toward the rear can be reflected toward the front side facing the player, and the light can be irradiated through the lens member 8283.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable illuminant 8200 is controlled to be movable up and down, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. Various directions can be adopted for the movable control of the movable light emitter 8200.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable light emitting body 8200 has a shape imitating a sword, but the shape is not limited to such a mode, and various shapes can be adopted.

For example, as in the third embodiment shown in FIGS. 89 to 91, the movable illuminant 8900 may constitute an accessory that imitates an arm with a hand and a wrist. In the movable light emitting body 8900, the movement control is executed by the movement control means, and the light emission control is executed by the light emission control means. In this embodiment, the movable illuminant 8900 includes a finger portion 8910. The movable illuminant 8900 is provided with five fingers having a common configuration. Hereinafter, one finger portion 8910 will be described as an example.

The finger portion 8910 mainly includes a base member 8920, a substrate 8930, a light guide member 8940, a lens member 8950, and a cover member 8960.

The substrate 8930 shown in FIGS. 90 and 91 is mounted with the light emitting means 8931 in substantially the same manner as the substrate 8281 described above. The substrate 8930 is arranged on a base member 8920 described later. Further, the light emitting means 8931 irradiates light as a light source, substantially similar to the above-mentioned light emitting means 8281a.

The base member 8920 is formed of a reflective member capable of reflecting light, substantially similar to the blade portion side base portion 8240 described above. The base member 8920 is provided so as to be located on the outer side (anti-boardboard 8930 side) of the outer end portion (fingertip side end portion) of the substrate 8930 from the position of covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931 on the substrate 8930. .. Further, the base member 8920 is provided at a position on the substrate 8930 on the front side (position beyond the back surface of the mounting surface) in the direction in which the back surface faces the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931. In the present embodiment, the base member 8920 is an inclined portion 8921 in which the fingertip side end portion is inclined toward the front side and the back surface of the mounting surface is directed toward the front side.

The light guide member 8940 guides the light emitted from the light emitting means 8931, substantially similar to the light guide member 8482 described above. The light guide member 8940 is provided so as to be located on the outer side (anti-boardboard 8930 side) of the outer end portion (fingertip side end portion) of the substrate 8930 from the position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931 on the substrate 8930. There is. Further, the light guide member 8940 is provided at a position on the substrate 8930 on the front side (position beyond the back surface of the mounting surface) in the direction in which the back surface faces the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931. In the present embodiment, the light guide member 8940 is an inclined portion 8941 in which the fingertip side end portion is inclined toward the front side and the back surface of the mounting surface is directed toward the front side.

The lens member 8950 is provided so as to be located on the outer side (anti-boardboard 8930 side) of the end portion (fingertip side end portion) of the substrate 8930 from the position of covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931 on the substrate 8930. Further, the lens member 8950 is extended so as to be inclined from the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931 on the substrate 8930 to a position on the front side in the direction in which the back surface faces (a position beyond the back surface of the mounting surface). In the present embodiment, the lens member 8950 is an inclined portion 8951 in which the end portion on the fingertip side (the portion surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 91) is inclined toward the front side and the back surface of the mounting surface faces. ing.

The inclined portion 8951 of the lens member 8950 is extended so as to be inclined in a manner different from the inclined portion 8921 of the base member 8920 and the inclined portion 8941 of the light guide member 8940. In the present embodiment, the tilt angle of the tilted portion 8951 of the lens member 8950 with respect to the horizontal plane is made larger than the tilt angle of the tilted portion 8921 of the base member 8920 and the tilted portion 8941 of the light guide member 8940 with respect to the horizontal plane. As a result, the inclined portion 8921 of the base member 8920 and the inclined portion 8941 of the light guide member 8940 are arranged so that the tip end side in the extension direction is close to the tip end side in the extension direction of the lens member 8950.

The cover member 8960 is arranged so as to cover the light guide member 8940 together with the lens member 8950, substantially similar to the cover member 8284 described above. The cover member 8960 is formed of an impermeable member.

Hereinafter, the light emission control of the second movable accessory unit 8000 (movable light emitting body 8900) configured as described above will be described.

As shown in FIG. 91, when the light emission control is executed, the light emitting means 8931 mounted on the substrate 8930 emits light. The light emitted from the light emitting means 8931 enters the light guide member 8940 arranged on the front surface side of the substrate 8930. In the illustrated example, the light emitted by the light emitting means 8931 is shown by a two-dot chain line.

Part of the light that enters (incidents) into the light guide member 8940 and enters the light guide member 8940 is the light that passes through the light guide member 8940 and the surface of the light guide member 8940 (lens member 8950 side). It is divided into the light reflected on the surface). Further, the other part of the light entering the light guide member 8940 is totally reflected inside the light guide member 8940.

Specifically, among the light entering the light guide member 8940, the angle formed by the incident angle of the light guide member 8940 with respect to the surface (in the cross-sectional view, the incident light and the line orthogonal to the surface). ) Is smaller than a predetermined angle, the light that passes through the light guide member 8940 and emits light to the anti-base member 8920 side and the light that reflects off the surface of the light guide member 8940 and emits light to the base member 8920 side. It is divided into light and light. Further, among the light entering the light guide member 8940, the light whose incident angle is larger than a predetermined angle is guided toward the surface direction of the light guide member 8940 while repeating total reflection inside the light guide member 8940.

Part of the light that enters (incidents) into the lens member 8950 via the light guide member 8940 and enters the lens member 8950 is the light that passes through the lens member 8950 and the surface (reverse conduction) of the lens member 8950. It is divided into light reflected on the surface on the optical member 8940 side). Further, the other part of the light entering the lens member 8950 is totally reflected inside the lens member 8950.

Specifically, among the light entering the lens member 8950, the angle of incidence of the lens member 8950 on the surface (the angle formed by the incident light and the line orthogonal to the surface in cross-sectional view) is. Lights smaller than a predetermined angle are light that passes through the lens member 8950 and emits light to the anti-light guide member 8940 side, and reflects light on the surface of the lens member 8950 to the light guide member 8940 side (base member 8920). It is divided into the light emitted on the side). Further, among the light entering the lens member 8950, the light having an incident angle larger than a predetermined angle is guided toward the surface of the lens member 8950 while repeating total reflection inside the lens member 8950.

Further, as described above, the light reflected by the lens member 8950 and the light guide member 8940 and emitted to the base member 8920 side is reflected by the base member 8920 and enters the lens member 8950 (light guide member 8940) again. It glows.

Further, in the present embodiment, in cross-sectional view, the tilt angle of the tilted portion 8951 of the lens member 8950 with respect to the horizontal plane is made larger than the tilt angle of the tilted portion 8921 of the base member 8920 and the tilted portion 8941 of the light guide member 8940 with respect to the horizontal plane. There is. As a result, the inclined portion 8921 of the base member 8920 and the inclined portion 8941 of the light guide member 8940 have the distal end side in the extending direction close to the distal end side in the extending direction of the inclined portion 8950 of the lens member 8950. As a result, the light passing through the light guide member 8940 and the base member 8920 is introduced from a position close to the tip portion of the lens member 8950 in the extending direction, which is difficult for light to reach, thereby passing through the lens member 8950. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of unevenness in the irradiation.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, the technique of a gaming machine provided with an effect device for operating an accessory is known (see JP-A-2015-47429).

The gaming machine described in the above-mentioned publication has a front movable effect accessory supported by a slide bar connected to a single drive source, and a first movable object that can rotate a predetermined angle in conjunction with the movement of the front movable effect object. A gaming machine equipped with a movable effect and a game machine is disclosed.

However, in such a gaming machine, the second movable body (first movable effect character) moves in conjunction with the movement of the first movable body (front movable effect character), which is not interesting. ..

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a player.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A gaming machine equipped with a first movable accessory unit 6000 capable of moving a movable body in a position visible to the player.
The first movable accessory unit 6000 is
A first movable mechanism 6100 (first movable mechanism) for driving the movable body, a second movable mechanism 6200 (second movable mechanism) different from the first movable mechanism 6100, the first movable mechanism 6100, and the like. A third movable mechanism 6300 (third movable mechanism) different from the second movable mechanism 6200 is included.
At least a part of the movable body
The first movement control in which the movement is controlled in the direction opposite to the first direction after moving in the first direction and the first direction via the first movement path by the first movable mechanism 6100. When,
After the first movement control is executed in the first direction, the second movable mechanism 6200 moves to at least a part of the region on the first movement path in a movement mode different from that of the first movement control. The second movement control, which is controlled to move via the second movement path so as to return,
After the second movement control is executed, the third movement control is controlled by the third movable mechanism 6300 in a movement mode different from that of the first movement control and the second movement control.
Is feasible.

With such a configuration, the interest of the player can be enhanced. That is, by moving the first movable mechanism 6100, the second movable mechanism 6200, and the third movable mechanism 6300 by the first movement control, the second movement control, and the third movement control, which are different movement modes. , The movement of the movable body can be made rich in variety, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

Further, in the state where the first movable mechanism 6100 is moved downward by the first movement control, the area through which the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed is vacant in the first movement path. In the second movement control and the third movement control, the second movable mechanism 6200 and the third movable mechanism 6300 can be moved upward to the area where the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed, and the inside of the gaming machine can be moved. Space can be used effectively.

Further, in the state where the second movable mechanism 6200 is moved upward by the second movement control, the area through which the second movable mechanism 6200 has passed is vacant in the second movement path. In the third movement control, after the second movement control is executed, the third movable mechanism 6300 can be moved downward to the area where the second movable mechanism 6200 has passed, and the space in the gaming machine can be moved. Can be used effectively.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A gaming machine equipped with a first movable accessory unit 6000 capable of moving a movable body in a position visible to the player.
The first movable accessory unit 6000 is
A first movable mechanism 6100 (first movable mechanism) for driving the movable body, a second movable mechanism 6200 (second movable mechanism) different from the first movable mechanism 6100, the first movable mechanism 6100, and the like. A third movable mechanism 6300 (third movable mechanism) different from the second movable mechanism 6200 is included.
At least a part of the movable body
The first movement control in which the movement is controlled in the direction opposite to the first direction after moving in the first direction and the first direction via the first movement path by the first movable mechanism 6100. When,
After the first movement control is executed in the first direction, the second movable mechanism 6200 moves to at least a part of the region on the first movement path in a movement mode different from that of the first movement control. The second movement control, which is controlled to move via the second movement path so as to return,
After the second movement control is executed, the third movement control, in which the movement is controlled on the first movement path by the third movable mechanism 6300,
Is feasible.

With such a configuration, the interest of the player can be enhanced. That is, by moving the first movable mechanism 6100, the second movable mechanism 6200, and the third movable mechanism 6300 by the first movement control, the second movement control, and the third movement control, which are different movement modes. , The movement of the movable body can be made rich in variety, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

Further, in the state where the second movable mechanism 6200 is moved upward by the second movement control, the area through which the second movable mechanism 6200 has passed is vacant in the second movement path. In the third movement control, after the second movement control is executed, the third movable mechanism 6300 can be moved downward to the area where the second movable mechanism 6200 has passed, and the space in the gaming machine can be moved. Can be used effectively.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A gaming machine equipped with a first movable accessory unit 6000 capable of moving a movable body in a position visible to the player.
The first movable accessory unit 6000 is
The first movable mechanism 6100 (first movable mechanism) for driving the movable body, the second movable mechanism 6200 (second movable mechanism) different from the first movable mechanism 6100, the first movable mechanism 6100 and the said A third movable mechanism 6300 (third movable mechanism) different from the second movable mechanism 6200 is included.
At least a part of the movable body
The first movement control in which the movement is controlled in the direction opposite to the first direction after moving in the first direction and the first direction via the first movement path by the first movable mechanism 6100. When,
After the first movement control is executed in the first direction, the second movable mechanism 6200 moves to at least a part of the region on the first movement path in a movement mode different from that of the first movement control. The second movement control, which is controlled to move via the second movement path so as to return,
After the second movement control is executed, the movement is controlled by the third movable mechanism 6300 to a region other than the second movement path on the first movement path and by the second movement control. 3 movement control and
Is feasible.

With such a configuration, the interest of the player can be enhanced. That is, by moving the first movable mechanism 6100, the second movable mechanism 6200, and the third movable mechanism 6300 by the first movement control, the second movement control, and the third movement control, which have different movement modes. The movement of the movable body can be made rich in variety, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

Further, in the state where the first movable mechanism 6100 is moved downward by the first movement control, the area through which the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed is vacant in the first movement path. In the second movement control and the third movement control, the second movable mechanism 6200 and the third movable mechanism 6300 can be moved upward to the area where the first movable mechanism 6100 has passed, and the inside of the gaming machine can be moved. Space can be used effectively.

The first movable mechanism 6100 is a form of the first movable mechanism.
Further, the second movable mechanism 6200 is a form of the second movable mechanism.
Further, the third movable mechanism 6300 is a form of the third movable mechanism.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the embodiment, the movable body imitates an arm provided with a hand and a wrist, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and various shapes can be adopted.

Further, the first movement control, the second movement control and the third movement control are not limited to the above-described embodiments. For example, the order of each movement control may be changed as appropriate. Further, each movement control may be repeated as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, the first direction is downward, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. Various directions can be adopted as the first direction.

Further, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a game ball distribution device capable of distributing a game ball flowing down a game area to a first passage and a second passage different from the first passage is provided. The technique is known (see JP-A-2006-130126).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a technique for distributing a flowing game ball into a first slope and a second slope on a center accessory by a movable piece that moves to a retracted position and an appearance position according to the expansion and contraction of the plunger of the solenoid. Has been done. In this way, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine, if the movable piece is driven frequently for a long time, the spring that returns to the retracted position deteriorates when the power is off, and the spring cannot return to the retracted position properly. Problems such as the contact surface being scraped and rattling, the dust generated by the scraping of the member solidifying and the plunger not expanding and contracting well, and the dust generated by the rubbing of the movable piece and the passage member solidifying and not working properly. was there.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the occurrence of malfunctions in the operation of movable pieces.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A game board 17 having a game area 20 in which a game ball flows down, and
A game ball distribution device 7200 capable of distributing a game ball flowing down the game area 20 to a first passage (advantageous course) and a second passage (disadvantageous course) different from the first passage.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game ball distribution device 7200 is
A movable piece 7220 (game ball distribution member) that can be moved to a first position that guides the game ball to the first passage and a second position that guides the game ball to the second passage.
An electric driving means (flapper 7230, metal piece 7240 and solenoid 7250) capable of moving the movable piece 7220, and
Connecting means (long hole 7222a and protrusion 7231) for connecting the movable piece 7220 and the electric driving means, and
Including
The electric drive means is
When the flapper 7230 (driving unit) connected to the connecting means is in the first state in which the movable piece 7220 is in the first position in the energized state, and is in the non-energized state in the first state. The movable piece 7220 is characterized in that it shifts to the second state, which is the second position, by its own weight.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the occurrence of a malfunction in the operation of the movable piece.

Specifically, the drive unit (flapper 7230) is configured to move to a position where the movable piece closes the communication hole by its own weight. Therefore, a spring for moving the drive unit to the position is not required. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the spring deteriorates and cannot return to the retracted position properly.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A game board 17 having a game area 20 in which a game ball flows down, and
The game ball flowing down the game area 20 is distributed to a first passage (advantageous course) and a second passage (disadvantageous course) different from the first passage via the upper passage 7030 (guide passage). Possible game ball distribution device 7200 and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The upper passage 7030 is
A communication hole 7031 that communicates with the first passage is provided.
The game ball distribution device 7200 is
A movable piece 7220 (game ball distribution member) provided so as to be swingable around an axis (first pin 7211) provided at a position separated from the upper passage 7030, and
An electric driving means (flapper 7230, metal piece 7240 and solenoid 7250) capable of moving the movable piece 7220, and
Including
The movable piece 7220 is
By swinging downward, the communication hole 7031 is opened away from the communication hole 7031, and by opening the communication hole 7031, the game ball is guided to the first passage, and the game ball is shaken upward. By moving, the communication hole 7031 is closed in the vicinity of the communication hole 7031, and by closing the communication hole 7031, the game ball is movably formed to a second position for guiding the game ball to the second passage. At the same time, even when it moves to the second position, it is kept in a non-contact state with the first passage, and can be moved from the first position to the second position by the weight of the movable piece 7220. It is characterized by being.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the occurrence of a malfunction in the operation of the movable piece.

Specifically, since the swing shaft (first pin 7211) of the movable piece 7220 is provided apart from the upper passage 7030, the swing shaft (first pin 7211) and the upper passage 7030 are separated from each other. Does not slide. Further, the movable piece 7220 is configured to close or open the communication hole 7031 by approaching or separating from the communication hole 7031 of the upper passage 7030 instead of sliding. Therefore, the movable piece 7220 and the upper passage 7030 do not slide. As described above, since the number of sliding portions is very small, it is possible to prevent dust from being generated due to scraping of the member due to sliding, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunction of the movable piece.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A game board 17 having a game area 20 in which a game ball flows down, and
A game ball distribution device 7200 capable of distributing a game ball flowing down the game area 20 to a first passage (advantageous course) and a second passage (disadvantageous course) different from the first passage.
The main control circuit 100 (control unit) that controls the game ball distribution device 7200, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game ball distribution device 7200 is
A movable piece 7220 (game ball distribution member) that can be moved to a first position that guides the game ball to the first passage and a second position that guides the game ball to the second passage.
An electric driving means (flapper 7230, metal piece 7240 and solenoid 7250) capable of moving the movable piece 7220, and
Including
The flapper 7230 (driving unit) of the electric driving means is
In the energized state, the movable piece 7220 is in the first state where the first position is reached, and when the movable piece 7220 is in the non-energized state in the first state, the movable piece 7220 is in the second position. Shifted to by its own weight,
The main control circuit 100
It is characterized in that the operation of the movable piece 7220 is controlled by switching between the energized state and the non-energized state of the electric drive means, and the electric drive means is energized at a predetermined cycle. ..

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the occurrence of a malfunction in the operation of the movable piece.

Specifically, the main CPU 101 constantly drives the solenoid 7250 (the opening timing of 0.5 seconds and the closing timing of 1.5 seconds are set to be always alternately repeated). It can be said that such a setting is likely to cause a malfunction in the operation of the movable piece. However, since the drive unit (flapper 7230) is configured to move to a position where the movable piece closes the communication hole by its own weight, a spring for moving the drive unit to the position is unnecessary. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the spring deteriorates and cannot return to the retracted position properly.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A game board 17 having a game area 20 in which a game ball flows down, and
The Kroon 7100 (game ball guidance device) that guides the game ball that has flowed into the device from the game area 20 to take a predetermined trajectory, and
A game ball distribution device 7200 capable of distributing a game ball flowing down from the crune 7100 to a first passage (advantageous course) and a second passage (disadvantageous course) different from the first passage.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The Kroon 7100
Guidance unit 7110 that guides the game ball that flows in from the outside,
A rolling unit 7120 that allows the game ball to roll, and
Including
The guide portion 7110 has a bottom surface portion 7112 and a pair of side wall portions 7113 rising from both ends of the bottom surface portion 7112.
The rolling unit 7120 is
The bottom surface 7121 (rolling area) where the game ball can roll, and
A guide wall 7122 that guides the game ball that has flowed in from the guide unit 7110, and
A discharge hole 7123a (discharge part) capable of discharging a game ball, and
Including
The guide wall 7122 is
The other side wall starts from the connection part with one side wall portion (rear side wall portion 7113b) of the guidance portion 7110 so that the inflowing game ball takes a circular orbit when rolling while in contact with the guide wall 7122. It is formed in an annular shape with the connection portion with the portion (front side wall portion 7113a) as the end point.
At the starting point of the guide wall 7122, a bulge portion 7122a for cushioning a collision between the game ball that has rolled so as to take a circular orbit and the guide wall 7122 is provided.
The game ball distribution device 7200 is
Movable so that the game ball discharged from the discharge hole 7123a of the cloaca 7100 can be moved to a first position for guiding the game ball to the first passage and a second position for guiding the game ball to the second passage. Piece 7220 (game ball distribution member) and
An electric driving means (flapper 7230, metal piece 7240 and solenoid 7250) capable of moving the movable piece 7220, and
Including
The flapper 7230 (driving unit) of the electric driving means is
In the energized state, the movable piece 7220 is in the first state where the first position is reached, and when the movable piece 7220 is in the non-energized state in the first state, the movable piece 7220 is in the second position. It is characterized by shifting due to its own weight.

According to such a configuration, a gaming machine provided with a gaming ball guidance device capable of suppressing the occurrence of malfunction of the movement of the movable piece and appropriately rotating (rolling) the gaming ball is provided. can do.

Further, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a technique for providing a game ball guidance device for guiding a game ball flowing into the device from a gaming area so as to take a predetermined trajectory is known (2006-). See No. 115899).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a crune having a rolling guide surface having a predetermined inclination angle from a through hole provided in the center of the crune toward a side wall around the crune. In this way, the rolling time of the game ball can be given randomness.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine, the game ball that has made one round while contacting the inner wall of the crune once separates from the inner wall at the inflow port, then passes through the inflow port and comes into contact with the inner wall again. There was a problem that it was flipped and smooth rotation was hindered.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine provided with a gaming ball guidance device capable of smoothly rotating (rolling) a gaming ball.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A game board 17 having a game area 20 in which a game ball flows down, and
The Kroon 7100 (game ball guidance device) that guides the game ball that has flowed into the device from the game area 20 to take a predetermined trajectory, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The Kroon 7100
Guidance unit 7110 that guides the game ball that flows in from the outside,
A rolling unit 7120 that allows the game ball to roll, and
Including
The guide portion 7110 has a bottom surface portion 7112 and a pair of side wall portions 7113 rising from both ends of the bottom surface portion 7112.
The rolling unit 7120 is
The bottom surface 7121 (rolling area) where the game ball can roll, and
A guide wall 7122 that guides the game ball that has flowed in from the guide unit 7110, and
A discharge hole 7123a (discharge part) capable of discharging a game ball, and
Including
The guide wall 7122 is
The other side wall starts from the connection part with one side wall portion (rear side wall portion 7113b) of the guidance portion 7110 so that the inflowing game ball takes a circular orbit when rolling while in contact with the guide wall 7122. It is formed in an annular shape with the connection portion with the portion (front side wall portion 7113a) as the end point.
At the connecting portion between the guiding portion 7110 and the rolling portion 7120, a stepped portion 7130 is provided so that the bottom surface portion 7121 of the rolling portion 7120 is lower than the bottom surface portion 7112 of the guiding portion 7110.
The step portion 7130 is
The height of the step portion 7130 is set to be equal to or less than the radius of the game ball, and the game ball rolling beyond the end point of the guide wall 7122 takes substantially the same trajectory as the circular orbit that has been rolled so far. It is formed in an annular shape from the end point of the guide wall 7122 to the start point of the guide wall 7122.
The starting point portion of the guide wall 7122 is provided with a bulge portion 7122a for cushioning a collision between the game ball rolling along the step portion 7130 and the guide wall 7122. Is.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine provided with a gaming ball guidance device capable of smoothly rotating (rolling) the gaming ball.

Specifically, since the bulging portion 7122a is provided at the starting point of the guide wall 7122 of the Kroon 7100, the game ball smoothly hits the guide wall 7122 at an angle close to parallel to the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122. Can be touched. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being repelled by the guide wall 7122, and thus to prevent the game ball A from being immediately discharged to the outside from the discharge hole 7123a.

In addition, in the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine, the game balls that have flowed into the crune uniformly draw the same trajectory, so the time from when the game balls flow into the crune to when they fall through the through hole is a fixed rule. There was a problem of having sex and being targeted.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine provided with a gaming ball guidance device capable of widening the range of randomness of the rolling time of the gaming ball.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A game board 17 having a game area 20 in which a game ball flows down, and
The Kroon 7100 (game ball guidance device) that guides the game ball that has flowed into the device from the game area 20 to take a predetermined trajectory, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The Kroon 7100
Guidance unit 7110 that guides the game ball that flows in from the outside,
A rolling unit 7120 that allows the game ball to roll, and
Including
The rolling unit 7120 is
The bottom surface 7121 (rolling area) where the game ball can roll, and
A guide wall 7122 for guiding the game ball so that the game ball flowing in from the guidance unit 7110 takes a circular orbit, and
A discharge hole 7123a (discharge part) capable of discharging a game ball, and
Including
The discharge hole 7123a is
It is characterized in that it is formed as an inverted conical hole whose diameter decreases toward the bottom.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine provided with a gaming ball guidance device capable of widening the range of randomness of the rolling time of the gaming ball.

Specifically, since the discharge hole 7123a is formed in an inverted conical shape, the rotation speed of the game ball is unlikely to decrease. Therefore, it is possible to increase the maximum time until the game ball is discharged from the discharge hole 7123a without increasing the size of the crune 7100. Therefore, the range of randomness of the rolling time of the game ball can be widened. Therefore, it can be difficult for the player to aim at the timing when the communication hole 7031 is closed.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
A game board 17 having a game area 20 in which a game ball flows down, and
The Kroon 7100 (game ball guidance device) that guides the game ball that has flowed into the device from the game area to take a predetermined trajectory, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The Kroon 7100
Guidance unit 7110 that guides the game ball that flows in from the outside,
A rolling unit 7120 that allows the game ball to roll, and
Including
The guide portion 7110 has a bottom surface portion 7112 and a pair of side wall portions 7113 rising from both ends of the bottom surface portion 7112.
The rolling unit 7120 is
The bottom surface 7121 (rolling area) where the game ball can roll, and
A guide wall 7122 that guides the game ball that has flowed in from the guide unit 7110, and
A discharge hole 7123a (discharge part) capable of discharging a game ball, and
Including
The guide wall 7122 is
The other side wall starts from the connection part with one side wall portion (rear side wall portion 7113b) of the guidance portion 7110 so that the inflowing game ball takes a circular orbit when rolling while in contact with the guide wall 7122. It is formed in an annular shape with the connection portion with the portion (front side wall portion 7113a) as the end point.
At the starting point of the guide wall 7122, a bulge portion 7122a for cushioning a collision between the game ball that has rolled so as to take a circular orbit and the guide wall 7122 is provided.
The discharge hole 7123a is
It is characterized in that it is formed as an inverted conical hole whose diameter decreases toward the bottom.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine provided with a gaming ball guidance device capable of widening the range of randomness of the rolling time of the gaming ball.

Specifically, since the bulging portion 7122a is provided at the starting point of the guide wall 7122 of the Kroon 7100, the game ball smoothly hits the guide wall 7122 at an angle close to parallel to the inner wall surface of the guide wall 7122. Can be touched. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the rotation speed of the game ball. Further, since the discharge hole 7123a is formed in an inverted conical shape, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the rotation speed of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to increase the maximum time until the game ball is discharged from the discharge hole 7123a without increasing the size of the crune 7100. Therefore, the range of randomness of the rolling time of the game ball can be widened. Therefore, it can be difficult for the player to aim at the timing when the communication hole 7031 is closed.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the opening time timer of the communication hole 7031 is set so that the opening timing of 0.5 seconds and the closing timing of 1.5 seconds are always repeated, but the opening timing and closing are performed. The timing time can be set to an appropriate value.

Further, the shapes of the movable piece 7220, the flapper 7230, and the like of the game ball distribution device 7200 are not limited as long as they can exert the effect of the present invention.

Further, conventionally, a technique of a gaming machine provided with a decorative device (movable accessory unit) capable of executing a visual effect by a player is known (see JP-A-2002-143403).

The gaming machine described in the above publication has a configuration in which a lamp substrate on which a light source is mounted is housed in a lens cover mounted on a front frame of a decorative device, and irradiates light from the light source to the outside through the lens cover. It is equipped with a lighting device.

However, in such a gaming machine, it is difficult for the light from the light source to reach the lens cover located on the back surface side of the lamp substrate with respect to the lamp substrate in the decorative device, and uneven irradiation occurs through the lens cover. There was a problem.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing uneven irradiation through a lens member in a decorative device.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
It is a gaming machine equipped with a second movable accessory unit 8000 (decorative device) capable of performing a visual effect to the player.
The second movable accessory unit 8000 is
Light emitting means 8281a and
The substrate 8281 on which the light emitting means 8281a is mounted and
The base member 8210 on which the substrate 8281 is mounted and
The lens member 8283, which is formed of a transmissive member and is arranged at a position where the light emitted from the light emitting means 8281a can enter, is provided.
The lens member 8283 is
From the position of the substrate 8281 covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a, the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a on the substrate 8281 is outside the at least one end (left end) of the substrate 8281. It is extended to the position beyond
The base member 8210 is
It is formed of a reflective member capable of reflecting light, is outside the at least one end (left end) of the substrate 8281, and exceeds the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8281a on the substrate 8281. Therefore, the lens member 8283 is provided at a position where the light emitted from the end portion (left end portion) can be reflected.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent uneven irradiation via the lens member 8283 in the second movable accessory unit 8000. That is, since the base member 8210 formed of the reflective member capable of reflecting light is provided at a position where the light emitted from the end of the lens member 8283 can be reflected, the light from the light emitting means 8281a is difficult to reach, and the substrate. The light reflected by the base member 8210 can also enter the lens member 8283 located on the back surface side of the mounting surface of the 8281, and it is possible to suppress uneven irradiation through the lens member 8283. can.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment is
It is a gaming machine equipped with a second movable accessory unit 8000 capable of performing a visual effect to the player.
The second movable accessory unit 8000 is
Light emitting means 8931 and
The substrate 8930 on which the light emitting means 8931 is mounted and
A light guide member 8940 that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means 8931, and
The base member 8920 to which the substrate 8930 is mounted and
A lens member 8950 formed of a transmissive member and arranged at a position where light emitted from the light emitting means 8931 via the light guide member 8940 can enter light is provided.
The lens member 8950 is
From the position of the substrate 8930 that covers the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931, it is outside the at least one end (fingertip side end) of the substrate 8930, and the mounting surface of the light emitting means 893 on the substrate 8930. It is extended so as to incline to a position beyond the back side,
The light guide member 8940 is
From a position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means 8931 on the substrate 8930, it is outside the at least one end (fingertip side end) of the board 8930, and the mounting surface of the light emitting means 893 on the substrate 8930. It is a position beyond the back surface and is extended so as to be inclined in a manner different from that of the lens member 8950 so as to be close to the tip end side of the lens member 8950 in the extension direction.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent uneven irradiation via the lens member 8950 in the second movable accessory unit 8000 (decorative device). That is, by letting the light enter through the light guide member 8940 from a position close to the tip portion of the lens member 8950 in the extending direction, which is difficult for light to reach, the irradiation through the lens member 8950 becomes uneven. It can be suppressed from occurring.

[spec]
Next, the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 92.

FIG. 92 shows an outline of (game) specifications in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 92, “Special FIG. 1” indicates, for example, winning a prize in the first starting port (starting port 7071a of the starting port unit 7070 shown in FIG. 42 and the advantageous outward path 7072b on the base plate side). Further, "Special Figure 2" indicates, for example, winning a prize in the second starting port (second starting port 440 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 shown in FIG. 26). In the following, the prize for the first starting port may be simply referred to as "Special Figure 1", and the winning for the second starting port may be simply referred to as "Special Figure 2".

As shown in FIG. 92, the jackpot probability is set to 1 / 199.8 in the low probability state. Further, in the high probability state, the jackpot probability is set to 1/24. Further, the small hit probability is set to 1/24 in the special figure 2. As described above, the probability of a small hit based on the special figure 2 is set to be the same as the probability of a large hit based on the special figure 2. The continuation rate is set to 10% in Special Figure 1 and 95% in Special Figure 2. In the present embodiment, a limit is set for the number of times the probability change state is continued to be executed after the end of the big hit, and in the present embodiment, it is 10 times. When the limit number of times is reached, even if a big hit occurs in the probabilistic symbol, it does not shift to the probable change state after the big hit ends. For example, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called V probabilistic machine) in which the displacement member opens during a big hit of a probabilistic symbol (a symbol that easily passes through a specific area) and the game ball passes through the specific area to shift to a probabilistic state after the big hit ends. If the current jackpot has reached the limit number of times, even if it passes through a specific area during the jackpot, it will be treated as a normal jackpot, and it will not shift to a probable change state after the jackpot ends.

Further, as a real round (hit type), in Special Figure 1, a big hit of 5R (normal) is selected with a probability of 90% (a big hit game of 5 rounds is performed, and non-probability / non-probability change / non-probability after the big hit game). It will be in a short time state). Similarly, a 5R (probability variation) jackpot is selected with a 10% probability (a 5 round jackpot game is performed, and the probability variation / time reduction state occurs after the jackpot game).

Further, in Special Figure 2, a 4R (normal) jackpot is selected with a probability of 5% (a jackpot game of 4 rounds is performed, and after the jackpot game, a non-probability change / time saving state occurs). Similarly, a 4R (probability variation) jackpot is selected with a 45% probability (a four-round jackpot game is performed, and after the jackpot game, the probability variation state / time saving state is reached). Similarly, a 6R (probability variation) jackpot is selected with a 10% probability (a 6-round jackpot game is performed, and the probability variation / time reduction state occurs after the jackpot game). Similarly, a big hit of 8R (probability change) is selected with a probability of 40% (8 rounds of big hit games are performed, and after the big hit game, the probability changes and the time is shortened). In the following, it may be referred to as "falling" that the 4R (normal) big hit of the special figure 2 becomes a big hit in the probable change / time saving state and becomes a non-probable change / time saving state after the big hit game.

As described above, in the present embodiment (second embodiment), even if the jackpot is as shown in FIG. 1 (that is, if the jackpot is a left-handed hit), the jackpot is a jackpot. It is relatively difficult to get into a probable change / time saving state after the game. However, it is set so that the probabilistic change / time saving state can be easily continued for a relatively long time while the probabilistic change / time saving state is once reached and the big hit of the special figure 2 is made (that is, while the right-handed hit is performed).

The number of continuations of the probabilistic state is added (stored) by a predetermined counter included in the main control circuit 100. In the above-mentioned special symbol determination process, the main control circuit 100 starts counting once the non-probability change state is changed to the probability change state, and performs a process of adding 1 to the counter value every time the probability change jackpot is reached. In this way, when the added value becomes 10, the main control circuit 100 determines that the limit has been reached, and shifts from the probable change / time saving state to the non-probability change / time saving state after the end of the big hit game. The value of the counter is cleared when the state is changed from the probable change / time saving state to the non-probability change / time saving state.

In this embodiment, as will be described later, various effects are performed in relation to reaching the limit. Therefore, not only the main control circuit 100 but also the sub control circuit 200 needs to acquire information on whether or not the limit has been reached. The sub control circuit 200 may acquire information as to whether or not the limit has been reached from the main control circuit 100, or may acquire the information by having a counter and performing counting.

In this embodiment, a game (hereinafter referred to as "JAC game") for improving the interest of the player is performed. The JAC game is a game performed when a probability change state is continuously generated. For example, in the above-mentioned V probability change machine, a big hit is generated in the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and a specific area is set during the big hit. As long as the game ball passes, the JAC game after the big hit is continued. In this case, the production mode in the JAC game may be different depending on whether the jackpot in the special figure 1 or the jackpot in the special figure 2 is hit. A detailed description of the JAC game will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the number of time reductions determined based on the jackpot type and the type of variation pattern used in the game after the jackpot is completed will be described.

FIG. 93 shows a table (variation pattern table selection table) for selecting the number of time reductions and the variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is used when the variation pattern is determined (selected) by the main CPU 101 in step S121 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 93, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern A is used in the case of 5R (normal) of the special figure 1 in FIG. 92. Further, in the case of a big hit of 4R (normal) of the special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern table A is used. In addition, if it is a big hit of 5R (probability change) of special figure 1, 4R (probability change) of special figure 2, 6R (probability change) of special figure 2, or 8R (probability change) of special figure 2, (in principle). ) Fluctuation pattern table B is used. However, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the big hit of the probability variation symbol (the symbol that easily passes through the specific area), the variation pattern A is used.

Further, in the case of 4R (probability variation) of Special Figure 2, 6R (probability variation) of Special Figure 2, or 8R (probability variation) of Special Figure 2, the variation pattern table C is used as an exception when the limit described later is reached. To. In addition, the number of time reductions is 100 times for 5R (normal) in Special Figure 1 and up to the next big hit for 5R (probability change) in Special Figure 1. However, when the limit number of times is reached, the number of time reductions is 100 times. Also, if 4R (normal) is won during the JAC game, the number of time reductions will be 20 times.
Further, in these fluctuation pattern tables A, B, and C, even in the same fluctuation pattern table, a long-term fluctuation pattern is likely to be selected for the fluctuation pattern related to the special figure 1, and a short-term fluctuation pattern is easily selected for the fluctuation pattern related to the special figure 2. The configuration is such that the fluctuation pattern of is easy to select.
After the time saving state ends and returns to the normal state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table D for normal games.

In this way, the variation pattern is selected by the main CPU 101 using each variation pattern table as described above. Although detailed description is omitted, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are defined in each fluctuation pattern table, and one fluctuation pattern is determined from the plurality of fluctuation patterns by the winning result and the random number for selecting the fluctuation pattern. Will be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern table C is used, the fluctuation pattern (for example, 13) is longer than that of the second and subsequent fluctuations in the first fluctuation (when the first fluctuation is displayed in the symbol) after reaching the limit. Seconds) is selected. After reaching the limit, not only when the fluctuation pattern table C as described above is used, but also when another fluctuation pattern table (for example, fluctuation pattern table D or the like) is used, 1 after reaching the limit is similarly obtained. A fluctuation pattern that is longer than the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected for the fluctuation. In the following, the long fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation after reaching these limits may be referred to as “variation pattern LG”.

Next, processing by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

The components (processes) that are the same as or similar to those according to the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. Here, among the processes shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the effect pattern determination process of step S1408, the hit start effect determination process of step S1410, the inter-round effect determination process of step S1414, and the hit end effect determination of step S1416 are performed. The processing will be explained.

First, the effect pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 94 (a).

In step S1431, the sub CPU 201 performs an effect pattern determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 is a process of determining an effect pattern based on a special figure variation pattern designation command which is data indicating a variation pattern determined by the main CPU 101, a stop symbol, and an extracted random value for effect determination. I do.

If the variation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is the variation pattern LG, the sub CPU 201 determines the effect pattern based on the variation pattern LG. Specifically, as the effect pattern, an effect pattern including an EX mode transition effect described later is determined. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1432.

In step S1432, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the effect data according to the determined effect pattern. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect pattern determination process.

Next, the hit start effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 94 (b).

In step S1434, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the hit start effect. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a hit start effect according to a received hit start command or the like. The hit start effect includes an opening (OP) effect described later. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1435.

In step S1435, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting effect data according to the determined hit start effect. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the hit start effect determination process.

Next, the inter-round effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (a).

In step S1437, the sub CPU 201 processes the determination of the inter-round effect. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the inter-round effect according to the received inter-round display command or the like. The inter-round effect includes a round continuation effect described later. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1438.

In step S1438, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting effect data according to the determined inter-round effect. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the inter-round effect determination process.

Next, the hit end effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (b).

In step S1441, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the winning end effect. Specifically, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the hit end effect according to the received hit end display command or the like. The hit end display command is set when the hit type is JAC4, which will be described later, and is set when the hit type is other than JAC4 (limit not reached). Includes a hit end display command (at the time).

In this way, different hit end effects are determined according to the hit end effect command when the limit is reached or the limit is not reached. In the present embodiment, the hit end effect includes a result display effect determined according to the hit end display command when the limit is reached and a first ending effect determined according to the hit end display command when the limit is not reached. And, are included. The result display effect and the first ending effect will be described later. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1442.

In step S1442, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting effect data according to the determined hit end effect. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the hit end effect determination process.

[JAC game]
Next, the JAC game will be described in detail.

First, with reference to FIG. 96, a hit type in a JAC game performed when the gaming state is a probable change / time saving state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 96, in the present embodiment, JAC1, JAC2, JAC3, JAC4, abutment operation, and S-JAC are provided as the hit types selected during the JAC game. The "design / icon" shown in FIG. 96 indicates the content displayed to notify the player of the hit type when performing a big hit game in a JAC game. Further, the "corresponding symbol" specifically indicates a symbol corresponding to the hit type of the name shown in FIG. 96.

For each hit, first, 4R (probability change), 6R (probability change), or 8R (probability change) is selected in the main CPU 101, and then in the case of 8R (probability change) in the sub CPU 201, basically. It is decided to be JAC1 or JAC2 by lottery, but if another 8R (probability change) is stored in the hold, it is decided to be JAC3, and when the limit is reached, it is decided to be JAC4. In the case of 6R (probability change) or 4R (probability change), it is basically determined to be JAC1, but when the limit is reached, it is determined to be JAC4. Further, when 4R (normal) is selected in the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 201 determines the collision operation. Further, when the small hit is selected in the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 201 determines the S-JAC.
In this way, when the hit type is JAC1, 7 (blue) is displayed as a symbol / icon (hereinafter, simply referred to as "icon"), and 8R (probability variation), 6R (probability variation) or 4R (probability variation). ) Is one of the big hits. Further, when the hit type is JAC2, 7 (red) is displayed as an icon, indicating that it is a big hit of 8R (probability variation).

Further, when the hit type is JAC3, V is displayed as an icon, indicating that it is a big hit of 8R (probability variation). As described in "Remarks", the case of JAC3 basically corresponds to 8R (probability change), but it is suspended when the (design) variation display related to this JAC3 starts. The big hit of 8R (probability change) in the inside is also confirmed. In the present embodiment, when two 8R (probability change) jackpots are confirmed in this way, even if there is another hold between the hold related to the two 8R (probability change) jackpots, the two 8Rs (probability change) ( The jackpot of (probability change) is produced as if it is a 16R (probability variation) jackpot in a series (second look-ahead effect described later).

When the hit type is JAC4, 7 (yellow) is displayed as an icon, indicating that the hit is any of 8R (probability change), 6R (probability change), or 4R (probability change). As described in "Remarks", JAC4 appears when the limit is reached (the number of continuations is the 10th big hit). That is, in this case, even when the specific area is passed during the big hit of the probabilistic symbol (the symbol that easily passes through the specific area), the probable change / time saving state does not occur after the big hit game, but the non-probable change / time saving state. In this way, when the hit type is JAC4, after the big hit game, the game is shifted from the JAC game (probability change / time reduction state) to the non-probability change / time reduction state game (hereinafter referred to as “EX game”). The EX game that starts when the limit is completed is played up to 100 times (if it is not a big hit).

Further, when the hit type is a hit operation, the icon is not displayed and it does not indicate again that it is a 4R (normal) big hit. More specifically, when the hit type is a hit operation, the big winning opening 540 is opened four times for a short time (for example, 1.7 seconds), and the effect related to the change of the game state (mode transition effect). Is done. If the hit type is a hit operation, the game is shifted from the JAC game (probability change / time reduction state) to the EX game (non-probability change / time reduction state) (that is, to fall) after the big hit game. The EX game that starts when the player falls is played up to 20 times (if it is not a big hit).

When the hit type is S-JAC, S-JAC is displayed as an icon to indicate that it is a small hit. When the small hit game is played, the big winning opening 540 is opened once for a short time (for example, 1.7 seconds). A plurality of types of small hits may be provided, and the opening time and opening pattern may be different for each small hit.

Next, the screen (layout) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 while the variable display is being performed during the JAC game will be described with reference to FIG. 97.

FIG. 97 shows an example of a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 while the variable display is being executed during the JAC game (that is, the probability change / time saving state). The display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided with a plurality of display areas in order to display various effects and information. Specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided with a mini symbol display area 1001, a limit number display area 1002, a GC display area 1003, and a JAC number display area 1004.

The mini symbol display area 1001 is an area for displaying a variable display of the identification symbol. The mini symbol display area 1001 is located at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The identification symbol displayed in the mini symbol display area 1001 is smaller than the game state (non-probability change / non-time saving state) before the start of the JAC game, and is out of the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. A variable display is made at the position (ie, in a manner that is difficult for the player to see) (see, for example, FIG. 128 described below).

The limit number display area 1002 is an area for displaying the total number of probabilistic jackpot games played up to the present time after the start of the current JAC game. The limit number display area 1002 is formed in a semicircular shape. In the limit number display area 1002, a total of 10 circular lighting units 1005 are displayed. One lighting unit 1005 is lit at the start of the JAC game, and the color of one lighting unit 1005 is changed to white each time a big hit game is played. In the example shown in FIG. 97, the image displayed in the limit number display area 1002 indicates that the jackpot game has been performed seven times so far after the start of the current JAC game.

The GC display area 1003 is an area for displaying the total number of variable displays (total number of games) performed up to the present time after the start of the current JAC game. The GC display area 1003 is located inside the limit number display area 1002 formed in a semicircular shape. In the example shown in FIG. 97, the image displayed in the GC display area 1003 indicates that the variable display has been performed 324 times so far after the start of the current JAC game.

The JAC number display area 1004 is an area for displaying the total number of JAC numbers played up to the present time after the start of the current JAC game. The number of JACs means the number of times that the big winning opening 540 is opened in the big hit game and the small hit game. That is, the JAC number means the number of round games (specifically, for example, 8 times in the case of 8R (probability variation)) in the big hit game, and 1 time in the small hit game. The number of JACs is not the number of times the big winning opening 540 is opened in the big hit game and the small hit game, but is, for example, the number of times of the big hit game and the small hit game (that is, the number of times the hit game is played). May be good. As a small hit game, it is desirable that the number of JACs is one even when the opening is performed for, for example, 0.9 seconds × 2 times.

The JAC number display area 1004 is located in the upper right portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the example shown in FIG. 97, the image displayed in the JAC number display area 1004 indicates that the total number of JACs has been 35 times since the start of the current JAC game.

As described above, in the JAC game, on the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 while the variable display is being performed, various information related to the JAC game is displayed in addition to the variable display of the identification symbol depending on various display areas. (Specifically, the total number of jackpot games, the total number of variable displays, and the total number of JACs) are displayed. As a result, the player can play the game while grasping the information about the JAC game while the variable display is being performed during the JAC game. In addition to the various information described above, the number of payouts may be displayed.

In the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, a background screen and a predetermined character are displayed in addition to the variable display of the identification symbol and information on the JAC game. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 97, a state in which two characters are fighting is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, a screen (layout) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 while the jackpot game is being executed during the JAC game will be described.

FIG. 98 shows a liquid crystal display during a jackpot (specifically, a jackpot of 8R (probability variation)) during a JAC game and while the jackpot game is being executed (more specifically, a jackpot round period described later). An example of the screen displayed on the apparatus 16 is shown. The display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided with a plurality of display areas in order to display various effects and information. Specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided with a JAC symbol display area 1010, a remaining round display area 1011 and a JAC number display area 1004.

The JAC symbol display area 1010 is an area for displaying the name of the hit type that has become a big hit and the JAC symbol (icon). The JAC symbol display area 1010 is located in the upper left portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the example shown in FIG. 98, the image (that is, the icon) displayed in the JAC symbol display area 1010 indicates that the hit type that has become a big hit is JAC1.

The remaining round display area 1011 is an area for displaying the number of remaining rounds (that is, the remaining number of times that the big winning opening 540 is opened in the current big hit game). The remaining round display area 1011 is located at the lower left of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the remaining round display area 1011, a number of JAC displays 1012 corresponding to the number of remaining rounds are displayed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 97, it is displayed immediately after the big hit of 8R (probability variation) is started, that is, the number of remaining rounds is 8. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 98, the JAC display 1012 is erased every time the large winning opening 540 is opened once (one round is digested).

The JAC number display area 1004 is the same as the JAC number display area 1004 while the variation display shown in FIG. 97 is being performed. That is, the JAC number display area 1004 during the jackpot game is the total number of JAC numbers played up to the present time after the start of the current JAC game, as in the case of the variable display. it's shown.

As described above, in the JAC game, the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 while the jackpot game is being executed has various information related to the JAC game (specifically, the jackpot) depending on the various display areas. The name of the hit type, the JAC symbol, the number of remaining rounds, and the total number of JACs) are displayed. As a result, the player can play the game while grasping the information about the JAC game while the jackpot game is being executed during the JAC game.

In the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, a background screen and a predetermined character are displayed in addition to the variable display of the identification symbol and information on the JAC game. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 98, a character standing with a sword is displayed.

Next, the production related to the big hit game in the case of a big hit during the JAC game will be described.

The big hit game is a game that is performed after the symbol that has become a big hit is confirmed and before the next variable display is started. The production related to the jackpot game is mainly divided into three periods: an opening (OP) production period, a jackpot round period, and an end interval period. During the OP effect period, a hit start effect (for example, an opening (OP) effect) is performed. In addition, during the jackpot round period, an inter-round effect (for example, a round continuous effect) is performed. Further, during the end interval period, a hit end effect (for example, an ending (ED) effect) is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the jackpot is not reached (that is, when the JAC game continues after the jackpot game ends) and when the limit is reached (that is, the JAC game ends after the jackpot game ends). At the same time, the timing at which the ED effect period ends (the timing at which the ED effect ends) differs between the case where the EX game is started and the case where the ED effect ends. It is also different from the timing at which the ED effect executed when the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the normal big hit or the big hit of the probability variation symbol (the symbol that easily passes through the specific area) ends.

First, in the following, with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, the production related to the big hit game in the case of the big hit when the limit is not reached will be described.

Note that FIG. 99A is a production flow of a big hit game when the limit is not reached. FIG. 99A shows the passage of time from the left side to the right side of the paper and the content of the effect performed in response to the passage of time. Further, in FIG. 99 (a), it is assumed that the JAC game, which is a probabilistic / short-time game, continues after the end of the big hit game.

As shown in FIG. 99 (a), for example, when the hit type is a big hit of JAC1 and 7 (blue) of the symbol (icon) is confirmed, the OP effect period is first performed and the opening (OP) effect is performed. In the OP production, for example, the player is notified that the large prize opening 540 will be opened, and the production is performed so as to raise the player's expectation regarding the acquisition of the prize ball.

When the OP production is completed, the next big hit round period is reached, and the round continuous production is started. In the round continuation effect, for example, for each round, an effect is performed to notify the player that the round game will continue. Further, when the round continuous effect is performed, the screen (layout) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is, for example, the one shown in FIG. 98. That is, while the round continuation effect is being performed, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays the name of the winning type, the JAC symbol, the number of remaining rounds, and the total number of JACs.

When the round continuation effect is completed, the ending (ED) effect is started in the end interval period. As shown in FIG. 99A, in the effect flow of the jackpot game when the limit is not reached, the start and end timings of the ED effect are set to be the same as the start and end timings of the end interval period. There is. Further, in the following description, the ED effect when the limit is not reached is referred to as "first ED effect". Here, FIGS. 100 (a) and 100 (b) show an example of the effect content displayed in the first ED effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100A, in the first ED effect, the characters "Big hit end !!" are first displayed, and the player is notified that the big hit game is finished. Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), the characters "still to come!" Are displayed, and the player is notified that the JAC game will continue. The first ED effect ends at the same time as the end of the end interval period, that is, the end of the jackpot game.

In this way, when the jackpot game ends, the first ED effect (that is, the effect related to the jackpot game) also ends, and then the first variation (first variation display) of the symbol is performed in the probability variation / time saving state. In the first variation, the variation display of the symbol is started, and at the same time, the effect related to the variation display is displayed.

In this way, in the case of a big hit when the limit is not reached, the effect related to the big hit game (OP effect, round continuation effect, and first ED effect) is the timing at which the effect ends (more specifically, the first). The timing at which the ED effect ends) is the same as the timing at which the jackpot game ends.

In the present embodiment, the end interval period (ED effect period) is set to a relatively short period (for example, 5 seconds). In this way, by setting the end interval period (ED effect period) to a short period, the next big hit can be made as soon as possible. That is, since many big hit games can be played in a short period of time within the limit range, it is possible to give the player a lot of chances to win a prize ball, and by extension, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots of the special figure 2 (which can continue the JAC game) are provided, but the end interval periods of these are all set to be the same. The ED production period may be set to be the same for a specific hit group (for example, a probabilistic jackpot group) and different from other groups (for example, a normal jackpot group), or for each jackpot type. May be different. In addition, the jackpot game also performs the same effect as during the JAC game, making it difficult for the player to determine that the jackpot is being played, and seamlessly performing the effect between the jackpot and the JAC game or the small hit game. good. In that case, the limit may not be displayed and it may be difficult to recognize when the limiter is reached. Further, the player may be made to select the production mode during the JAC game for beginners, advanced players, etc. at the time of the first probability change big hit. Alternatively, the production of the JAC game to be started thereafter may be determined by the symbol type at the time of the first probability change big hit, a lottery, or the like. When letting the player select, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that meets the needs of the player, and if the decision is made at the time of the first probable change jackpot, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not get tired of.
As the limiter update timing, the number of limiters may be added at the start of the big hit. In addition, the limit number is added at the end of the big hit, and if the subsequent game is a probabilistic game, it is determined whether or not the limit has been reached. It may be a normal game and the limit number of times may be cleared. It can also be applied to a gaming machine that shifts to a probabilistic state when Further, the limit number of times may be added when the jackpot starts with the probability variation symbol, or the limit number of times may be added when the jackpot starts with the probability variation symbol and the probability variation jackpot ends. Others The counting of the limit number of times is not limited to these configurations as long as the limit number of times is not different.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 99, 100, and 101, the production related to the big hit game in the case of the big hit when the limit is reached will be described.

Note that FIG. 99B is an effect flow of the jackpot game when the limit is reached. FIG. 99 (b) shows the passage of time from the left side to the right side of the paper and the content of the effect performed in response to the passage of time, as in FIG. 99 (a). Further, in FIG. 99 (b), after the end interval period ends, that is, after the jackpot game ends, the JAC game (probability change / time saving state game) ends when the limit is reached, and the EX game (non-probability change / time saving state) is newly completed. The game of the state) shall be started.

In this embodiment, for example, after the hit type is a big hit of JAC4 and the symbol (icon) 7 (yellow) is confirmed, the OP effect and the round continuous effect are among the effects related to the big hit game when the limit is reached. , It is the same as the production related to the jackpot game when the limit is not reached. Therefore, among the effects related to the jackpot game when the limit is reached, the description of the OP effect and the round continuation effect will be omitted. Further, in the following, it is assumed that the identification symbol displayed as stopped is "111" for the big hit whose hit type is JAC4.

When the round continuation effect is completed, the end interval period is started next to enter the ending (ED) effect period, and the ending (ED) effect is started. Further, the ED effect when the limit is reached includes a result display effect and an EX game transition effect.

In the result display effect, in the JAC game, an effect of notifying the player that the big hit game is completed and that the limit has been reached is performed. Here, FIGS. 100 (c) and 100 (d) show an example of the effect content displayed in the result display effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), in the result display effect, as in the case of the first ED effect when the limit is not reached (see FIG. 100 (a)), first, "Big hit ends !!" Characters are displayed to notify the player that the jackpot game is over. Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (d), unlike the first ED effect when the limit is not reached (see FIG. 100 (b)), the characters "result announcement !!" and "rank S" are displayed. , The evaluation (results) of the player's game in the JAC game is notified.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 99 (a) and 99 (b), the result display effect is performed during the period corresponding to the first ED effect when the limit is not reached (that is, the end interval period). Specifically, the timing at which the result display effect starts and ends is set to be the same as the timing at which the first ED effect when the limit is not reached starts and ends. In other words, the timing at which the result display effect ends is the same as the timing at which the jackpot game ends (the timing at which the end interval period ends).

In this way, when the result display effect is completed, the remaining EX game transition effect of the ED effect is performed next. That is, the ED effect (first ED effect) when the limit is not reached shown in FIG. 99 (a) was ended at the timing when the jackpot game ends (the timing when the end interval period ends), but FIG. 99 (b). The ED effect at the time of reaching the limit shown in)) will continue without ending at the timing when the jackpot game ends (the timing when the end interval period ends).

In this way, the EX game transition effect is performed after the jackpot game ends (after the end interval period ends). That is, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), the EX game transition effect is started at the same time as the first variation (first variation display) after the jackpot game is completed (after the end interval period is completed). In this way, the EX game transition effect is performed in parallel with the first variable display. In the present embodiment, the EX game transition effect is set to a period of, for example, 10 seconds.
If there is no hold at the end of the big hit, the game stops with the result display effect in the ED effect displayed, and when a new start prize is generated, the EX game transition effect is started.

Here, for the first fluctuation after reaching the limit, the fluctuation pattern LG is selected as the fluctuation pattern as described above. That is, the first fluctuation after reaching the limit is set to a longer period than when another fluctuation pattern is selected (second and subsequent fluctuations). In this embodiment, the variation pattern LG is defined as, for example, 13 seconds. Therefore, although the EX game transition effect is started at the same time as the variation display of the first variation, it ends in the middle of the variation display of the first variation (specifically, leaving 3 seconds remaining).

In the EX game transition effect, an effect is performed to notify the player that the JAC game is finished and the EX game is started next. Here, FIGS. 101 (a) to 101 (c) show an example of the effect content displayed in the EX game transition effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), in the EX game transition effect, first, a state in which the character is full of vitality is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the characters "EX game !!" are displayed, and the player is notified of the specific game to be played next. Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), an identification symbol (“111” in FIG. 101 (c)) relating to the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game is temporarily stopped and displayed. In this way, it is possible to give the player the impression that the jackpot game (which is actually finished) has continued until now.

In this way, the period during which the EX game transition effect is performed is the period of the first fluctuation after the jackpot game is completed, but it is as if the jackpot game is still continuing and the jackpot game is being continued. It is possible to give the player the impression that the production (ED production) is being performed.

In addition, the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation is performed in parallel with the EX game transition effect, and the fluctuation display is small and small as shown in FIGS. 101 (a) and 101 (b). It is performed at a position off the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (that is, in a manner that is difficult for the player to see). That is, the player who has the impression that the jackpot game is still continuing (that is, the fluctuation display of the next first fluctuation has not started) feels uncomfortable by actually visually recognizing the fluctuation display. I try not to. After the ED effect is completed, the identification symbol in FIG. 101 (c) starts variable display, but the small variable display portion at the lower right may be continuously displayed or may not be displayed. good. Alternatively, the display of the identification symbol may be turned off once, and the small fluctuation display at the lower right may be enlarged and moved to the center to start the fluctuation.

Further, when the EX game transition effect is completed, the effect related to the variation display of the first variation is performed using the remaining period (for example, 3 seconds) of the first variation. That is, the variation display of the identification symbol of the first variation is stopped and displayed during the remaining period, and then the second variation is started.

As described above, in the JAC game, since it is required to promote the high-speed digestion of the number of big hit games, the period for performing the ED effect is set to a short period (for example, 5 seconds). However, when the limit is reached, it is necessary to notify the player of information such as the player's performance in the JAC game by the result display effect and the specific game to be played next by the EX game transition effect. Therefore, in the short period as described above, it is assumed that all the necessary information cannot be notified to the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the limit is reached, the ED effect is not ended at the timing when the jackpot game ends (the timing when the end interval period ends), but is continued until the middle of the next first variation. As a result, for example, even when all the end interval periods set in the sub CPU 201 are set to be the same, the ED effect is performed in a short period when the limit is not reached, and the ED effect (result display) is performed when the limit is reached. The effect and the EX game transition effect) can be performed for a long period of time (for example, 15 seconds). That is, it is possible to facilitate the time management of the production.

[Look-ahead production]
Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has starting memory (starting information) acquired at the time of winning when a game ball wins a prize at the first starting port or the second starting port, that is, various types. Data (random value for jackpot determination, random value for symbol determination, etc.) is reserved. In this way, after the variable display of the currently executed symbol is completed, the variable display of the reserved symbol is started. The number of changes (number of holds) of the reserved symbol is displayed on the hold display unit 72 for ordinary symbols, the hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol, the hold display unit 76 for the second special symbol, and the liquid crystal display device 16. To.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays a number of spherical icons corresponding to the number of holdings as a display of the number of holdings. Hereinafter, the spherical icon is referred to as a “holding ball”. With respect to the symbol corresponding to the reserved ball, various data (information) acquired at the time of winning the starting port that triggered the selection of the symbol are associated with the reserved ball. In this way, in the present embodiment, the hit determination regarding the symbol corresponding to the reserved ball is performed based on the information of the reserved ball, and a predetermined effect (look-ahead effect) is performed based on the determination result. Of the look-ahead effects, the effect related to the appearance (display mode) of the icon based on the determination result may be referred to as a hold look-ahead effect.

Whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect is determined by the effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 94 (a)) by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201) as described above. More specifically, the sub CPU 201 is a part of the effect pattern based on the special figure variation pattern designation command which is the data indicating the variation pattern determined by the main CPU 101, the stop symbol, the extracted random number value for effect determination, and the like. As a result, it is determined whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect (see step S1431). In the present embodiment, the look-ahead effect includes a first look-ahead effect, a second look-ahead effect, a hold continuous suggestion effect during a small hit game, and the like, which will be described later.

In the following, before giving a detailed explanation about the look-ahead effect, the outline of the display of the reserved ball will be described.

In the following description, for convenience, a drawing that simplifies the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is used. For example, the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided with three decorative symbols (variable display), a reserved ball display area 1100, and a reserved ball display area 1200 (see FIG. 105).

The reserved ball display area 1100 is an area for displaying the reserved ball image according to the starting memory that is the basis of the variable display of the identification symbol during the variable display (in the case of the pseudo-ream, the first variable display). It is located at the bottom left of the screen. Further, when the identification symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, and at least one reserved ball is displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200, the reserved ball display area 1200 is changed to the reserved ball display area 1100. One reserved ball is displayed to move.

The hold ball display area 1200 is an area for displaying the hold information corresponding to the first to fourth start storages individually as an image of the hold ball, and is located on the right side of the hold ball display area 1100. In the reserved ball display area 1200, the first reserved ball stored most recently is displayed as the leftmost reserved ball, and the second to fourth reserved information are sequentially arranged on the right side of the leftmost reserved ball by a plurality of reserved balls. Is displayed. In the hold ball display area 1200, basically, every time the leftmost hold ball indicating the first hold information is erased, the hold ball display area 1100 is moved and displayed, and the remaining second to fourth hold information is displayed. If there is a reserved ball indicating, each is moved and displayed so as to shift to the left.

In the following, among the reserved ball display areas 1200, the area where the first reserved ball is displayed as a reserved ball is referred to as "the first reserved ball display area 1201", and the area where the second reserved information is displayed as a reserved ball is referred to. "2nd reserved ball display area 1202", the area where the 3rd reserved information is displayed as a reserved ball is "3rd reserved ball display area 1203", and the area where the 4th reserved information is displayed as a reserved ball is "the second". 4 Hold ball display area 1204 ”may be referred to as each.

[First look-ahead production]
Hereinafter, the first look-ahead effect will be described.

The first look-ahead effect is a predetermined image (in the present embodiment) on a screen in a darkened state when the hold ball targeted for the look-ahead effect is displayed so as to move to the hold ball display area 1100. Is an effect of displaying whether or not a character) appears. The first look-ahead effect is mainly divided into a first effect and a second effect.

The first effect is an effect that darkens the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 (displays as if it is filled with black). When the first effect is performed and the screen is darkened, only three identification symbols, the reserved ball display area 1100 and the reserved ball display area 1200 are displayed on the screen (see FIG. 105). After the reserved ball is displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200, the timing at which the first effect is performed is determined at the time of winning when the start memory of the reserved ball that is the target of the first look-ahead effect is acquired. Further, the timing at which the first effect is performed is determined using a predetermined table (darkening start pattern determination table). A plurality of darkening start pattern determination tables are provided, and one table is selected according to where the reserved ball, which is the target of the first look-ahead effect, is first displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200.

Next, the darkening start pattern determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 102.

FIG. 102 (a) is a darkening start pattern determination table used when the reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is first displayed in the fourth reserved ball display area 1204. In FIG. 102 (a), one pattern is selected from three patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, pattern 3) excluding the pattern (PTN) 0 in which the first look-ahead effect is not performed by a predetermined lottery. As for the display of "hold-3", "hold-2", "hold-1", and "corresponding", the hold ball first displayed in the 4th hold ball display area 1204 is subsequently moved and displayed. It means the display area.

Specifically, when the reserved ball is first displayed in the 4th reserved ball display area 1204, for example, when pattern 2 is selected, this reserved ball is "held-3" (3rd reserved ball display). When it is moved and displayed in the area 1203), it becomes "-". That is, even when the reserved ball is moved and displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203, the first effect is not yet started (the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is not darkened). Next, when this reserved ball is moved and displayed in "hold-2" (second reserved ball display area 1202), it becomes "start of darkening". That is, when the reserved ball is moved and displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202, the first effect is started (the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is darkened).

Next, when this reserved ball is moved and displayed in "hold-1" (first reserved ball display area 1201), it becomes "continuation of darkening". That is, when the reserved ball is moved and displayed in the first reserved ball display area 1201, the first effect is continued (the screen remains dark). Next, when the reserved ball is moved and displayed in the "reserved ball display area 1100", the lottery is performed. That is, when the reserved ball is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100, a predetermined lottery is performed, and an effect (second effect described later) according to the lottery result is performed.

Further, FIG. 102 (b) is a darkening start pattern determination table used when the reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is first displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203. Similarly, FIG. 102 (c) is a darkening start pattern determination table used when the reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is first displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202. When the holding ball is first displayed in the third holding ball display area 1203 or the second holding ball display area 1202, the first holding ball is used in accordance with the movement display of the holding ball at a predetermined timing by using these tables. The effect is started (the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is dimmed).

The second effect is an effect of displaying whether or not a predetermined character appears on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 darkened by the first effect. More specifically, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106, when the second effect is performed, first, an effect (EF) composed of bright light particles is displayed on the darkened screen. Ru. Then, a state (process) in which a predetermined character gradually appears as the grains are gathered is displayed. Then, either an effect in which the predetermined character completely appears by the effect (appearance effect) or an effect in which the predetermined character does not completely appear (erased in the middle of appearance) (gase effect) is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the second effect may suggest that there is a hold sequence when there is a hold sequence, the second effect is a property as a hold sequence suggestion effect (an effect that suggests the presence or absence of the hold sequence). have. In addition, the holding ream means that when the holding ball that becomes a big hit is moved and displayed in the holding ball display area 1100 (that is, the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the holding ball moved and displayed in the holding ball display area 1100 starts. This means that one or more reserved balls displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 have a reserved ball that is a big hit.

The specific content of the second effect is that when the reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100 (that is, the reserved ball is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100). It is determined by a predetermined lottery when the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the sphere is started). As described above, the specific content of the second effect is not the timing at which the first look-ahead effect is determined (that is, the timing at which the start memory of the reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is acquired). , Determined at the timing when it can be confirmed whether or not there is a reserved ball which is a big hit in one or more reserved balls displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 (that is, when it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a reserved ball). Will be done.

Further, the specific content of the second effect is determined using a predetermined table (character appearance availability determination table). A plurality of character appearance availability determination tables are provided, and one table is selected according to a predetermined process. In the predetermined process, the details will be described later, but one table is selected depending on the case where the suggestion of the reserved sequence is not performed and the case where the suggestion of the reserved sequence is allowed.

In the following, among the plurality of (two in the present embodiment) character appearance possibility determination table, the table selected when the suggestion of the pending sequence is not performed is referred to as a “pending sequence non-notifying character selection table”. Further, the table selected when the suggestion of the pending sequence may be made is referred to as a "pending sequence notification character selection table". Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the characters A, B, C, and D are provided as the predetermined characters.

Next, the character appearance possibility determination table will be described with reference to FIG. 103.

FIG. 103 (a) shows a hold consecutive non-notification character selection table. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), when the reserved continuous non-notifying character selection table is used, one pattern is selected from eight patterns (patterns 1 to 8) by a predetermined lottery. When the reserved ball moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100 is not a hit (when it is lost), one of the patterns 1 to 5 is selected. Further, when the reserved ball moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100 is a hit, one pattern is selected from the patterns 6 to 8.

The “content 1” shown in FIG. 103 (a) indicates that the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is darkened by the first effect. Further, "content 2" indicates which character's effect is displayed on the darkened screen. Further, the "roll" indicates whether or not the character completely appears due to the effect (that is, whether it is an appearance effect or a ghost effect). As shown in FIG. 103 (a), except for the pattern 1, when the result is wrong, the Gase effect is always selected. On the other hand, if the result is a hit, the appearance effect is always selected.

FIG. 103 (b) shows a hold continuous notification character selection table. As shown in FIG. 103 (b), when the hold continuous notification character selection table is used, one pattern is selected from nine patterns (patterns 1 to 9) by a predetermined lottery. When the reserved ball moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100 is not a hit (when it is lost), one of the patterns 1 to 5 is selected. Further, when the reserved ball moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100 is a hit, one pattern is selected from the patterns 6 to 9.

As shown in FIG. 103 (b), when the hold continuous notification character selection table is used, pattern 1 is performed in the same manner as when the hold continuous non-notification character selection table shown in FIG. 103 (a) is used. Except for this, if the result is wrong, the Gase effect is always selected. On the other hand, if the result is a hit, the appearance effect is always selected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the hold continuous notification character selection table defines the pattern 9 as a pattern that can be selected in the case of a hit, unlike the hold continuous non-notification character selection table. In this way, when the pattern 9 is selected in the case where the suggestion of the pending ream may be made, the effect of the character D is displayed, and the character D completely appears by the appearance effect. On the other hand, when the hold-ream non-notification character selection table is used, that is, when the hold-ream is not suggested, the character D does not completely appear due to the appearance effect. As described above, when the character D completely appears in the first look-ahead effect, it is suggested that there is a pending ream.
The production contents of the first effect and the second effect may be determined for both the first effect and the second effect when a hold that is the target of the first look-ahead effect occurs, or may be the target of the first look-ahead effect. The content of the first effect may be determined when the hold occurs, and the content of the second effect may be determined when the variable display of the hold, which is the target of the first look-ahead effect, is performed. Further, after the production contents of the first production and the second production are determined, if the probability change jackpot and the limiter has not been reached, the production contents of the second production may be changed, and the first production and the first production may be changed. 2 After the production content of the production is decided, if there is a probability change jackpot in the hold when the variable display of the hold that is the target of the first look-ahead effect is performed, the content of the second production is changed once, but then the limit is reached. If it is determined that the effect is being performed, the second effect may be executed based on the effect content before the change.

Next, the selection process between the hold continuous notification character selection table and the hold continuous non-notification character selection table will be described with reference to FIG. 104.

The table selection process relating to the character appearance possibility determination table is executed in the effect pattern determination process by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201).

In step S1451, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the first effect of the first look-ahead effect is being executed. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the first effect of the first look-ahead effect is not being executed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1452. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the first effect of the first look-ahead effect is being executed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1453. In addition, "the first effect is being executed" means a pattern other than pattern 0 (for example, pattern 1 etc.) in which the first look-ahead effect is not performed in each darkening start pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (c). Indicates the selected state, and does not ask whether or not the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is actually darkened.

In step S1452, the sub CPU 201 executes the first effect determination process. In the first effect determination process, the darkening start pattern determination table as described above is used to determine whether or not to execute the first effect, and if it is determined to execute the first effect, the first effect is determined. Determines the timing at which is started (the timing at which the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is darkened). When the sub CPU 201 executes the first effect determination process, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect pattern determination process.

In step S1453, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hold related to the execution of the first effect is the current variation. That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is being displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hold related to the execution of the first effect is the current variation, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1454. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the hold related to the execution of the first effect is not the current variation, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect pattern determination process.

In step S1454, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a big hit of the hit type of the hit type. In addition, the big hit of the hit type is the big hit of the hit operation, and the corresponding symbol is the big hit of 4R (normal) of the special figure 2. That is, a big hit whose hit type is a hit operation is a big hit that shifts from a JAC game (probability change / time saving state) to an EX game (non-probability change / time saving state) after the big hit game. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a big hit of the hit type, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1455. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the holding ball displayed in the holding ball display area 1200 does not have a big hit of the hit type, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1456.

In step S1456, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a big hit of a specific type (hit type is JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3). The big hit with the hit type of JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3 is the big hit with the corresponding symbol of 4R (probability variation), 6R (probability variation), or 8R (probability variation) of the special figure 2. That is, the jackpot whose hit type is JAC1, JAC2, or JAC3 is a jackpot in which the JAC game (probability change / time saving state) continues after the jackpot game. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 does not have a jackpot of a specific type, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1455. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a jackpot of a specific type, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1457.

In step S1457, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the limit has been reached (whether or not the number of continuations is the 10th big hit) based on the result of the hit determination of the symbol corresponding to the reserved ball that is the target of the first look-ahead effect. judge. That is, whether or not the sub CPU 201 shifts from the JAC game (probability change / time saving state) to the EX game (non-probability change / time saving state) after the end of the big hit game by the big hit of the reserved ball that is the target of the first look-ahead effect. To judge. If the sub CPU 201 determines that the limit has not been reached, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1458. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the limit has been reached, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1455.

In step S1458, the sub CPU 201 is the specific content of the second effect of the first look-ahead effect (more specifically, the specific content of the second effect when the pending ream may be suggested). Select the hold continuous notification character selection table as the character appearance availability determination table for determining. The sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1459 after the process of step S1458.

Further, (when the sub CPU 201 determines in step S1454 that there is a big hit of 4R (normal) of special figure 2 in the hold, or in step S1456, the sub CPU 201 is in the hold of 4R (probability change) of special figure 2 etc. In step S1455 (shifted when it is determined that there is no big hit or when it is determined that the sub CPU 201 has reached the limit in step S1457), the sub CPU 201 is the specific of the second effect of the first look-ahead effect. A hold-ream non-notification character selection table is selected as a character appearance availability determination table for determining various contents (more specifically, specific contents of the second effect when the hold-ream suggestion is not performed). The sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1459 after the process of step S1455.

In step S1459, the sub CPU 201 executes the second effect determination process. In the second effect determination process, the hold continuous notification character selection table selected in step S1458 or the hold continuous non-notification character selection table selected in step S1455 as described above is used to specify the second effect. Determine the content. When the sub CPU 201 executes the second effect determination process, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect pattern determination process.

As described above, in the effect pattern determination process, when the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a big hit which is a collision operation (YES in step S1454), or when the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a big hit after the big hit game, JAC If there is no big hit of JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3 where the game (probability change / time saving state) continues (NO in step S1456), or if the limit is reached (YES in step S1457), suggestion of hold ream is given. Is not desirable (or unnecessary), so the reserved continuous non-notification character selection table is selected to determine the specific content of the second effect among the first look-ahead effects.

On the other hand, when the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200 does not have a big hit which is a collision operation (NO in step S1454), and the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a big hit after the big hit game (probability change / time saving state). ) Continues If there is a big hit of JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3 (YES in step S1456) and the limit has not been reached (NO in step S1457), there is no problem even if the suggestion of the pending ream is given. , The hold continuous notification character selection table is selected, and the specific content of the second effect of the first look-ahead effect is determined.

Next, an example of the specific content of the first look-ahead effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106.

First, as a premise, it is assumed that the current situation is during the JAC game and the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, as shown in FIG. 105 (a). Also, assume that the next jackpot does not reach the limit. Further, it is assumed that two reserved balls are displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 (the first reserved ball display area 1201 and the second reserved ball display area 1202). Further, it is assumed that both of these two reserved balls are lost.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 105 (a), when the starting opening is won, the reserved ball is displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 as shown in FIG. 105 (b). Here, it is assumed that the reserved ball displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 is a big hit.

For convenience, in the state shown in FIG. 105 (b), the reserved sphere displayed in the third reserved sphere display area 1203 (that is, the reserved sphere of the big hit) is referred to as "one reserved sphere per hit". Further, the reserved ball displayed in the first reserved ball display area 1201 is referred to as "reserved ball 1". Further, the reserved ball displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202 is referred to as "reserved ball 2". Further, in order to make it easy to identify these reserved balls on the drawing, marks (“1”, “2”, “this 1”) are added in the reserved balls.

Further, in the following, when one reserved ball is displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203, it is assumed that the first look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern.

In such a case, since the reserved ball corresponding to the first look-ahead effect is first displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203, the darkening start pattern determination table shown in FIG. 102 (b) is used to display the first look-ahead effect. The specific content of the first production is determined. Here, it is assumed that pattern 1 is selected from a plurality of patterns defined in the darkening start pattern determination table shown in FIG. 102 (b) by a predetermined lottery.

After a predetermined period has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 105 (b), the state shown in FIG. 105 (c) is reached. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 105 (c), the variable display of the identification symbol is stopped at the lost symbol.

After the state shown in FIG. 105 (c), the state shown in FIG. 105 (d) is obtained. Specifically, the reserved ball 1 displayed in the first reserved ball display area 1201 is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100. Along with this, the identification symbol corresponding to the reserved ball 1 is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the reserved ball 2 displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202 is moved and displayed in the first reserved ball display area 1201. Further, one reserved ball displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 is moved and displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202.

Here, since one reserved ball displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 is moved and displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202, it is defined in the darkening start pattern determination table shown in FIG. 102 (b). According to the pattern 1, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is darkened. As a result, on the screen, only the three identification symbols, the reserved ball display area 1100 and the reserved ball display area 1200 are visible.

After a predetermined period has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 105 (d), the state shown in FIG. 105 (e) is reached. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 105 (e), the variable display of the identification symbol corresponding to the reserved ball 1 is stopped at the lost symbol.

After the state shown in FIG. 105 (e), the state shown in FIG. 105 (f) is obtained. Specifically, the reserved ball 2 displayed in the first reserved ball display area 1201 is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100. Along with this, the identification symbol corresponding to the reserved ball 2 is displayed in a variable manner. Further, one reserved ball displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202 is moved and displayed in the first reserved ball display area 1201. Further, the darkening of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is continued according to the pattern 1 defined in the darkening start pattern determination table shown in FIG. 102 (b).

Further, in this state, for example, when two game balls win a prize in the starting opening, as shown in FIG. 105 (f), a new reserved ball (referred to as "reserved ball 3") is set in the second reserved ball display area 1202. Is displayed, and similarly, a new reserved ball (referred to as “winning 2 reserved balls”) is displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203. Here, it is assumed that the new reserved ball displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 is a big hit. Thus, in the state shown in FIG. 105 (f), one reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100 is a big hit, and one or a plurality of reserved balls displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200. Since there is a big hit holding ball in, it will be in the state of holding ream (in this case, it is a condition that the limit number of times has not been reached when a big hit is generated by the winning 2 holding balls).

After a predetermined period has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. 105 (f), the state shown in FIG. 105 (g) is reached. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 105 (g), the variable display of the identification symbol corresponding to the holding ball 2 is stopped at the lost symbol.

After the state shown in FIG. 105 (g), the state shown in FIG. 105 (h) is obtained. Specifically, the 2 reserved balls displayed in the 3rd reserved ball display area 1203 are moved and displayed in the 2nd reserved ball display area 1202. Further, the reserved ball 3 displayed in the second reserved ball display area 1202 is moved and displayed in the first reserved ball display area 1201.

Further, one reserved ball displayed in the first reserved ball display area 1201 is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100. Along with this, the identification symbol corresponding to one reserved ball per hit is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the three identification symbols are moved to the upper left portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 and are displayed in a variable size with a reduced size. In this way, a space for a predetermined effect (specifically, a second effect) is secured in the center of the screen.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 105 (h), that is, when the current reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100, the character appearance availability determination table shown in FIG. 103 is displayed. Is used to determine the specific content of the second effect of the first look-ahead effect. Here, it is assumed that the pattern 9 defined in the hold continuous notification character selection table shown in FIG. 103 (b) is selected.

In this way, in the state shown in FIG. 105 (h), when the pattern 9 defined in the hold continuous notification character selection table is selected, the first effect ends and the second effect starts with the screen dimmed. , As shown in FIGS. 106 (a) and 106 (b), an effect (EF) composed of high-brightness light particles is displayed on the darkened screen. Then, the appearance (process) of the character D gradually appearing as the grains gather is displayed. Then, in the state shown in FIG. 106 (c), the character D appears completely by the effect, and the darkening of the screen is eliminated. In this way, the appearance effect in the second effect of the first look-ahead effect is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the character D appears due to the appearance effect is limited to the case where there is a hold ream. That is, when the character D appears due to the appearance effect, it is possible to suggest a hold ream to the player.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first effect ends, the darkened screen is displayed, and when the second effect starts, the effect (EF) is displayed on the darkened screen. It is a thing. As described above, the effect mode when the first effect ends and the effect mode when the second effect starts are substantially the same effect mode. In this way, the first look-ahead effect includes a first effect of darkening the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 and a second effect of making a predetermined character appear on the screen darkened by the first effect by using an effect. By combining them, it is possible to suggest a pending sequence without causing a sense of discomfort in the connection between the first effect and the second effect. In this way, by performing an effect by combining light particles with high brightness with respect to black color (that is, an effect related to each other, that is, an effect of the first effect that makes the effect content of the second effect shine), the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of the person.

In the state shown in FIG. 106 (c), the variation display of the identification symbol corresponding to one reserved ball per hit is stopped at the jackpot symbol.

In this way, using FIGS. 105 (a) to 106 (c), an example of the specific content of the first look-ahead effect when the appearance effect in the second effect of the first look-ahead effect is executed has been described. Next, an example of specific contents of the first look-ahead effect will be described when the Gase effect in the second effect of the first look-ahead effect is executed.

Here, it is assumed that the reserved ball (referred to as “lost reserved ball”) newly displayed in the third reserved ball display area 1203 shown in FIG. 105 (f) is lost. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 105 (h), that is, when the lost reserved ball targeted for the first look-ahead effect is moved and displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100, the reserved continuous ball shown in FIG. 103 (a) is not displayed. It is assumed that the pattern 5 specified in the notification character selection table is selected.

In this case, up to the state shown in FIG. 106 (b), the same image as when the appearance effect in the second effect of the first look-ahead effect is executed is displayed. That is, an effect (EF) composed of high-brightness light particles is displayed on the darkened screen. Then, the appearance (process) of the character D gradually appearing as the grains gather is displayed. However, after the state shown in FIG. 106 (b), as shown in FIG. 106 (d), the character D does not completely appear (erased in the middle of appearance) due to the scattering of light particles (effects). (Gase production) is displayed.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 106 (d), the variation display of the identification symbol corresponding to the lost holding ball is stopped at the lost symbol.

[Second look-ahead production]
Hereinafter, the second look-ahead effect will be described.

The second look-ahead effect is an effect performed when there is a pending ream of the 8R (probability change) of Special Figure 2. Specifically, in the second look-ahead effect, the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1100 has two 8R (probability variation) jackpots in the special figure 2, and the limit is set for any jackpot reserved ball. If it does not reach, JAC3 is displayed at the time of the first 8R (probability change) big hit, giving the player the impression that 16R probability change has occurred.

In the second look-ahead effect, the effect is performed as if the end of the big hit of 8R (probability change) in the first set and the start of the big hit of 8R (probability change) in the second set continue. In this way, when the second look-ahead effect is performed, the impression that the big hit of 8R (probability change) in the first set and the big hit of 8R (probability change) in the second set are continuous (series) (that is, 16R (probability change)). ) Can give the player the impression of being a big hit).

In addition, in this embodiment, it may be referred to as a state in which there is a big hit (hit type is JAC3) of 8R (probability variation) of two special figures 2 (hereinafter, "a state in which a second look-ahead effect can be performed". ), And when the second look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern, even if another lost hold ball is displayed between the two 8R (probability change) hold balls. Perform a second look-ahead effect. However, even when the second look-ahead effect is available and the second look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern, a small hit is held between the two 8R (probability change) hold balls. If the sphere is displayed, the second look-ahead effect is not performed.

First, before explaining the production flow of the second look-ahead effect, when the second look-ahead effect is not performed, the effect of the 8R (probability variation) jackpot (hit type is JAC1) in Special Figure 2 is produced. I will explain the flow.

Note that FIG. 107 is an effect flow of a big hit effect (hit type is JAC1) of 8R (probability variation) of the special figure 2 when the second look-ahead effect is not performed. In the following, the jackpot effect may be referred to as "normal 8R (probability variation) jackpot effect".

As shown in FIG. 107, when the 8R (probability variation) symbol of the special figure 2 is confirmed, the 8R (probability variation) jackpot game is started. When the big hit game is started, the OP production period is first performed, and the opening (OP) production is performed. In the OP production, the production is performed to notify the player that the big hit game will be started from now on. Specifically, for example, the player is notified that the large prize opening 540 will be opened, and an effect is performed that raises the player's expectations regarding the acquisition of the prize ball.

When the OP production is completed, the next big hit round period is reached, and the round continuous production is started. In the round continuation effect, for example, for each round, an effect is performed to notify the player that the round game will continue. Further, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays the current number of rounds (1R, 2R, ..., 8R).

When the round continuous production is completed, the ending (ED) production period is next, and the ending (ED) production is started. In the first ED production, the player is notified that the jackpot game is finished, and the player is notified that the JAC game is to be continued. The ED production ends at the same time as the end of the big hit game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, the effect flow of the jackpot effect when the second look-ahead effect is performed will be described.

Note that FIG. 108 is an effect flow of the big hit effect when the second look-ahead effect is performed. In FIG. 108, the production flow of the first set (first big hit game) and the production flow of the second set (second big hit game) are described separately in the upper and lower stages. In the following, in the jackpot effect when the second look-ahead effect is performed, the description of the effect content similar to the normal 8R (probability variation) jackpot effect will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 108, when the 8R (probability variation) symbol of the special figure 2 is confirmed, the 8R (probability variation) jackpot game is started. In the present embodiment, the hit type when the second look-ahead effect is performed is JAC3, and "V" is displayed as a big hit symbol (icon) (see FIG. 96 and the like). When the jackpot game of the first set is started, the OP production period is first set, and the OP production of the first set is performed. In the OP production of the first set, the production is performed to notify the player that the big hit game will be started from now on.

When the OP production of the first set is completed, the next big hit round period is reached, and the continuous production of the first set is started. Further, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays the current number of rounds (1R, 2R, ..., 8R).

When the round continuation production of the first set is completed, the ending (ED) production period is next, and the ED production of the first set is started. In the first set of ED effects, unlike the normal 8R (probability change) jackpot effect, the player is not notified that the jackpot game ends or the JAC game continues. The ED effect of the first set ends at the same time as the end of the big hit game, like the normal 8R (probability change) big hit effect. In the above-described embodiment, the ED effect is performed after the first set is completed, but the ED effect may not be performed. In that case, the player can be given the feeling that the first set and the second set are as if they were one big hit.

When the jackpot game of the first set is completed, a hold continuous effect (referred to as a "series hold continuous effect" for convenience) is then performed as a changing effect. Here, the series of hold continuous effects is a line for the lost hold ball displayed before the second 8R (probability change) hold ball and the second 8R (probability change) hold ball. It is a production that is done. In the series of hold continuous production, the symbol corresponding to the reserved ball of the loss is displayed in a small size, so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the fluctuation display and the fluctuation stop of the symbol.

In addition, in the series of hold continuous production, the 8R (probability variation) symbol of the second set of special figure 2 is fixed. Here, as in the first set, "V" is displayed as the big hit symbol (icon) of the second set.

In this way, when the big hit game of the second set is started, the OP production period is first set, and the OP production of the second set is performed. Note that, unlike the OP effect of the first set, the OP effect of the second set does not perform the effect of notifying the player that the big hit game will start from now on.

When the OP production of the second set is completed, the next big hit round period is reached, and the continuous production of the second set is started. Further, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays the number of rounds (9R, 10R, ..., 16R) in which 8 is added to the actual number of rounds as the current number of rounds.

When the second set of round continuation effects is completed, the ending (ED) effect period is reached and the second set of ED effects is started. In the second set of ED effects, unlike the first set of ED effects, the player is notified that the jackpot game ends and the JAC game continues. The ED production of the second set ends at the same time as the end of the big hit game of the second set.

In this way, in the second look-ahead effect, it seems as if the end of the big hit of 8R (probability change) in the first set and the start of the big hit of 8R (probability change) in the second set are continued by a series of hold continuous effects. The production is done. In this way, when the second look-ahead effect is performed, the impression that the big hit of 8R (probability change) in the first set and the big hit of 8R (probability change) in the second set are continuous (series) (that is, 16R (probability change)). ) Can give the player the impression of being a big hit).

Here, as described above, when the second look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern in a state where the second look-ahead effect can be performed, another 8R (probability variation) reserved ball is placed between the two 8R (probability change) reserved balls. Even if the reserved ball of loss is displayed, the second look-ahead effect is performed. However, even when the second look-ahead effect is available and the second look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern, a small hit hold ball is placed between the two 8R (probability change) hold balls. If is displayed, the second look-ahead effect is not performed.

Therefore, in the following, a process of determining whether or not to actually perform the second look-ahead effect when the second look-ahead effect can be performed by using the flowchart of FIG. 109 (execution of the second look-ahead effect). The determination process) will be described.

The second look-ahead effect execution determination process shown in FIG. 109 is performed in the effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 94 (a)) by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201) as described above.

In step S1461, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the second look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern. The selection of the second look-ahead effect is determined based on the special figure variation pattern designation command, which is data indicating the variation pattern determined by the main CPU 101, the stop symbol, the extracted random number value for effect determination, and the like. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the second look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1462. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the second look-ahead effect is not selected as the effect pattern, the sub CPU 201 ends the second look-ahead effect execution determination process.

In step S1462, the sub CPU 201 has a small hit on the left side (previous) of the large hit (hit type is JAC3) of 8R of the special figure 2 in the plurality of reserved balls displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200. It is determined whether or not there is a reserved ball (hit type is S-JAC). When the sub CPU 201 determines that there is no small hit reserved ball on the left side (previous) of the 8R large hit reserved ball in FIG. 2, the process is transferred to step S1463. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reserved ball for the small hit is on the left side (previous) of the reserved ball for the big hit of 8R in FIG. 2, the process is transferred to step S1464.

In step S1463, the sub CPU 201 decides to actually perform the selected second look-ahead effect. After that, the sub CPU 201 ends the second look-ahead effect execution determination process.

Further, in step S1464, the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected second look-ahead effect is not actually performed. In this case, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the second look-ahead effect, but performs the jackpot effect of 8R (probability variation) of the special figure 2 (the hit type is JAC1) (see FIG. 107). After that, the sub CPU 201 ends the second look-ahead effect execution determination process.

Even when the second look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern in a state where the second look-ahead effect can be performed by such processing, between the two 8R (probability change) reserved balls. When the reserved ball of the small hit is displayed, the second look-ahead effect can be stopped.

Here, for example, in the case where the second look-ahead effect is performed, it is assumed that a small hit holding ball is displayed between two 8R (probability variation) holding balls. In such a case, by performing a small hit game, it is possible to produce an effect as if the end of the big hit of 8R (probability change) in the first set and the start of the big hit of 8R (probability change) in the second set continue. I can't. That is, when a small hit game is performed, it is possible to give the player the impression that the big hit of 8R (probability variation) in the first set and the big hit of 8R (probability variation) in the second set are continuous (series). The inconvenience of not being able to occur occurs.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even when the second look-ahead effect is selected as the effect pattern in a state where the second look-ahead effect can be performed, between the two 8R (probability change) reserved balls. By stopping the second look-ahead effect when the small hit hold ball is displayed, the above-mentioned inconvenience is prevented when the second look-ahead effect is performed. ..
In addition, in the above example, an example in which two big hits including the hold ream are executed is shown, but a maximum of four hold may be an 8R probability variable big hit, and in that case, it is possible to display up to 40R. Is.
In the above example, the ED effect was performed at the end of the 8R jackpot of the first set, but the ED effect was not performed, and the effect was continued immediately before the end of the 8Rth, and even after the 9Rth. You may try to continue. However, in that case, since there is a time of loss fluctuation in the middle and the OP time of the 8R jackpot in the second set, it is possible to display "Preparing to start R" between 8R and 9R in the production. desirable. Further, it is desirable that the lottery value is set so that a short one can be easily selected as the loss fluctuation pattern in the JAC game. However, if a long-time fluctuation pattern is determined in the loss fluctuation pattern, preparation may take a long time, so the loss fluctuation time between the first set and the second set is also pre-read and long. In some cases, the second look-ahead effect may not be executed. Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern is less than the predetermined time (for example, less than 5 seconds), the second look-ahead is permitted and JAC3 is displayed, and the fluctuation pattern for the predetermined time or more (for example, 5 seconds or more, the fluctuation corresponding to the loss reach) is displayed. When (time, etc.), the second production is prohibited.
Further, in the above example, when there is a small hit between the 8R big hit of the first set and the 8R big hit of the second set, the second look-ahead effect is not performed, but it may be performed. In that case, 1R to 8R are executed in the 8R jackpot of the first set, then the 9Rth on the production is executed in the small hit executed before the 8R jackpot of the second set, and then the 8R jackpot of the second set is executed. In the production, 10R to 17R may be executed. Further, if there are two small hits in the middle, 11R to 18R may be executed in the second set of 8R big hits.
In the above-described embodiment, the probabilistic change / time saving state is given as an example of the specific game, and the non-probability change / time saving state is given as an example of the non-specific game, but various other examples can be given. For example, as an example of a specific game, a probable change / time saving state or a non-probable change / time saving state may be used, and as an example of a non-specific game, a non-probable change / time saving state may be used. Further, as an example of the specific game, a non-probable change / time saving state may be used, and a non-probable change / time saving state may be used as a non-specific game.

[Holding consecutive suggestion production during small hit]
In the following, the hold-ream suggestion effect performed during the small hit game will be described.

The hold continuous suggestion effect performed during the small hit game suggests that the hold ball displayed in the hold ball display area 1200 has a specific type of big hit when the small hit game is performed in the JAC game. It is a production to do. In the present embodiment, the specific type of jackpot means a jackpot whose hit type is JAC1, JAC2, or JAC3. In other words, the specific type of jackpot means a jackpot that does not shift to the EX game (non-probability change / time saving state) (probability change / time saving state continues) when the big hit game ends in the JAC game. The hold continuous suggestion effect is performed using the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.

Hereinafter, the screen (layout) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 while the small hit game is being executed during the JAC game will be described with reference to FIG. 110.

As shown in FIG. 110, a plurality of display areas are provided in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in order to display various effects (information). Specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided with a JAC symbol display area 1010, a JAC number display area 1004, and a prize ball number display area 1013.

The JAC symbol display area 1010 and the JAC number display area 1004 are the same as the screen (layout) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 while the jackpot game shown in FIG. 98 is being executed. Is omitted. The icon "S-JAC" is displayed in the JAC symbol display area 1010 to notify that the hit type of the hit game is a small hit.

The prize ball number display area 1013 is a display area for displaying the number of prize balls acquired in the small hit game. For example, when one game ball wins in the large winning opening 540 in the small hit game, "+10" indicating the number of the one prize ball is displayed in the prize ball number display area 1013. The "+10" displayed in the prize ball number display area 1013 is erased after a predetermined period has elapsed. When a plurality of game balls are won, the same number of "+10" as the number of winning game balls is displayed.

Further, the prize ball number display area 1013 is composed of a plurality of display areas. In the present embodiment, the prize ball number display area 1013 is referred to as a first prize ball number display area 1013a, a second prize ball number display area 1013b, a third prize ball number display area 1013c, and a fourth prize ball number display area 1013d. It consists of four display areas.

The first prize ball number display area 1013a is a left central portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 and is provided below the JAC symbol display area 1010. Further, the second prize ball number display area 1013b is provided in the right center portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 and below the JAC number display area 1004. Further, the third prize ball number display area 1013c is provided at the lower right of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16. Further, the fourth prize ball number display area 1013d is an upper center portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 and is provided between the JAC symbol display area 1010 and the JAC number display area 1004.

Further, in the first prize ball number display area 1013a, the second prize ball number display area 1013b, the third prize ball number display area 1013c, and the fourth prize ball number display area 1013d, a game ball was awarded to the large winning opening 540. "+10" is displayed in order. Specifically, when the game ball first wins after the small hit game is started, "+10" is displayed in the first prize ball number display area 1013a. Further, when the game ball is won next time, "+10" is displayed in the second prize ball number display area 1013b. Further, when the game ball is won next time, "+10" is displayed in the third prize ball number display area 1013c. Further, when the game ball is won next time, "+10" is displayed in the fourth prize ball number display area 1013d. Further, when the game ball is won next time, the order is returned to the first prize ball number display area 1013a.

Note that FIG. 110 shows an example of a display when two game balls win a prize in the open large winning opening 540 after the small hit game is started. That is, in the example of the display shown in FIG. 110, after the small hit game is started, "+10" is displayed in the first prize ball number display area 1013a corresponding to the first prize-winning game ball, and then the prize is won. "+10" is displayed in the second prize ball number display area 1013b corresponding to the game ball.

Hereinafter, the specific content of the pending continuous suggestion effect performed using the prize ball number display area 1013 of the liquid crystal display device 16 will be described. In addition, the hold continuous suggestion effect described below means that when a small hit occurs during the JAC game and the probability variation big hit is described in the hold, the JAC game continues after the big hit ends.

Explaining the specific contents of the effect, as shown in FIG. 111, the hold continuous suggestion effect is an effect of changing the color of “+10” displayed in the prize ball number display area 1013 of the liquid crystal display device 16. Specifically, when the hold continuous suggestion effect is performed, the color of "+10" displayed in the prize ball number display area 1013 of the liquid crystal display device 16 is normally white (when the hold continuous suggestion effect is not performed). Unlike, it is golden. In this way, when the hold ream suggestion effect is performed, the player can recognize that there is a hold ream by visually recognizing the golden "+10" displayed in the prize ball number display area 1013.

In this way, when a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540 during a small hit game, the number of prize balls is displayed according to the winning, and the color of the displayed characters is different from the normal one. It can suggest existence.

Here, as described above, when there is a hold ream, the hold ream suggestion effect is performed without shifting to the EX game (non-probability change / time saving state) when the big hit game ends in the JAC game (probability change / time saving state). When there is a big hit holding ball (the time saving state continues). That is, in the present embodiment, even if the hold sequence can be performed by executing the predetermined process, the hold sequence suggestion effect is not performed unless the predetermined condition is further satisfied. In the present embodiment, the process of whether or not to perform the hold continuous suggestion effect is a process of determining whether or not to display the number of prize balls in the small hit game in the prize ball number display area 1013 (hereinafter, "small"). It is included in (referred to as "winning game prize ball number display processing").

Hereinafter, the small hit game prize ball number display process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 112.

The small hit game prize ball number display process shown in FIG. 112 is performed in the effect pattern determination process by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201) as described above.

In step S1471, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the small hit game is in progress. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the small hit game is in progress, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1472. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the small hit game is not in progress, the sub CPU 201 ends the small hit game prize ball number display process.

In step S1472, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 540. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 540, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1473. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not been won in the large prize opening 540, the sub CPU 201 ends the small hit game prize ball number display process.

In this way, when the small hit game is not in progress (NO in step S1471) or when the game ball is not won in the large winning opening 540 (NO in step S1472), the prize ball in the small hit game is won. Therefore, the prize balls (“+10”) are not displayed in the prize ball number display area 1013 of the liquid crystal display device 16.

Next, in step S1473, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a big hit of a specific type (hit type is JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3). The big hit with the hit type of JAC1, JAC2 or JAC3 is the big hit with the corresponding symbol of 4R (probability variation), 6R (probability variation), or 8R (probability variation) of the special figure 2. That is, the jackpot whose hit type is JAC1, JAC2, or JAC3 is a jackpot in which the JAC game (probability change / time saving state) continues after the jackpot game. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 does not have a jackpot of a specific type, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1476. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a specific type of jackpot, the process shifts to step S1474.

In step S1474, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a big hit of the hit type of the hit type. In addition, the big hit of the hit type is the big hit of the hit operation, and the corresponding symbol is the big hit of 4R (normal) of the special figure 2. That is, a big hit whose hit type is a hit operation is a big hit that shifts from a JAC game (probability change / time saving state) to an EX game (non-probability change / time saving state) after the big hit game. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the holding ball displayed in the holding ball display area 1200 has a big hit of the hit type, the process is transferred to step S1476. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the holding ball displayed in the holding ball display area 1200 does not have a big hit of the hit type, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1475.

In step S1475, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the jackpot in hold has reached the limit. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the limit has been reached, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1476. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the limit has not been reached, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1477.

In step S1476, the sub CPU 201 displays the number of prize balls in the prize ball number display area 1013 of the liquid crystal display device 16, and sets the color of the displayed characters (“+10”) to white. That is, in the small hit game prize ball number display process this time, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the hold continuous suggestion effect.

In this way, when the process of step S1476 is performed, it is the case where the small hit game is in progress (YES in step S1471) and the game ball is won in the large winning opening 540 (YES in step S1472). However, the case where the reserved ball does not have a big hit in which the JAC game (probability change / time saving state) continues after the big hit game (NO in step S1473) is included. In such a case, since there is no hold ream in the first place, the hold ream is not performed.

Further, when the process of step S1476 is performed, it is the case that the small hit game is in progress (YES in step S1471) and the game ball is won in the large winning opening 540 (YES in step S1472). The case where the holding ball has a big hit of the hit type and the hit operation (YES in step S1474) is included. In such a case, when the next big hit is made, the player will fall from the JAC game (probability change / time saving state) (that is, a big hit that is relatively disadvantageous to the player is made, and the player's Do not hold a ream (because it will reduce the interest).

Next, in step S1477, the sub CPU 201 displays the number of prize balls in the prize ball number display area 1013 of the liquid crystal display device 16, and sets the color of the displayed characters (“+10”) to gold. That is, in the small hit game prize ball number display process this time, the sub CPU 201 performs a hold continuous suggestion effect.

In this way, when the process of step S1477 is performed, it is the case that the small hit game is in progress (YES in step S1471) and the game ball is won in the large winning opening 540 (YES in step S1472). In addition, when the reserved ball has a big hit in which the JAC game (probability change / time saving state) continues after the big hit game (YES in step S1473), and there is no big hit in the hit type of the reserved ball (step S1474). NO), and the case where the current state has not reached the limit and the JAC game is in progress (probability change / time saving state) (NO in step S1475) is included. In such a case, there is a hold ream, and even if the hold ream suggestion effect is performed, the player's interest is not reduced, so the hold ream is performed. In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the player when the hold-ream suggestion effect is performed.
If step S1475 is affirmative, it is always gold, but a lottery may be added thereto. Further, the color may be changed even when there is a small hit in the hold during the small hit. In that case, red may be used as the color indicating the small hit ream instead of gold. In addition, when adding a lottery as described above, it may be decided from either white, red, or gold when there is a big hit in the hold, and in the case of 4R probability change, white is likely to be decided. , In the case of 6R probability change, it is easy to determine red. In the case of 8R probability variation, a large amount of money may be easily determined.

[Game evaluation processing]
Hereinafter, the game evaluation process in the JAC game will be described.

First, the game evaluation process in the JAC game will be described with reference to FIG. 113. In the game evaluation process, the game played by the player during the JAC game is evaluated based on a predetermined standard described later. The game evaluation process is performed in the effect control process of step S1104 shown in FIG. The game evaluation process is performed when the limit is reached and when the limit is not reached, when the player falls.

In step S1501, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the rank point of the game count. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the rank points of the game count based on the rank point determination table of the game count shown in FIG. 114. The game count (during the JAC game) is the total number of fluctuation displays performed from the start of the current JAC game to the end of the probability change. Further, the rank point of the game count means a score indicating an evaluation made according to the numerical value of the game count.

FIG. 114 shows a table that defines ranks and rank points for game counts. In the table shown in FIG. 114, ranks and rank points are defined according to the game count during the JAC game. The ranks are classified into 4 stages (S, A, B, C), and the evaluation is highest in the order of S, A, B, C. Rank points are also classified into 4 levels (4 points, 3 points, 2 points, 1 point), and the evaluation is high in descending order of numbers (4 points, 3 points, 2 points, 1 point). It is a thing. Ranks and rank points correspond to each other, and rank S is given 4 rank points, rank A is given 3 rank points, rank B is given 2 rank points, and rank C is given 1 rank point.

In the rank point determination table of the game count shown in FIG. 114, when the game count is 199 or less, rank S and 4 rank points are given, and when the game count is 200 to 239, rank A and 3 rank points are given. When the game count is 240 to 299, rank B and 2 rank points are given, and when the game count is 300 or more, rank C and 1 rank point are given. That is, the table shown in FIG. 114 is defined so that the smaller the game count, the higher the rank and rank points.

In addition, the game count is cleared when the game shifts to the non-probability change / time saving state (that is, when the limit is reached or when the game falls due to the big hit of 8R (normal) in FIG. 2). The higher the game count, the lower the evaluation. Therefore, unlike the JAC number described later, even if the game is pulled back in the EX game, the count starts from 0. In that case, since the number of games is small and the number of JACs is likely to be large, the rank is likely to be high at the time of pulling back, so that it is possible to improve the interest in pulling back to the player.

In addition, the game count when the player falls on the way and does not reach the limit is fictitious by a numerical value calculated based on the following formula.
{(Game count at the time of falling) / (Number of big hits)} x 10

In other words, if you fall in the middle and the limit is not reached, the average value of the game count taken until the fall is calculated for one big hit, and the limit is not reached by the numerical value assuming that the big hit is hit 10 times. It mimics the game count when it arrives. The number of big hits in the above formula does not include the big hits that have fallen.

For example, if the game count at the time of a fall is 100 and the number of big hits is 4, the game count is fictitious as (100/4) × 10 = 250. Then, by applying the fictitious game count 250 to the table of FIG. 114, rank B and two rank points are given. That is, if the game count 100 at the time of the fall is applied to the table of FIG. 114 as it is, rank S and 4 rank points will be given, but the game count will naturally be smaller at the time of the fall than at the time of reaching the limiter. Therefore, the rank and rank points are corrected by using the game count imitated as described above so as not to give an unreasonably high evaluation at the time of a fall.
In addition, during the JAC game, the game evaluation result is also displayed when the 4R (normal) of the special figure 2 is won or when the game ball does not pass through the specific area in the probability variation symbol (the symbol which easily passes through the specific area). .. In the present embodiment, since the 4R (normal) of the special figure 2 is a bumping operation and the jackpot period is short, the game evaluation result may be displayed from the jackpot.

When the sub CPU 201 finishes this process, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1502.

In step S1502, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the rank point of the number of JACs. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the rank points of the JAC number based on the rank point determination table of the JAC number shown in FIG. 115. The number of JACs refers to the number of times that the big winning opening 540 is opened in the big hit game and the small hit game after the start of the current JAC game and before the end of the probability change. Further, the rank point of the JAC number means a score indicating an evaluation made according to the numerical value of the JAC number.

FIG. 115 shows a table that defines ranks and rank points regarding the number of JACs. In the table shown in FIG. 115, ranks and rank points are defined according to the number of JACs. The ranks are classified into 4 stages (S, A, B, C), and the evaluation is highest in the order of S, A, B, C. Rank points are also classified into 4 levels (4 points, 3 points, 2 points, 1 point), and the evaluation is high in descending order of numbers (4 points, 3 points, 2 points, 1 point). It is a thing. Ranks and rank points correspond to each other, and rank S is given 4 rank points, rank A is given 3 rank points, rank B is given 2 rank points, and rank C is given 1 rank point.

In the table shown in FIG. 115, when the number of JACs is 80 or more, rank S and 4 rank points are given, and when the number of JACs is 70 to 79, rank A and 3 rank points are given, and the number of JACs is given. In the case of 60 to 69, rank B and 2 rank points are given, and when the number of JACs is 59 or less, rank C and 1 rank point are given. That is, the table shown in FIG. 115 is defined so that the larger the number of JACs, the higher the rank and rank points.

In addition, the JAC number is cleared when the state shifts to the non-probability change / time saving state (that is, when the limit is reached or when the player falls due to the 8R (normal) jackpot in FIG. 2), and the non-probability change / time saving state is reached. If there is a big hit (pull back) in, the count is continued based on the number of JACs at the time of clearing.

When the sub CPU 201 finishes this process, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1503.

In step S1503, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the rank points of the number of balls acquired during the JAC game. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the rank points of the number of acquired balls in the JAC game based on the rank point determination table of the number of acquired balls shown in FIG. 116. The number of balls won (during the JAC game) refers to the number of balls won from the start of the current JAC game to the end of the probability change. In addition, the rank point of the number of acquired balls means the score indicating the evaluation made according to the numerical value of the number of acquired balls.

FIG. 116 shows a table that defines ranks and rank points regarding the number of balls acquired during the JAC game. In the table shown in FIG. 116, ranks and rank points are defined according to the number of balls acquired during the JAC game. The ranks are classified into 4 stages (S, A, B, C), and the evaluation is highest in the order of S, A, B, C. Rank points are also classified into 4 levels (4 points, 3 points, 2 points, 1 point), and the evaluation is high in descending order of numbers (4 points, 3 points, 2 points, 1 point). It is a thing. Ranks and rank points correspond to each other, and rank S is given 4 rank points, rank A is given 3 rank points, rank B is given 2 rank points, and rank C is given 1 rank point.

In the table shown in FIG. 116, if the number of balls acquired during the JAC game is 5600 or more, rank S and 4 rank points are given, and when the number of balls acquired during the JAC game is 5000 to 5599, rank A is given. , Rank points 3 points are given, and if the number of balls earned in the JAC game is 4200-4999, rank B, 2 rank points are given, and if the number of balls earned in the JAC game is 4199 or less, the rank is given. C, 1 rank point will be awarded. That is, the table shown in FIG. 116 is defined so that the higher the number of balls obtained during the JAC game, the higher the rank and rank points.

It should be noted that the number of balls to be won is cleared when the player shifts to the non-probability change / time saving state (that is, when the limit is reached or when the player falls due to the big hit of 8R (normal) in FIG. 2). If there is a big hit (pull back) in the non-probability change / time saving state, the counting is continued based on the winning balls at the time of clearing, and the total number of winning balls is also counted.

When the sub CPU 201 finishes this process, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1504.

In step S1504, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the overall rank. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines the total rank based on the comprehensive rank determination table shown in FIG. 117.

The overall rank is a rank that comprehensively evaluates the rank points of the game count, the number of JACs, and the number of balls acquired. The sub CPU 201 calculates the total rank points by adding the rank points of the game count, the rank points of the number of JACs, and the rank points of the number of acquired balls determined by steps S1501 to S1503. Then, as shown in FIG. 117, the total rank is determined according to the calculated total rank points.

In the table shown in FIG. 117, when the total rank points are 3 to 4 points, the total rank C is given, and when the total rank points are 5 to 8 points, the total rank B is given and the total rank points are 9 to. If the score is 10 points, the overall rank A is given, and if the total rank points are 11 to 12 points, the overall rank S is given.

For example, assuming that the game count from the start of the current JAC game to the end of the probability change is 224, the number of JACs is 82, and the number of balls acquired is 5615, the rank points related to the game count are 3 points (see FIG. 114). Since the rank points related to the number of JACs are 4 points (see Fig. 115) and the rank points related to the number of balls won are 4 points (see Fig. 116), the total rank points are 11 points, which is the total rank S (Fig. 117).

When the sub CPU 201 ends this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the game evaluation process routine.

In the display control process of step S1105 shown in FIG. 21, the sub CPU 201 performs a control process of displaying the game evaluation result calculated by the game evaluation process shown in FIG. 113. In this process, the sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display a game evaluation result display screen including the game count, the number of JACs, the number of acquired balls, and the total rank determined in step S1504 at the end of the probability change. On the game evaluation result display screen, the total number of balls obtained from entering the time saving state to exiting the time saving state is also displayed.

The sub CPU 201 causes the liquid crystal display device 16 to display a game evaluation result display screen as shown in FIG. 118, for example. On the game evaluation result display screen of FIG. 118, it is displayed that the game count is 224, the number of JACs is 82, the number of acquired balls is 5615, the total rank S, and the total number of balls acquired is 44444.

Even if the sub CPU 201 falls, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays the game evaluation result display screen at that time.

In this way, by showing the player a rank (overall rank) in which various items related to the game such as the game count, the number of JACs, and the number of balls obtained in the JAC game are comprehensively reflected, the player can read about the JAC game. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, the overall rank is calculated so that the higher the game count in the JAC game, the lower the evaluation, and the larger the number of JACs and the number of balls acquired in the JAC game, the higher the evaluation. Therefore, the larger the values of the number of JACs and the number of balls acquired for each game count (variable display), the higher the overall rank. For this reason, if the number of JACs is large despite a small game count (variable display), or if a large number of balls are acquired despite a small game count (variable display), the overall rank will be highly evaluated. .. By incorporating not only the positive evaluation (the number of JACs and the number of balls obtained) but also the negative evaluation (game count) into the evaluation in this way, the efficiency of the game can be evaluated, and the player can evaluate the JAC game. It is possible to improve the interest of.

[Detection of fraud]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a magnetic sensor (not shown) capable of detecting illegal magnetism. The magnetic sensor is provided to detect fraudulent acts using magnets (so-called goto acts). The magnetic sensor is configured to transmit a magnetic detection signal indicating that an illegal magnetism has been detected to the main control circuit 100 when the amount of change in the strength of the magnetic field from the initial state is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value. ing.

[Magnetic sensor initialization process]
The magnetic sensor executes an initialization process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. In the initialization process, the magnetic sensor sets a reference value as a reference for determining whether or not an illegal magnetism is detected.

Hereinafter, a specific description will be given. The magnetic sensor is provided with an initialization terminal capable of inputting a signal (magnetic sensor initialization signal) from the main CPU 101. When the input to the initialization terminal is turned on for 1 second (when the magnetic sensor initialization signal from the main CPU 101 is input for 1 second), the magnetic sensor stores the peripheral magnetic field of the magnetic sensor as the initial state. The detected value in the initial state is set as the initial value.

Then, the magnetic sensor sets a value obtained by adding a predetermined value corresponding to the amount of change in the magnetic field when an illegal act is performed to the set initial value as a reference value. Therefore, if the initial value is large, the reference value is also set to a large value.

[Fraud detection processing]
Next, the fraud detection process will be described with reference to FIG. 120. The fraud detection process shown in FIG. 120 is performed in step S7001 shown in FIG. 27.

As shown in FIG. 120, in step S1511, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the magnetic sensor has detected an illegal magnetism. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that an illegal magnetism has been detected when the magnetic detection signal from the magnetic sensor is received (that is, when the detection value of the magnetic sensor is equal to or higher than the reference value).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the magnetic sensor has detected an incorrect magnetism, the process proceeds to step S1512. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the magnetic sensor has not detected the illegal magnetism, the main CPU 101 ends the fraud detection processing routine.

In step S1512, the main CPU 101 turns on the error status flag. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of turning on the error state flag stored in the main RAM 103. If the error status flag is already on, leave it on. When the main CPU 101 finishes this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1513.

In step S1513, the main CPU 101 performs a notification setting process. In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a notification setting command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 and transmits it to the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200. When this processing is completed, the fraud detection processing routine is terminated.

By the notification setting process of step S1513, the main CPU 101 outputs a signal indicating that an illegal magnetism has been detected to the outside of the gaming machine such as a hall computer via the external terminal board 320. Therefore, the clerk can recognize that fact.

[Main CPU startup process]
Next, the main CPU startup process will be described with reference to FIG. 121. The main CPU startup process shown in FIG. 121 is performed in the initialization process of step S10 shown in FIG. 27.

As shown in FIG. 121, in step S1521, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. In this process, the main CPU 101 makes this determination depending on whether or not a power ON signal is received from the power supply board connected to the power supply switch. When the main CPU 101 determines that the power has been turned on, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1522. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power is not turned on, the main CPU 101 ends the main CPU start processing routine.

The power switch is provided on the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a position where it can be turned ON / OFF by opening the door. When the power switch is turned on, a power ON signal is output from the power supply board connected to the power switch to the main CPU 101, the sub CPU 201, and the payout / emission control circuit 300.

In step S1522, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the weight timer has elapsed. The weight timer of the main CPU 101 is set to a time sufficient to close the door. In the present embodiment, the weight timer of the main CPU 101 is set to 10 seconds. When the main CPU 101 determines that the weight timer has elapsed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1523. On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the weight timer has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 ends the main CPU start processing routine.

As a result, the main CPU 101 goes into a standby state (starts weighting) during the preset weight timer (10 seconds) without performing the processing described later.

In step S1523, the main CPU 101 performs a magnetic sensor initialization signal ON process. In this process, the main CPU 101 outputs a magnetic sensor initialization signal for instructing the magnetic sensor to perform the initialization process (which triggers the magnetic sensor to perform the initialization process) to the initialization terminal of the magnetic sensor for 1 second. .. When the main CPU 101 finishes this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1524.

In step S1524, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process at startup. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1525. The movable piece 7220 driven in a fixed cycle in the above-mentioned game ball distribution device 7200 is managed by the main CPU 101, and the operation is started after the initial setting is executed in this step.

In step S1525, the main CPU 101 performs a transition process to a game-enabled state. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the main CPU start process routine.

[Payout / launch control circuit activation processing]
Next, the payout / launch control circuit activation process will be described with reference to FIG. 122. The payout / launch control circuit activation process shown in FIG. 122 is performed in the initialization process of the payout / launch control circuit 300.

As shown in FIG. 122, in step S1531, the payout / launch control circuit 300 determines whether or not the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. In this process, the payout / emission control circuit 300 makes this determination depending on whether or not a power ON signal is received from the power supply board connected to the power supply switch. When the payout / launch control circuit 300 determines that the power has been turned on, the process proceeds to step S1532. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power is not turned on, the payout / launch control circuit 300 ends the payout / launch control circuit activation processing routine.

In step S1532, the payout / firing control circuit 300 determines whether or not the weight timer has elapsed. The weight timer of the payout / firing control circuit 300 is set to a time longer than the total time of the weight timer (10 seconds) of the main CPU 101 and the output time (1 second) of the magnetic sensor initialization signal. In the present embodiment, the weight timer of the payout / firing control circuit 300 is set to 12 seconds. When the payout / firing control circuit 300 determines that the weight timer has elapsed, the payout / firing control circuit 300 shifts the process to step S1533. On the other hand, when it is determined that the weight timer has not elapsed, the payout / launch control circuit 300 ends the payout / launch control circuit activation processing routine.

As a result, the payout / firing control circuit 300 goes into a standby state (starts weighting) during the preset weight timer (12 seconds) without performing the processing described later.

In step S1533, the payout / launch control circuit 300 performs the initial setting process at the time of activation. In this process, the payout / launch control circuit 300 sets the drive member (motor for performing the operation of paying out the game ball) of the payout device 340 to the initial position. When this process is completed, the payout / launch control circuit 300 shifts the process to step S1534.

In step S1534, the payout / launch control circuit 300 performs a transition process to a game-enabled state. When this process is completed, the payout / launch control circuit 300 ends the payout / launch control circuit activation process routine.

[Sub CPU startup process]
Next, the sub CPU startup process will be described with reference to FIG. 123. The sub CPU activation process shown in FIG. 123 is performed in the initialization process of step S1101 shown in FIG. 21.

As shown in FIG. 123, in step S1541, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. In this process, the sub CPU 201 makes this determination depending on whether or not a power ON signal is received from the power supply board connected to the power supply switch. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the power has been turned on, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1542. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the power is not turned on, the sub CPU 201 ends the sub CPU start processing routine.

In step S1542, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the weight timer has elapsed. The weight timer of the sub CPU 201 is set to a time longer than the total time of the weight timer (10 seconds) of the main CPU 101 and the output time (1 second) of the magnetic sensor initialization signal. In the present embodiment, the weight timer of the sub CPU 201 is set to 12 seconds. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the weight timer has elapsed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1543. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the weight timer has not elapsed, the sub CPU 201 ends the sub CPU start processing routine.

As a result, the sub CPU 201 goes into a standby state (performs a start weight) during the preset weight timer (12 seconds) without performing the process described later.

In step S1543, the sub CPU 201 performs an initial setting process at startup. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a drive operation with the drive members such as the first movable accessory unit (effect device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, and the third movable accessory unit 83 as operation confirmation. After that, set it to the initial position by returning it to the initial position. It should be noted that there is a sensor for position detection at the initial position, and each movable accessory unit is provided with a detected portion corresponding to the detection sensor so that it can detect that the position has returned to the initial position. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1544.

In step S1544, the sub CPU 201 performs a transition process to the game-enabled state. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the sub CPU start process routine.

Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the timing of the initialization process by the magnetic sensor will be described while comparing it with the timing of the initialization process of the payout / emission control circuit 300 and the sub CPU 201.

When the power is turned on, the main CPU 101 outputs the magnetic sensor initialization signal (see step S1523 in FIG. 121) for 1 second after the start-up weight for 10 seconds. When the input of the magnetic sensor initialization signal output from the main CPU 101 is turned on for 1 second, the magnetic sensor stores the ambient magnetic field at that time as the initial state, and sets the detected value in the initial state as the initial value.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on, the sub CPU 201 and the payout / firing control circuit 300 perform the initial setting process after the start weight for 12 seconds. That is, the sub CPU 201 and the payout / emission control circuit 300 perform the initial setting process after the initialization of the magnetic sensor.

Here, assuming that the magnetic sensor initialization process is performed during the initial setting of the sub CPU 201 and the payout / emission control circuit 300, the initial stage of the sub CPU 201 and the payout / emission control circuit 300 at the time of the magnetic sensor initialization process. The peripheral magnetic field of the magnetic sensor may increase depending on the setting (setting to the initial position of the driving member). If this peripheral magnetic field is detected and the initial value of the magnetic sensor is set to a relatively large value, the reference value of the magnetic sensor also becomes a relatively large value accordingly. Then, even if there is a fraudulent act using a magnet and it should be judged that the fraudulent magnetism is originally detected, a situation may occur in which the fraudulent magnetism cannot be detected because it is judged to be below the reference value. In addition, the magnetic sensor is mainly installed so as to detect the lower periphery of the game board such as the starting port, and does not normally occur due to the drive means or the like when the drive member is moving from the upper side to the lower side of the game board. A magnetic field may be generated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the initial setting process of the sub CPU 201 and the payout / emission control circuit 300 is executed at a timing that does not overlap with the initialization process of the magnetic sensor, and the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is performed. Wait and be done. In other words, the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is performed before the initialization process of the sub CPU 201 and the payout / emission control circuit 300. Therefore, the magnetic sensor includes accessories such as the first movable accessory unit (effect device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, and the third movable accessory unit 83, and the drive member (game) of the payout device 340. When all the drive systems such as the motor for paying out the ball are stopped, the peripheral magnetic field at that time is stored as the initial state, and the detected value of the initial state is set as the initial value. ..

Therefore, the initial value of the magnetic sensor is not affected by the magnetic field generated by driving the driving member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the initial value of the magnetic sensor and thus the reference value from being set unreasonably high. Therefore, it is possible to perform appropriate fraud detection.

Further, the weight timer (10 seconds) of the main CPU 101 opens the outer frame and the main body of the pachinko gaming machine, and opens the housing and the front door of the pachislot gaming machine. Since the time is set to be sufficient to close the door or the like when the door or the like is closed, the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is performed in the state where the door is closed (it is considered). Therefore, since the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is performed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the original usage state, appropriate fraud detection can be performed.
The initial setting process may be performed during the period of the wait timer as long as the timing does not overlap with the initialization process of the magnetic sensor.

[Main CPU startup process according to the second embodiment]
Next, the main CPU startup process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 125.

In the main CPU startup process shown in FIG. 125, the processes from steps S1551 to S1554 are the same as the processes from steps S1521 to S1524 shown in FIG. 121.

In step S1555, the main CPU 101 transmits a start command to the sub CPU 201 and the payout / launch control circuit 300. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1556.

In step S1556, the main CPU 101 performs a transition process to a game-enabled state. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the main CPU start process routine according to the second embodiment.

[Disbursement / launch control circuit activation processing according to the second embodiment]
Next, the payout / launch control circuit activation process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 126.

In the payout / launch control circuit activation process shown in FIG. 126, the process of step S1561 is the same as the process of step S1531 shown in FIG. 122.

In step S1562, the payout / firing control circuit 300 determines whether or not a start command from the main CPU 101 has been received. When the payout / launch control circuit 300 determines that the activation command has been received, the process shifts to step S1563. On the other hand, if it is determined that the payout / launch control circuit 300 has not received the start command, the payout / launch control circuit 300 terminates the payout / launch control circuit activation processing routine according to the second embodiment.

In step S1563, the payout / launch control circuit 300 performs the initial setting process at the time of activation. When this process is completed, the payout / launch control circuit 300 shifts the process to step S1564.

In step S1564, the payout / launch control circuit 300 performs a transition process to a game-enabled state. When this process is completed, the payout / launch control circuit 300 ends the payout / launch control circuit activation process routine according to the second embodiment.

[Sub CPU startup process according to the second embodiment]
Next, the sub CPU activation process according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 127.

In the sub CPU activation process shown in FIG. 127, the process of step S1571 is the same as the process of step S1541 shown in FIG. 123.

In step S1572, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a start command from the main CPU 101 has been received. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the start command has been received, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1573. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub CPU 201 has not received the start command, the sub CPU 201 ends the sub CPU start processing routine according to the second embodiment.

In step S1573, the sub CPU 201 performs an initial setting process at startup. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1574.

In step S1574, the sub CPU 201 performs a transition process to the game-enabled state. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the sub CPU start process routine.

As described above, also in the second embodiment, the initialization process of the sub CPU 201 and the payout / emission control circuit 300 is performed after waiting for the initialization process of the magnetic sensor. In other words, the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is performed before the initialization process of the sub CPU 201 and the payout / emission control circuit 300. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to prevent the initial value of the magnetic sensor and thus the reference value from being set unreasonably high. Therefore, it is possible to perform appropriate fraud detection.

[Direction processing based on specific prizes]
Next, the specific winning effect that is normally performed will be described.

The specific winning effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined effect image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the game ball wins a prize at the predetermined start port. The specific winning effect is displayed during normal time (non-probability change / non-time saving state). In the present embodiment, the predetermined starting port is, for example, of the two first starting ports (base plate side advantageous outward path 7072b and starting port 7071a) of the starting port unit 7070 shown in FIG. 42 or the like, the base plate side advantageous outward path 7072b. Point to.

In addition, as described above, in the case where the person who wins the base plate side advantageous outbound route 7072b (when passing the advantageous course) wins the starting port 7071a (when passing the disadvantageous course) at the two first starting ports. It is set so that you can get more prize balls than. In this way, when a game ball wins a prize on the advantageous outbound route 7072b on the base plate side, the player is notified that a large number of prize balls have been acquired by displaying a predetermined effect image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16. Can be done. In the following, the winning of the game ball on the advantageous outbound route 7072b on the base plate side may be referred to as a "specific winning".

In the following, FIG. 128 shows an example of a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 when a specific winning effect is performed.

As shown in FIG. 128, in a normal game (non-probability change / non-time saving state), the liquid crystal display device 16 is provided with a symbol variation display area 1021 and a specific winning effect display area 1022.

The symbol variation display area 1021 is a display area in which variation display of the three identification symbols is performed. The symbol variation display area 1021 is provided so as to substantially occupy the upper half of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16. In this way, the symbol variation display area 1021 is set so that the variation display of the three identification symbols can be easily visually recognized by the player.

The display area 1022 for the specific winning effect is provided in the lower center portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the example shown in FIG. 128, the characters "GOOD" are displayed in the specific winning effect display area 1022 due to the specific winning effect (the specific winning effect is performed). The characters "GOOD" in the specific winning effect are erased after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Even if there is a specific prize, the specific prize effect is not performed if the predetermined reach effect is in progress. In the present embodiment, as a predetermined condition, for example, a darkening reach effect (not shown) can be mentioned. The blackout reach effect is a reach effect in which the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 is darkened, as in the first effect in the first look-ahead effect as described above. In such a reach effect, when the characters "GOOD" are displayed, the effect in the darkened state is hindered. Therefore, in such a case, the specific winning effect is not performed.

Hereinafter, the specific winning effect determination process for determining whether or not to perform the specific winning effect will be described using the flowchart of FIG. 129.

The specific winning effect determination process shown in FIG. 129 is performed in the effect pattern determination process (see FIG. 94 (a)) by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201) as described above.

In step S1581, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is a normal game (non-probability change / non-time saving state). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is a normal game (non-probability change / non-time saving state), the process shifts to step S1582. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is not a normal game (non-probability change / non-time saving state), the sub CPU 201 ends the specific winning effect determination process.

In step S1582, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a specific winning (winning of the game ball on the base plate side advantageous outbound route 7072b). If the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a specific prize, the process shifts to step S1583. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no specific winning, the sub CPU 201 ends the specific winning effect determination process.

In step S1583, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the blackout reach effect is being produced. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the blackout reach effect is not in progress, the sub CPU 201 shifts the process to step S1584. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the blackout reach effect is in progress, the sub CPU 201 ends the specific winning effect determination process. That is, in this case, even though there is a specific prize, the specific prize production is not performed.

In step S1584, the sub CPU 201 decides to perform a specific winning effect. In this way, the specific winning effect is performed, and the characters "GOOD" are displayed in the specific winning effect display area 1022 of the liquid crystal display device 16. After this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the specific winning effect determination process.

In the present embodiment, the blackout reach effect is exemplified as the predetermined reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this.

[Always look ahead to fluctuation patterns in specific states]

Next, the look-ahead of the fluctuation pattern in a specific state at all times will be described.

In the conventional technique, a big hit, a small hit, and a loss are judged based on the game state at the time of the hold winning and the fluctuation pattern selection state (the big hit is judged in the special figure high probability and the special figure low probability, respectively) and the hit. At times, the hit symbol is judged (implemented for big hits or small hits in either state regardless of high probability or low probability), and the fluctuation pattern is judged (the above two in the state of staying now). It was carried out based on the judgment result). In addition, although it is common to make these look-ahead judgments in the state at the time of the hold winning, a game that makes a look-ahead judgment in the game state where it is assumed that the player is staying when the game actually fluctuates, considering the hold digestion order. There is also an opportunity.

When you want to make a look-ahead judgment of what kind of fluctuation is selected under specific conditions (for example, a fluctuation pattern selection state where only 4 rotations stay after the big hit) when the reserved ball actually fluctuates. If the main control circuit 100 makes a determination in consideration of the number of fluctuations until the reserved ball is digested, the order of digestion, the transition of the game state due to the big hit in the reserved ball, etc., the problem is that the program capacity required for the determination increases. There is a point. Therefore, the determination in the main control circuit 100 is made into a simple program, and it is possible to determine whether or not to use the determination result of the main control circuit 100 on the sub control circuit 200 side.

Specifically, the following method is adopted.

In the main control circuit 100, in addition to the pre-reading determination normally performed, a lottery is performed to determine what happens if the fluctuation occurs under specific conditions regardless of whether or not there is a possibility of actually shifting to that state. That is, in addition to determining big hit, small hit, and loss, determining the hit symbol at the time of hit, and determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern is determined under specific conditions. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the state of the specific condition is limited to "4 rotations immediately after the end of the big hit when the probability change is in progress after the big hit", so that the judgment on the main control circuit 100 side is "big hit". , Small hit, Loss determination ", the fluctuation pattern determination is performed as a big hit only" when a big hit occurs during a high probability ", and the fluctuation pattern is determined as a loss in other cases.

Further, on the sub control circuit 200 side, the fluctuation pattern information of four rotations immediately after the end of the big hit is used when the probability change is in progress after the big hit only in a predetermined state (here, only at the start of the big hit during the probability change). Further, on the sub-control circuit 200 side, the fluctuation pattern information of the normal look-ahead determination is used in other states. In addition, at the time of a big hit during normal times, there is no lottery as to whether or not to perform a pending continuous production.

In addition, the hold of special figure 2 is checked in order from the previous hold, and the fluctuation pattern in "4 rotations immediately after the end of the big hit when the probability change is in progress after the big hit" is acquired from each hold, and based on the fluctuation pattern information. Let the lottery table decide whether to perform the hold continuous production. It is also used to determine whether or not there is a specific loss fluctuation pattern in determining whether or not to perform an effect suggesting a pending ream in the effect during the big hit in the big hit during the probability change. In addition, the hold of Special Figure 2 is checked in order from the previous hold, and the fluctuation pattern in "4 rotations immediately after the end of the big hit when the probability change is in progress after the big hit" is acquired from each hold, and based on the fluctuation pattern information. It is determined whether or not a specific loss fluctuation pattern is in front of the jackpot fluctuation, and it is decided whether or not to perform the hold continuous production.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, a technique of a gaming machine for changing the length of time of an ending effect performed when a jackpot game is completed is known (see JP-A-2015-198776).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine that changes the length of the ending effect time according to the winning situation of the gaming ball in a specific area during the jackpot game.

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that the time management of the production becomes complicated because the time of the ending production differs depending on the game situation.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of facilitating time management of production.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board 17 having a gaming area 20 in which the gaming ball can roll, a first position in which the gaming ball is easy to win, and a second position in which the gaming ball is difficult to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) provided with a shutter 610 (displacement member) that can be displaced to a position, first and second starting ports (passing areas) through which a game ball can pass in the game area 20, and the above. The shutter 610 is based on the main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) capable of storing starting information based on the passage of the gaming ball through the first and second starting ports (passing areas) and the determination result based on the starting information. A main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) capable of executing a hit game in which (displacement member) is displaced to the first position, and a main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player after the completion of the hit game. A control circuit 100 (specific game control means), a liquid crystal display device 16 (display means) capable of displaying identification information determined based on the start information, and a main control circuit capable of stopping and displaying the identification information in a variable manner. A gaming machine including 100 (identification information control means) and a sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) for controlling the effect, wherein the hit game is the shutter 610 (displacement) after the start of the hit game. The main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) has a round game in which the member) is displaced from the second position to the first position, and the main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) has a predetermined end interval period after the round game is completed. After the lapse of time, the jackpot game (hit game) is terminated, and the main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) obtains the identification information based on the start information after the jackpot game (hit game) is completed. The sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) is capable of variable display, and when the probabilistic game (specific game) is executed after the big hit game (hit game) is completed, the big hit game is in the end interval period. The end effect of the (hit game) is executed, and after the end of the big hit game (hit game), the effect related to the probabilistic game (specific game) is started, and the probable change game (specific game) is started after the big hit game (hit game is completed). ) Is not executed, the ED effect (end) of the jackpot game (hit game) extends from the end interval period) to at least a part of the period of the fluctuation display of the first identification information after the end of the jackpot game (hit game). The feature is that the production) can be executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the time management of the production.

Specifically, when the limit is reached, the ED effect is not ended at the timing when the jackpot game ends (the timing when the end interval period ends), but continues until the middle of the next first variation. As a result, for example, even when all the end interval periods set in the sub CPU 201 are set to be the same, the ED effect is performed in a short period when the limit is not reached, and the ED effect (result display) is performed when the limit is reached. The effect and the EX game transition effect) can be performed for a long period of time (for example, 15 seconds).

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board 17 having a gaming area 20 in which the gaming ball can roll, a first position where the gaming ball is easy to win, and a second position where the gaming ball is difficult to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) provided with a displaceable shutter 610 (displacement member), first and second starting ports (passing areas) through which a game ball can pass in the game area 20, and the first. The main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) capable of storing starting information based on the passage of the gaming ball through the second starting port (passing area), and the shutter 610 (displacement) based on the determination result based on the starting information. A main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) capable of executing a hit game in which the member) is displaced to the first position, and a main control circuit capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player after the hit game is completed. 100 (specific game control means), a liquid crystal display device 16 (display means) capable of displaying identification information determined based on the start information, and a main control circuit 100 (stop display possible after displaying the identification information in a variable manner) (display means). A gaming machine including an identification information control means) and a sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) for controlling the effect, wherein the hit game is the shutter 610 (displacement member) after the start of the hit game. Has a round game of displacing from the second position to the first position, and the main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) has elapsed a predetermined end interval period after the round game is completed. Later, the jackpot game (hit game) is terminated, and the main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the start information after the jackpot game (hit game) is completed. It is possible, and the sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) is such that when the probability variation game (specific game) is executed after the big hit game (hit game) is completed, the big hit game (hit) is performed in the end interval period. The ED effect (end effect) of the game) is executed, the effect related to the probability change game (specific game) is started after the jackpot game (hit game) is completed, and the probability change game is completed after the jackpot game (hit game) is completed. When (specific game) is not executed, the ED effect of the big hit game (hit game) extends from the end interval period to at least a part of the period of the change display of the first identification information after the end of the big hit game (hit game). Execute (end production) and
The period (10 seconds in this embodiment) from the start of fluctuation of the first identification information after the end of the big hit game (hit game) to the end of the ED effect (end effect) of the big hit game (hit game) is It is characterized in that it is longer than the end interval period (5 seconds in this embodiment).

With such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the time management of the production.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the EX game transition effect is performed (from the start of fluctuation of the first identification information after the end of the big hit game to the end of the ED effect of the big hit game) rather than the end interval period during which the result display effect is performed. Since the period) is a longer period, it is possible to make the effect of notifying that the EX game is to be started relatively diverse. In this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the player even though the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic / shortened state to the non-probable / shortened state.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board 17 having a gaming area 20 in which the gaming ball can roll, a first position where the gaming ball is easy to win, and a second position where the gaming ball is difficult to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) provided with a displaceable shutter 610 (displacement member), first and second starting ports (passing areas) through which a game ball can pass in the game area 20, and the first. The main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) capable of storing starting information based on the passage of the gaming ball through the second starting port (passing area), and the shutter 610 (displacement) based on the determination result based on the starting information. A main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) capable of executing a hit game in which the member) is displaced to the first position, and a main control circuit capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player after the hit game is completed. 100 (specific game control means), a liquid crystal display device 16 (display means) capable of displaying identification information determined based on the start information, and a main control circuit 100 (stop display possible after displaying the identification information in a variable manner) (display means). A gaming machine including an identification information control means) and a sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) for controlling the effect, wherein the specific game is mainly controlled in a game that can be selected as the specific game. The circuit 100 (hit game determining means) has a probabilistic game capable of determining whether or not to generate the hit game with a higher probability than the normal game, and the hit game is described after the start of the hit game. The main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) has a round game in which the shutter 610 (displacement member) is displaced from the second position to the first position, and the main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) is predetermined after the round game is completed. After the end interval period has elapsed, the jackpot game (hit game) is terminated, and the main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) is based on the start information after the jackpot game (hit game) is completed. The identification information can be variably displayed, and the sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) determines the end interval period when the probabilistic game (specific game) is executed after the big hit game (hit game) is completed. In the above-mentioned, the end effect of the big hit game (hit game) is executed, and after the end of the big hit game (hit game), the effect related to the probability variation game (specific game) is started, and after the big hit game (hit game) is completed, the above-mentioned When the probabilistic game (specific game) is not executed, at least a part of the variation display of the first identification information after the end of the big hit game (hit game) from the end interval period. The ED effect (end effect) of the big hit game (hit game) is executed over a period of time, and the variable display of the first identification information is displayed more than the normal game before the big hit game (hit game) is executed. It is characterized in that it is performed in a predetermined mode that is difficult for the player to see.

With such a configuration, it is possible to facilitate the time management of the production.

In other words, the player who has the impression that the jackpot game is still continuing (that is, the fluctuation display of the next first fluctuation has not started) feels uncomfortable by actually visually recognizing the fluctuation display. You can avoid receiving it. That is, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the present embodiment, when the limit is reached, the ED effect is not terminated at the timing when the jackpot game ends, but is continued until the middle of the next first fluctuation, but the present invention is not limited to this. not. Specifically, when the limit is reached, the ED effect may be terminated at the timing when the next variation display of the first variation is completed, or may be continued until the second variation or later.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, there is a known technique for a gaming machine that performs a hold continuous suggestion effect that suggests that a jackpot is included in a hold during the production of a big hit game (see JP-A-2016-15093).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine that performs a hold continuous suggestion effect suggesting that a big hit is included in the hold as a big hit effect during a big hit round game.

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem that they lack the interest in playing games because the timings for suggesting hold reams are the same.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment has a game board 17 having a game area 20 in which the game ball can roll, a first position in which the game ball is easy to win, and a second position in which the game ball is difficult to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) provided with a shutter 610 (displacement member) that can be displaced to a position, first and second starting ports (passing areas) through which a game ball can pass in the game area 20, and the above. The main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) capable of storing starting information based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the first and second starting ports (passing areas), and the determination result based on the starting information. A main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) capable of executing a hit game in which the shutter 610 (displacement member) is displaced to the first position, and a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying identification information determined based on the start information. 16 (image display means), a main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) that can be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed, and a sub control circuit that can determine the content of the effect to be executed based on the start information. A gaming machine including a 200 (effect content determining means) and a sub control circuit 200 (effect control means) capable of executing effect control based on the effect content determined by the sub control circuit 200 (effect content determining means). The sub control circuit 200 (effect control means) is a holding ball (starting) based on the start information stored in the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) in the liquid crystal display device 16 (image display means). The control for displaying the information image) can be executed, and the sub-control circuit 200 (effect content determining means) displays the holding ball (starting information image) when the starting information is specific starting information. It is possible to decide to execute the first effect (first specific effect) in the period from the time when it is decided to be performed until the start of the variation display based on the specific start information, and the specific effect can be determined. In connection with the execution of the variable display of the identification information based on the start information, the second effect (second specific effect) is based on the start information stored in the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means). ) Can be executed, and the sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) executes the first effect (first specific effect) and then the second effect (second specific effect). Is characterized by being feasible.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the first effect ends, the darkened screen is displayed, and when the second effect starts, the effect (EF) is displayed on the darkened screen. ) Is displayed. As described above, the effect mode when the first effect ends and the effect mode when the second effect starts are substantially the same effect mode. In this way, by combining the first effect of darkening the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 and the second effect of making a predetermined character appear on the screen darkened by the first effect by using an effect, the first effect is achieved. It is possible to suggest a pending ream without causing a sense of discomfort in the connection between the production and the second production. In this way, without causing a sense of discomfort to the player, the effect of a combination of light particles having high brightness with respect to black color (that is, the first effect is performed so that the effect content of the second effect is shining). By performing (related production), it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, the specific start information is start information determined to be a hit game, and the second effect (second specific effect) is a specific effect for executing the first effect (first specific effect). It is executed during the variable display of the identification information based on the start information.

According to such a configuration, when the second effect is executed, the player is made to recognize that the current situation is in the variable display of the identification information based on the specific start information for executing the first effect. Can be done. In this way, the interest can be improved.

Further, the game machine according to the present embodiment has a game board 17 having a game area 20 on which the game ball can roll, a first position where the game ball is easy to win, and a second position where the game ball is hard to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) provided with a displaceable shutter 610 (displacement member), first and second starting ports (passing areas) through which a game ball can pass in the game area 20, and the first. The shutter 610 (displacement) is based on the main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) capable of storing start information based on the passage of the game ball through the second start port (passing area) and the determination result based on the start information. A main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) capable of executing a hit game that displaces a member) to the first position, and a liquid crystal display device 16 (image display) capable of displaying identification information determined based on the start information. Means), a main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) that can be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed, and a sub control circuit 200 (effect content) that can determine the content of the effect to be executed based on the start information. A gaming machine including a determination means) and a sub control circuit 200 (effect control means) capable of executing effect control based on the effect content determined by the sub control circuit 200 (effect content determination means). The sub control circuit 200 (effect control means) has a holding ball (starting information image) based on the start information stored in the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) in the liquid crystal display device 16 (image display means). The control to be displayed can be executed, and the sub-control circuit 200 (effect content determining means) can display the holding ball (starting information image) when the starting information is the first specific starting information. It is possible to decide to execute the first effect (first specific effect) in the period from the determination to the start of the variation display based on the first specific start information, and the first specific start can be performed. Depending on whether or not the second specific start information (big hit) is stored in the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) in connection with the execution of the variable display of the identification information based on the information. It is possible to determine to execute a second effect (second specific effect) in which the effect content can be changed to a specific effect content, and the sub control circuit 200 (effect control means) is the first effect (first effect). The second effect (second specific effect) can be executed after the specific effect of the above is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the first effect ends, the darkened screen is displayed, and when the second effect starts, the effect (EF) is displayed on the darkened screen. ) Is displayed. As described above, the effect mode when the first effect ends and the effect mode when the second effect starts are substantially the same effect mode. In this way, by combining the first effect of darkening the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16 and the second effect of making a predetermined character appear on the screen darkened by the first effect by using an effect, the first effect is achieved. It is possible to suggest a pending ream without causing a sense of discomfort in the connection between the production and the second production. In this way, without causing a sense of discomfort to the player, the effect of a combination of light particles having high brightness with respect to black color (that is, the first effect is performed so that the effect content of the second effect is shining). By performing (related production), it is possible to improve the interest of the player.
Further, in the second effect, the content of the effect is changed depending on whether or not the hold ball in the hold ball display area 1200 is a big hit. Specifically, when the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200 is a big hit, the appearance effect is performed, and when the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200 is lost, a false effect is performed. In this way, since various productions can be performed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, the first specific start information is start information determined to be a hit game, and the second effect (second specific effect) is a first effect of executing the first effect (first specific effect). 1 It is executed during the variable display of the identification information based on the specific start information.

According to such a configuration, when the second effect is executed, the player is made to recognize that the current situation is changing the identification information based on the first specific start information for executing the first effect. be able to. In this way, the interest can be improved.

Further, the game machine according to the present embodiment has a game board 17 having a game area 20 on which the game ball can roll, a first position where the game ball is easy to win, and a second position where the game ball is hard to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) provided with a displaceable shutter 610 (displacement member), first and second starting ports (passing areas) through which a game ball can pass in the game area 20, and the first. The shutter 610 (displacement) is based on the main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) capable of storing starting information based on the passage of the game ball through the second starting port (passing area) and the determination result based on the starting information. A main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) capable of executing a hit game that displaces a member) to the first position, and a liquid crystal display device 16 (image display) capable of displaying identification information determined based on the start information. Means), a main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) that can be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variablely displayed, and a sub control circuit 200 (effect content) that can determine the content of the effect to be executed based on the start information. A gaming machine including a determination means) and a sub control circuit 200 (effect control means) capable of executing effect control based on the effect content determined by the sub control circuit 200 (effect content determination means). The sub control circuit 200 (effect control means) has a holding ball (start information image) based on the start information stored in the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) in the liquid crystal display device 16 (image display means). The control to be displayed can be executed, and the sub-control circuit 200 (effect content determining means) can display the holding ball (starting information image) when the starting information is the first specific starting information. The first effect (first specific effect) executed in the period from the determination to the start of the variation display based on the first specific start information, and the identification information based on the first specific start information. It is possible to determine to execute the second effect (second specific effect) executed during the variable display of the above, and it is related to the variable display of the identification information based on the first specific start information. When the second specific start information (big hit) is stored in the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means) and the predetermined conditions are satisfied (see FIG. 104), the second effect (second effect). The sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means) can execute the effect change process for changing the effect content (to the ghost effect or the appearance effect) of the specific effect (the first specific effect). After executing the above-mentioned second production (second production) It is characterized by being able to execute a specific effect).

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the content of the second effect is changed depending on whether or not the hold ball in the hold ball display area 1200 is a big hit. Specifically, when the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200 is a big hit, the appearance effect is performed, and when the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200 is lost, a false effect is performed. Further, even when the reserved ball in the reserved ball display area 1200 is a big hit, for example, when the reserved ball displayed in the reserved ball display area 1200 has a big hit in the hit type, the hit type is a big hit. Do not change the production content of the second production from the Gase production to the appearance production. In this way, since various productions can be performed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

The mutual relationship between the first effect and the second effect is not limited to that according to the present embodiment (relationship between the second effect and the first effect so that the effect content of the second effect can be seen). .. For example, a part of the effect image displayed in the first effect may be displayed in the second effect, and even if the effect images are completely different, the effect images displayed in the first effect and the second effect may be displayed. It may be conceptually related.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, a technique of a gaming machine that executes a dedicated effect different from a normal big hit effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied during a big hit game is known (see JP-A-2017-213104).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine that executes a special effect different from a normal big hit effect when a game ball enters a general winning opening during a big hit game.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the dedicated production is displayed only in a single shot in one big hit game and lacks interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board 17 having a gaming area 20 in which the gaming ball can roll, a first position in which the gaming ball is easy to win, and a second position in which the gaming ball is difficult to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) provided with a shutter 610 (displacement member) that can be displaced to a position, first and second starting ports (passing areas) through which a game ball can pass in the game area 20, and the above. The shutter 610 is based on a main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) capable of storing starting information based on the passage of a game ball through the first and second starting ports (passing areas) and a determination result based on the starting information. A main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) capable of executing a hit game in which the (displacement member) is displaced to the first position, and a liquid crystal display device 16 (a liquid crystal display device 16 capable of displaying identification information determined based on the start information). The effect control of the effect device including the image display means), the main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) capable of stopping and displaying after the identification information is variablely displayed, and the liquid crystal display device 16 (image display means) can be executed. A game machine including a sub-control circuit 200 (effect control means), wherein the hit game is a first hit game in which a specific game can be started after the hit game is completed, and the hit game. The sub control circuit 200 (effect control means) has a small hit game (second hit game) that does not newly start the specific game after the end of the operation, and the sub control circuit 200 (effect control means) is the main control circuit 100 (start information storage). When the specific start information in which the first hit game (8R big hit game) occurs is stored in the means), what is the first specific effect executed when the specific start information is not stored? Although it is possible to execute a different second specific effect (second look-ahead effect, particularly a series of hold continuous effects), the above-mentioned is performed before the specific start information stored in the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means). When the start information in which the small hit game (second hit game) occurs is stored in the main control circuit 100 (start information storage means), the second specific effect (second look-ahead effect, particularly a series of hold series) is stored. The feature is that the production) is not executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

Specifically, when the second look-ahead effect is performed, the impression that the big hit of 8R (probability change) in the first set and the big hit of 8R (probability change) in the second set are continuous (series) (that is,). It is possible to give the player the impression that it is a big hit of 16R (probability change). On the other hand, when a small hit game is played between the big hit of 8R (probability change) in the first set and the big hit of 8R (probability change) in the second set, 2 from the end of the big hit of 8R (probability change) in the first set. It is not possible to produce as if the start of the 8R (probability change) jackpot of the set is continuing. Therefore, even if the second look-ahead effect can be performed, if a small hit hold ball is displayed between the two 8R (probability change) hold balls, the second look-ahead effect is performed. Has been discontinued. This can improve the interest of the player.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, there is a known technique for a gaming machine that performs a hold continuous suggestion effect that suggests that a jackpot is included in a hold during the production of a big hit game (see JP-A-2016-15093).

The above-mentioned publication discloses a gaming machine that performs a hold continuous suggestion effect suggesting that a big hit is included in the hold as a big hit effect during a big hit round game.

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem that they lack the interest in playing games because the timings for suggesting hold reams are the same.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a gaming board 17 having a gaming area 20 in which the gaming ball can roll, a first position in which the gaming ball is easy to win, and a second position in which the gaming ball is difficult to win. A special electric accessory 600 (winning device) provided with a shutter 610 (displacement member) that can be displaced to a position, first and second starting ports (passing areas) through which a game ball can pass in the game area 20, and the above. The shutter 610 is based on the main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) capable of storing starting information based on the passage of the gaming ball through the first and second starting ports (passing regions) and the determination result based on the starting information. A main control circuit 100 (hit game control means) capable of executing a hit game in which the (displacement member) is displaced to the first position, and a liquid crystal display device 16 (a liquid crystal display device 16 capable of displaying identification information determined based on the start information). A gaming machine provided with a display means), a main control circuit 100 (identification information control means) capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner and then stopped and displaying, and a sub control circuit 200 (effect control means) for controlling the effect. Therefore, the hit game includes a probability change hit game (specific jackpot game), which is a jackpot game in which the probability change game (specific game) starts after the hit game ends, and the probability change game (specific) after the hit game ends. The jackpot game is generated, including a non-specific jackpot game which is a jackpot game in which the game) does not start, and a small hit game in which the probability variation game (specific game) is not newly started after the hit game is completed. A main control circuit 100 (counting means) capable of accumulating and counting the number of occurrences when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a main control circuit 100 (counting means) for resetting the counting value by the counting means when the non-specific jackpot game occurs. A counting value resetting means), and when the counting value exceeds a predetermined value, the sub-control circuit 200 (effect) does not perform the transition control to the probability variation game (specific game) after the jackpot game is completed. The control means) is the special electric accessory 600 (winning device) when the main control circuit 100 (starting information storage means) stores specific starting information in which the big hit game occurs during the small hit game. ), The hold continuous suggestion effect (specific effect) can be executed based on the winning of the game ball, but the count value exceeds a predetermined value due to the occurrence of the jackpot game based on the specific start information. In this case, the reserved continuous suggestion effect (specific effect) is not executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

Specifically, if the player's interest is not reduced even if the hold ream suggestion effect is performed, the hold ream can be performed. In this way, the interest of the player can be improved.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, a technique of a gaming machine capable of displaying an evaluation result of a game performed by a player is known (see JP-A-2015-8978).

The above-mentioned gazette discloses a gaming machine capable of ranking and displaying the number of consecutive villas and the number of balls acquired during a specific period.

However, the above-mentioned conventional pachinko machine has a problem that it lacks interest because the displayed contents only display the number of consecutive villas and the number of balls that have been won.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a hit game control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a hit game advantageous to the player and a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display) capable of notifying predetermined information. A gaming machine comprising the device 16), a positive evaluation result calculating means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for calculating a positive evaluation result for a game result during a predetermined period, and a game result during the predetermined period. Comprehensive evaluation result calculation for calculating the comprehensive evaluation during the predetermined period based on the negative evaluation result calculating means (for example, sub CPU201) for calculating the negative evaluation result and the positive evaluation result and the negative evaluation result. The notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) includes means (for example, a sub CPU 201), and the comprehensive evaluation result (for example) calculated by the comprehensive evaluation result calculation means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , Overall rank).

Further, the hit game includes a specific hit game (for example, a probabilistic hit game) that starts a specific game (for example, a probabilistic change game) that is advantageous to the player after the hit game is completed, and the hit game occurs. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a counting means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of accumulating and counting the number of occurrences is provided, and when the value counted by the counting means exceeds a predetermined value (for example, the limit number of times). After the hit game is completed, the transition control to the specific game (for example, a probabilistic game) is not performed, and the value counted by the counting means is the predetermined value (for example, the limit) as the end condition of the predetermined period. The predetermined condition includes the condition that the specific hit game (for example, the probability variation hit game) in which the value counted by the counting means exceeds the predetermined value is terminated. It is characterized by being included.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the overall rank is calculated so that the larger the number of balls acquired in the JAC game, the higher the evaluation, and the larger the game count in the JAC game, the lower the evaluation. Will be done. In this way, by incorporating not only the positive evaluation (the number of balls acquired during the JAC game) but also the negative evaluation (the game count during the JAC game) into the ranking, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the JAC game. can.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes a hit game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a hit game advantageous to the player, and a specific game control means (for example, a specific game control means capable of executing a specific game advantageous to the player). For example, a game including a main CPU 101), an image display means capable of displaying a predetermined image (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16), and an effect control means capable of controlling the image display means (for example, a sub CPU 201). A game number counting means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of accumulating and counting the number of games during the specific game period, and the machine, accumulating and counting the number of hit games during the specific game period. A possible hit game number counting means (for example, sub CPU 201), an imparted value counting means (for example, sub CPU 201) for counting the value given to the player by the hit game during the period of the specific game, and the game. A game number evaluation calculation means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of calculating a game count evaluation based on the counting result by the number counting means, and a given value evaluation capable of calculating the given value evaluation based on the counting result by the given value counting means. A calculation means (for example, sub CPU 201), a hit game number evaluation calculation means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of calculating a hit game count evaluation based on the counting result by the hit game count counting means, and the game count evaluation calculation means. And a comprehensive evaluation calculation means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of calculating a comprehensive evaluation (for example, a total rank) of a game performed by a player based on the given value evaluation calculation means and the winning game count evaluation calculation means. The comprehensive evaluation calculation means can calculate the comprehensive evaluation over a plurality of stages from a low evaluation stage to a high evaluation stage, and the counting value by the given value counting means (for example, the number of balls acquired). ) Is larger, the given value evaluation is calculated higher, and the larger the counting value by the winning game number counting means (for example, the number of JACs) is, the higher the winning game number evaluation is calculated, and the counting value by the game number counting means (for example). For example, the larger the game count), the lower the game count evaluation is calculated, and the effect control means is characterized in that the comprehensive evaluation is displayed on the image display means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Is.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

Specifically, the overall rank is calculated so that the larger the counting value by the given value counting means (the number of balls acquired during the JAC game) and the counting value by the winning game count counting means (the number of JACs), the higher the evaluation. , It is calculated so that the larger the counting value (game count in the JAC game) by the game count counting means, the lower the evaluation. In this way, by incorporating not only the positive evaluation (number of balls acquired during the JAC game and the game count) but also the negative evaluation (game count) into the ranking, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the JAC game. ..

The main CPU 101 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of a hit game control means and a specific game control means.
Further, the sub CPU 201 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of an effect control means, a game number counting means, an added value counting means, an evaluation result calculation means, and a winning game number counting means.
Further, the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the image display means.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, as shown in FIG. 119, the sub CPU 201 may display not only the overall rank but also the rank for each of the game count, the number of JACs, and the number of balls acquired on the game evaluation result display screen. As a result, the player can know the game evaluation result in more detail.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment has a hit game control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a hit game advantageous to the player, and a notification means (for example, a liquid crystal display) capable of notifying predetermined information. A game machine provided with a device 16), a positive evaluation result calculation means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for calculating a positive evaluation result for a game result during a predetermined period, and a game result during the predetermined period. Based on the negative evaluation result calculation means (for example, sub CPU201) for calculating the negative evaluation result, and the positive evaluation result and the negative evaluation result, the comprehensive evaluation (for example, the overall rank) during the predetermined period is performed. A comprehensive evaluation result calculation means (for example, sub CPU 201) for calculating is provided, and the positive evaluation result calculation means can calculate an added value evaluation based on the value given to the player by the hit game. The negative evaluation result calculation means includes a calculation means (for example, sub CPU201), and the negative evaluation result calculation means includes a game number evaluation calculation means (for example, subCPU201) capable of calculating a game number evaluation based on the number of games during the predetermined period. The notification means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) is characterized in that when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the notification means (for example, the total rank) calculated by the comprehensive evaluation result calculation means is notified. It is something to do.

Further, the hit game includes a specific hit game (for example, a probabilistic hit game) that starts a specific game (for example, a probabilistic change game) that is advantageous to the player after the hit game is completed, and the hit game occurs. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a counting means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of accumulating and counting the number of occurrences is provided, and when the value counted by the counting means exceeds a predetermined value (for example, the limit number of times). After the hit game is completed, the transition control to the specific game (for example, a probabilistic game) is not performed, and the value counted by the counting means is the predetermined value (for example, the limit) as the end condition of the predetermined period. The predetermined condition includes the condition that the specific hit game (for example, the probability variation hit game) in which the value counted by the counting means exceeds the predetermined value is terminated. It is characterized by being included.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the overall rank is calculated so that the larger the number of balls acquired in the JAC game, the higher the evaluation, and the larger the game count in the JAC game, the lower the evaluation. Will be done. In this way, by incorporating not only the positive evaluation (the number of balls acquired during the JAC game) but also the negative evaluation (the game count during the JAC game) into the ranking, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the JAC game. can.

Based on the above embodiments, the outline of the present invention is listed below.

Conventionally, a technique of a gaming machine provided with an error determining means capable of determining whether or not an error has occurred is known (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 2002-282505).

In the above publication, a game board is provided with fraudulent detection means for detecting fraudulent magnetism, etc., and it is determined that an error has occurred when the fraudulent detection means detects fraudulent magnetism, and the operation of the movable wing piece is interrupted. The machine is disclosed.

However, since magnetism and the like occur even in the normal operation of the gaming machine, the criteria for determining that an error has occurred (determining as illegal magnetism, etc.) vary depending on the surrounding environment and the state of the gaming machine, and are appropriate fraudulent. There was a problem that detection could not be performed.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing appropriate error determination.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment has a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing game control according to a game operation performed by the player, and a detection means connected to the game control means (for example). For example, a magnetic sensor), an error determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not an error has occurred based on a detection signal from the detecting means, and an electrical drive source for moving a movable body. With the effect device (for example, ordinary electric accessory 460, special electric accessory 600, first movable accessory unit (effect device 2400), second movable accessory unit 82, and third movable accessory unit 83). A gaming machine comprising: an effect control means capable of controlling the effect device (for example, a sub CPU 201) and a transmission unit capable of transmitting a command from the game control means to the effect control means (for example, the main CPU 101). Therefore, after the power is supplied, the game control means can execute a reference value setting process for setting a reference value as a reference for error determination by the error determination means, and the transmission means activates the game control means. In the initial setting process of the time, a command can be transmitted to the effect control means after the reference value setting process is executed, and the effect control means receives the command transmitted from the game control means after the power is supplied. If this is the case, the initialization process including the movement of the movable body can be executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an appropriate error determination.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is executed after the first period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed after the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the first period and the magnetic sensor are executed. The initialization process of the effector is executed after a second period (for example, 12 seconds) longer than the total period of the period required for the initialization process (for example, 1 second) has elapsed. In this way, the initialization process of the effect device and the initialization process of the magnetic sensor are executed at timings that do not overlap with each other. In this way, since the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is performed before the initial setting process of the sub CPU 201, the magnetic sensor is a normal electric accessory 460 (starting port solenoid 462) and a special electric accessory 600 (large winning opening solenoid 620). ), The peripheral magnetic field at that time is initially set in a state where the drive system of the first movable accessory unit (directing device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, the third movable accessory unit 83, etc. is stopped. It is stored as a state, and the detected value of the initial state is set as the initial value. Therefore, the initial value of the magnetic sensor is not affected by the magnetic field generated by driving these driving members. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the initial value of the magnetic sensor and thus the reference value from being set unreasonably high. Therefore, it is possible to perform appropriate fraud detection.

Further, the game machine according to the present embodiment has a game control means (for example, a main CPU 101) capable of executing game control according to a game operation performed by a player, and a detection means connected to the game control means (for example, for example). A magnetic sensor), an error determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not an error has occurred based on a detection signal from the detecting means, and an electric drive source for moving a movable body. Devices (for example, ordinary electric accessory 460, special electric accessory 600, first movable accessory unit (directing device 2400), second movable accessory unit 82, and third movable accessory unit 83) and the above. A gaming machine including an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of controlling an effect device, wherein the game control means sets a reference value as a reference for error determination by the error determination means after power is supplied. The reference value setting process to be set can be executed, the effect control means can execute the initialization process including the movement of the movable body after the power is supplied, and the game control means is the first after the power is supplied. After one period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed, the reference value setting process is executed, and the effect control means has the first period after the power is supplied and the period required for the reference value setting process (for example, for example). It is characterized in that an initialization process including movement of the movable body is executed after a second period (for example, 12 seconds) longer than the total period of 1 second) has elapsed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an appropriate error determination.

Specifically, since the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is performed before the initial setting process of the sub CPU 201, the magnetic sensor is a normal electric accessory 460 (starting port solenoid 462) and a special electric accessory 600 (large prize). In a state where the drive system of the mouth solenoid 620), the first movable accessory unit (effect device 2400), the second movable accessory unit 82, the third movable accessory unit 83, etc. is stopped, the surroundings at that time. The magnetic field is stored as the initial state, and the detected value of the initial state is set as the initial value. Therefore, the initial value of the magnetic sensor is not affected by the magnetic field generated by driving these driving members. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the initial value of the magnetic sensor and thus the reference value from being set unreasonably high. Therefore, it is possible to perform appropriate fraud detection.

Further, the game machine according to the present embodiment has a game control means (for example, a main CPU 101) capable of executing game control according to a game operation performed by a player, and a detection means connected to the game control means (for example, for example). A magnetic sensor), an error determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not an error has occurred based on a detection signal from the detecting means, and an electric drive source for moving a movable body. Devices (for example, ordinary electric accessory 460, special electric accessory 600, first movable accessory unit (directing device 2400), second movable accessory unit 82, and third movable accessory unit 83) and the above. A gaming machine including an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of controlling an effect device, wherein the game control means sets a reference value as a reference for error determination by the error determination means after power is supplied. The reference value setting process to be set can be executed, the effect control means can execute the initialization process including the movement of the movable body after the power is supplied, and the game control means is the first after the power is supplied. After the lapse of one period (for example, 10 seconds), the reference value setting process is executed, and the effect control means has a period required for the first period and the reference value setting process (for example, after the power is supplied. After a second period (for example, 12 seconds) longer than the total period with (1 second) has elapsed, the initialization process including the movement of the movable body is executed, and the game control means is the initial stage of the reference value setting process. It is characterized in that the game is ready to be played after the conversion process is executed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an appropriate error determination.

Specifically, the initialization process of the magnetic sensor is performed before the transition of the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201 to the playable state. Therefore, the magnetic sensor stores the peripheral magnetic field at that time as the initial state in the state where the drive system to be driven during the game is stopped, and sets the detected value of the initial state as the initial value. Therefore, the initial value of the magnetic sensor is not affected by the magnetic field generated by driving the driving member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the initial value of the magnetic sensor and thus the reference value from being set unreasonably high. Therefore, it is possible to perform appropriate fraud detection.

The main CPU 101 according to this embodiment is an embodiment of the game control means and the error determination means.
Further, the sub CPU 201 according to the present embodiment is an embodiment of the effect control means.

Although one embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the payout / launch control circuit 300 and the sub CPU 201 perform the initial setting at the time of activation and the transition to the playable state after the activation weight (12 seconds) based on the respective weight timers. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in the second embodiment described above, the initial setting at startup and the transition to the game-enabled state may be performed based on the startup command from the main CPU 101. ..

16 Liquid crystal display device 17 Game board 20 Game area 100 Main control circuit 200 Sub control circuit 600 Special electric accessory 610 Shutter

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine equipped with a decorative part that can execute a production that can be visually recognized by the player.
The decorative part is
Light emitting means and
The substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted and
A light guide member that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means, and
A base member arranged on the back side of the substrate and
A light transmissive member arranged at a position where light emitted from the light emitting means through the light guide member can enter is provided.
The light transmissive member is
It extends from a position on the substrate covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means to a position outside the at least one end of the substrate and beyond the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the substrate.
The base member is
A position formed of a reflective member capable of reflecting light, outside the at least one end of the substrate and the end of the light guide member, and beyond the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the substrate. It is provided at a position where the light emitted from the end portion of the light transmissive member and the light emitted from the end portion of the light guide member can be reflected.
The light guide member is
Extends so as to incline from a position covering the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the substrate to a position outside the at least one end of the substrate and exceeding the back surface of the mounting surface of the light emitting means on the substrate. A gaming machine characterized by being played.

Images